General-Purpose Inverter

SIEIDrive
Serie 400/460V

ADV80
.... Instruction Manual
Information about this manual

Thank you for choosing this Gefran product.

We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us improving this manual. The e-mail
address is the following: techdoc@gefran.com.
Before using the product, read the safety instruction section carefully (in this manual).
Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation personnel during the product
functioning period.
Gefran S.p.A has the right to modify products, data and dimensions without notice.
The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be understood as legally stated
properties.

This manual is updated according the firmware version V 03.06.XX.

All rights reserved.

2 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Table of Contents

Information about this manual...................................................................................................................2

Symbols used in the manual...................................................................................................................................4
Chapter 1 - Safety Precautions..................................................................................................................5
1.1 Power Supply and Grounding . .........................................................................................................................7
Chapter 2 - General.....................................................................................................................................9
Chapter 3 - Inspection Procedure, Component Identification and Standard Specification............... 11
3.1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures.............................................................................................................11
3.1.1 General......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1.2 Inverter Type Designation............................................................................................................................................. 11
3.1.3 Nameplate....................................................................................................................................................................12
3.2 Component Identification.................................................................................................................................13
3.3 Standard Specifications...................................................................................................................................14
3.3.1 Permissible Environmental Conditions.........................................................................................................................14
3.3.2 Mains Connection and Inverter Output.........................................................................................................................15
3.3.3 AC Input Current . ........................................................................................................................................................16
3.3.4 AC Output.....................................................................................................................................................................16
3.3.5 Open-Loop and Closed-Loop Control Section..............................................................................................................17
3.3.6 Accuracy.......................................................................................................................................................................17
Chapter 4 - Installation Guidelines..........................................................................................................19
4.1 Mechanical Specification.................................................................................................................................19
4.2 Watts Loss, Heat Dissipation, Internal Fans and Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling.......... 22
4.3 Installation Mounting Clearance......................................................................................................................23
4.4 AC Induction Motors........................................................................................................................................24
Chapter 5 - Wiring Procedure..................................................................................................................26
5.1 Accessing to the Connectors...........................................................................................................................26
5.2 Power Section.................................................................................................................................................27
5.2.1 Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals...................................................................................................28
5.2.2 Rectification and Intermediate (D.C.) Circuit...............................................................................................................29
5.2.3 Inverter.........................................................................................................................................................................29
5.3 Regulation Section..........................................................................................................................................31
5.3.1 CANopen/DeviceNet Terminals (optional)....................................................................................................................32
5.4 Typical Connection Diagrams..........................................................................................................................33
5.4.1 Engineering Notes........................................................................................................................................................36
5.4.2 Serial Interface.............................................................................................................................................................36
5.4.3 Encoder Input...............................................................................................................................................................37
5.5 Parallel Connection on the AC (Input) and DC (Intermediate Circuit) Side of Several Inverters.....................38
5.6 Circuit Protection.............................................................................................................................................39
5.6.1 External Fuses of Input Voltage....................................................................................................................................39
5.6.2 External Fuses of DC Input Side................................................................................................................................40
5.7 Chokes / Filters (Optional)...............................................................................................................................41
5.7.1 Input Chokes................................................................................................................................................................41
5.7.2. Output Chokes.............................................................................................................................................................42
5.7.3. Interference Suppression Filters..................................................................................................................................42
5.7.3.1 EMI-FFT Filter Connections for ADV80........................................................................................................................................ 44
5.8 Braking............................................................................................................................................................45
5.8.1. Braking Unit.................................................................................................................................................................45
5.8.1.1 External Braking Resistor (Optional) . ......................................................................................................................................... 46
5.8.2 D.C. Braking.................................................................................................................................................................48
5.9 Discharge Time of the DC-Link........................................................................................................................49
Chapter 6 - Drive Keypad and Startup Operation..................................................................................50
6.1 Keypad............................................................................................................................................................50
6.2 Moving Through the Drive Main Menu.............................................................................................................52
6.3 Scrolling Through the Drive Parameters..........................................................................................................53
6.4 Parameters Modification..................................................................................................................................53
6.5 Quickstart procedure.......................................................................................................................................54
Chapter 7 - Parameter Description..........................................................................................................57
7.1 Parameters List ..............................................................................................................................................57
Chapter 8 - Serial Protocol.....................................................................................................................187
8.1 Modbus RTU Protocol for ADV80 drives.......................................................................................................187
8.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................187
8.1.2 The MODBUS Protocol..............................................................................................................................................187
8.1.3 Message format.........................................................................................................................................................187
8.1.3.1 The address............................................................................................................................................................................... 187
8.1.3.2 The function code....................................................................................................................................................................... 188
8.1.3.3 CRC16....................................................................................................................................................................................... 188

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 3

 8.1.3.4 Message synchronization.......................................................................................................................................................... 188
8.1.3.5 Serial line setting........................................................................................................................................................................ 189
8.1.4 Modbus functions for the drive...................................................................................................................................189
8.1.4.1 Read Output Registers (03)....................................................................................................................................................... 189
8.1.4.2 Read Input Registers (04).......................................................................................................................................................... 190
8.1.4.3 Preset Single Register (06)........................................................................................................................................................ 190
8.1.4.4 Read Status (07)........................................................................................................................................................................ 190
8.1.4.5 Preset Multiple Registers (16).................................................................................................................................................... 191
8.1.5 Error management......................................................................................................................................................191
8.1.5.1 Exception codes......................................................................................................................................................................... 192
8.1.6 System configuration..................................................................................................................................................192
8.2 Proprietary protocol.......................................................................................................................................193
8.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................193
8.2.2 Message format..........................................................................................................................................................193
8.2.3 Address.......................................................................................................................................................................194
8.2.4 Control code...............................................................................................................................................................194
8.2.5 Functions....................................................................................................................................................................194
8.2.6 Msg Slave meaning....................................................................................................................................................195
Chapter 9 - Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................196
9.1 Drive Alarm Condition....................................................................................................................................196
9.2 Alarm Reset...................................................................................................................................................196
9.3 List of Drive Alarm Events.............................................................................................................................197
INDEX PARAMETERS.............................................................................................................................198

Symbols used in the manual

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury
Warning
or death.

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or
destruction of equipment.
Caution

Indicates that the presence of electrostatic discharge could damage the appliance. When handling the
cards, always wear a grounded bracelet.

Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be strictly followed in order to optimize these
applications.
Important

Note ! Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.

4 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 1 - Safety Precautions

According to the EEC standards the ADV80 and accessories must be used only after checking that the
machine has been produced using those safety devices required by the 89/392/EEC set of rules, as far
Warning as the machine industry is concerned. These standards do not apply in the Americas, but may need to be
considered in equipment being shipped to Europe.
Drive systems cause mechanical motion. It is the responsibility of the user to insure that any such motion
does not result in an unsafe condition. Factory provided interlocks and operating limits should not be by-
passed or modified.

Electrical Shock and Burn Hazard:

When using instruments such as oscilloscopes to work on live equipment, the oscilloscope’s chassis should
be grounded and a differential amplifier input should be used. Care should be used in the selection of
probes and leads and in the adjustment of the oscilloscope so that accurate readings may be made. See
instrument manufacturer’s instruction book for proper operation and adjustments to the instrument.

Fire and Explosion Hazard:

Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous areas such as locations where flam-
mable or combustible vapors or dusts are present. Drives should be installed away from hazardous areas,
even if used with motors suitable for use in these locations.

Strain Hazard:
Improper lifting practices can cause serious or fatal injury. Lift only with adequate equipment and trained
personnel.

Drives and motors must be ground connected according to the NEC.

Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in industrial installations. Parts of the Drives
are energized during operation. The electrical installation and the opening of the device should therefore
only be carried out by qualified personnel. Improper installation of motors or Drives may therefore cause
the failure of the device as well as serious injury to persons or material damage.
Drive is not equipped with motor overspeed protection logic other than that controlled by software.Follow
the instructions given in this manual and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable.

Always connect the Drive to the protective ground (PE) via the marked connection terminals (PE2) and the
housing (PE1). ADV80 Drives and AC Input filters have ground discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA. EN
50178 specifies that with discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective conductor ground connec-
tion (PE1) must be fixed type and doubled for redundancy.

The drive may cause accidental motion in the event of a failure, even if it is disabled, unless it has been
disconnected from the AC input feeder.

Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supply is switched on. Minimum time to wait
before working on the terminals or inside the device is listed in section 5.9 on Instruction manual.

If the front plate has to be removed because of ambient temperature higher than 40 degrees, the user has
to ensure that no occasional contact with live parts may occur.

Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard specification voltage fluctuation permis-
sible. If excessive voltage is applied to the Drive, damage to the internal components will result.
Do not operate the Drive without the ground wire connected. The motor chassis should be grounded to
earth through a ground lead separate from all other equipment ground leads to prevent noise coupling.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 5

 The grounding connector shall be sized in accordance with the NEC or Canadian Electrical Code. The
connection shall be made by a UL listed or CSA certified closed-loop terminal connector sized for the wire
Caution gauge involved. The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer.

Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the control circuit terminals.

Because the ambient temperature greatly affects Drive life and reliability, do not install the Drive in any
location that exceeds the allowable temperature. Leave the ventilation cover attached for temperatures of
104° F (40° C) or below.

If the Drive’s Fault Alarm is activated, consult the TROUBLESHOOTING section of this instruction book,
and after correcting the problem, resume operation. Do not reset the alarm automatically by external se-
quence, etc.

Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet(s) when unpacking the Drive. (If not removed these packets
may become lodged in the fan or air passages and cause the Drive to overheat).

The Drive must be mounted on a wall that is constructed of heat resistant material. While the Drive is op-
erating, the temperature of the Drive’s cooling fins can rise to a temperature of 194° F (90°C).

Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device. The changing of the isolation gaps or
the removing of the isolation and covers is not permissible.

Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, shock etc.)

No voltage should be connected to the output of the drive (terminals U2, V2 W2). The parallel connection of
several drives via the outputs and the direct connection of the inputs and outputs (bypass) are not permis-
sible.

A capacitative load (e.g. Var compensation capacitors) should not be connected to the output of the drive
(terminals U2, V2, W2).

The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are also responsible
for the provision of a suitable ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in accordance with
the local and national regulations. The motor must be protected against overloads.

No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the drive. A suitable measuring instrument (internal
resistance of at least 10 kW/V) should be used for measuring the signal voltages.

Note ! If the Drives have been stored for longer than two years, the operation of the DC link capacitors may be impaired and must
be “reformed”.
Before commissioning devices that have been stored for long periods, connect them to a power supply for two hours with no
load connected in order to regenerate the capacitors, (the input voltage has to be applied without enabling the drive).

Note ! The terms “Inverter”, “Controller” and “Drive” are sometimes used interchangably throughout the industry. We will use the
term “Drive” in this document.

6 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 1.1 Power Supply and Grounding

1 - Gefran drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase lines that are electrically sym-
metrical with respect to ground (TN or TT network) (*),

2 - In case of supply with IT network (*) the use of delta/wye transformer is mandatory, with a secondary
three phase wiring referred to ground.

In case of a three phase supply not symmetrical to ground, an insulation loss of one of the devices connected to the same
network can cause functional problem to the drive, if the use of a delta/wye transformer is avoided.
Caution

Please refer to the following connection sample.

W2/T3
W1/L3

U2/T1
U1/L1

V2/T2
V1/L2

PE2/
PE1/
AC OUTPUT
AC Main Supply

AC INPUT

CHOKE
CHOKE

L1

L2

L3

Earth
Safety
ground
All wires (including motor ground) must
be connected inside the motor terminal box

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 7

Notes:

8 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 2 - General

ADV80 is an AC Digital Inverters for the variation of the speed of three-phase motors. The Inverter can be
supplied with a power range from 0.37kW (0.5Hp) up 22kW (30Hp), 400...460V.
An intermediate voltage is generated from the rectified AC voltage. The Inverter bridge then produces, from
this intermediate voltage, power supply with variable voltage and frequency, by means of sinusoidal evalu-
ated pulse-width modulation. This power supply provides motors with excellent running characteristics,
even in a lower range.

The power supply voltage of the various cards is obtained through a switching from the intermediate circuit
voltage.
The inverter power part is based on IGBT component (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor). The output is
protected against short-circuits and earth faults. It is possible to switch motors on and off during the Inverter
operation (see chapter 5.2.3)
If AC motors that are not specially manufactured to operate with an inverter are used, a reduction of 5...10%
in supplied current must be taken into account. In case that the rated torque is requested even in the low
frequency range, further reductions of the heat will be obtained by an external fan. If no assisted ventilation
is available, oversizing of the power of the motor will be necessary. In both cases we suggest to consult
the motor manufacturer.
For mechanical reasons (bearings, unbalanced mass, etc.) the motor manufacturer should be consulted
when the motor is operated above the rated frequency.

ADV80 Inverters can be controlled in different ways:

- via terminal strip on the drive
- via an operator keypad
- via a standard PC program through RS 485 interface

ADV80 allows a smooth open-loop control and closed-loop control. With closed-loop control, an encoder (a
pulse generator) provides speed feedback information.
The power section and the control electronics are galvanically isolated.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 9

 Features
- Supply voltages generated by switching starting from the intermediate circuit voltage.
- Reduction of motor noise is achieved by the use of a special PWM control procedure.
- The output of the Inverter is protected against short circuits and earth faults.
- Motors can be switched on and off at the Inverter output.
- The Inverter is protected against overcurrents, undervoltages and overvoltages.
- Voltage dips (up to 15 ms for the power section) can be bridged; for the control section (see chapter
5.2.3 for the automatic restart programmation).
- Sinusoidal output current generated by means of sinusoidally evaluated pulse-width modulation
- Excellent motor running characteristics, even in the lower frequency range.
- Programmable slip compensation reduces load-initiated changes in speed to a minimum.
- Voltage can be boosted in the lower frequency range, either manually or automatically (boost).
- Automatic voltage and frequency adjustment under an overload ensures the Inverter cannot stall.
- Parameters can be set either via a keypad or via an RS 485 interface.
- Reference value in the form of an analog signal 0...10 V, -10...10V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA as a frequen-
cy or via a serial interface.
- Ramp function generator with linear or S-shaped ramp.
- Direct current braking by commands:
a - thru digital input;
b - automatic injection below a set frequency;
c - Before starting the motor; used with pump and fan drives which are driven by the medium or by
the air and are already turning before the drive is started. D.C. braking prevents the Inverter being
switched on when already turning.
- A range of voltage-frequency characteristics can be selected.
- Overload control.
- The last 4 messages can be stored. Messages are retained even after power failure.
- Open-loop or closed-loop operation, as desired.
- Indication via a potential-free contact and via the interface when a preselected speed is exceeded.
Example of an application: indication of stationary drive.
- Control via an RS 485 serial interface.
- Internal brake unit.

Options
- Drive version (“-C”) with CANopen / DeviceNet integrated.
- External EMC input filters.
- External Input / Output chokes.
- External braking resistors (connected between terminals C and BR1/BR).
- I/O expansion card: EXP-D6A1R1-ADV80 (code S5AGV10)
- Profibus expansion card: SBI-PDP-ADV80 (code S5AGV9)

10 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 3 - Inspection Procedure, Component Identification and
Standard Specification

3.1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures

3.1.1 General

A high degree of care is taken in packing the ADV80 Drives and preparing them for delivery. They should
only be transported with suitable transport equipment (see weight data). Observe the instructions printed on
the packaging. This also applies when the device is unpacked and installed in the control cabinet.

Upon delivery, check the following:

- the packaging for any external damage
- whether the delivery note matches your order.

Open the packaging with suitable tools. Check whether:

- any parts were damaged during transport
- the device type corresponds to your order

In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please notify the responsible sales
offices immediately.
The devices should only be stored in dry rooms within the specified temperature ranges.

Note ! A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises from changes in temperature (see section 3.3.1, “Per-
missible Environmental Conditions”). This does not, however, apply when the devices are in operation. Always ensure that
there is no moisture condensation in devices that are connected to the power supply!

3.1.2 Inverter Type Designation

The technical specification of the ADV80 Drive is stated in the type code. Example:

ADV80 - 2 040 - K B X - X
C = CANopen/DeviceNet integrated;
[blank] = CANopen/DeviceNet NON integrated
Software torque Vector standard
Internal braking unit included as standard
Keypad included as standard
Drve kW rating
Drive mechanical dimensions
Drive series

The ADV80 Drive selected depends on the rated current of the motor. The rated output current at the ap-
propriate service conditions must be greater than or equal to the motor current required.
The speed of the three-phase motor is determined by the number of pole pairs and the frequency (name-
plate, data sheet) of the motor concerned. Operation above the rated frequency and speed of the motor
must take into account the specifications given by the manufacturer losses (bearings, unbalance etc.). This
also applies to temperature specifications for continuous operation under 20 Hz (poor motor ventilation, not
applicable to motors with external ventilation).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 11

 3.1.3 Nameplate

Check that all the data stated in the nameplate enclosed to the inverter correspond to what has been or-
dered.

Figure 3.1.3.1: Identification Nameplate

Type : ADV80 1004-KBX S/N: XXX

Inp: 400-480 VAc (Fctry Set=400) 50/60Hz 3Ph
2,05A@400VAc 1,3 @ 400Vac With line Choke
Out : 0-400Vac 0-500Hz 3Ph 0,37kW @ 400Vac
1,2A@400V Ovld. 150% - 60s

Made in Italy

Type: Inverter model

S/N: Serial number
Main Power In: Power supply voltage - AC Input current - Frequency
Main Power Out: Output voltage - Output current - Output frequency

Figure 3.1.3.2: Firmware & Card Revision Level Nameplate

Firmaware HW release S/N 0300894 Prod.

Release D F P R S BU SW . CFG CONF
C 2.03 A -A -.- 1.000 A1

Figure 3.1.3.3: Nameplates Position

Type : ADV80 1007-KBX Inverter Drive S/N 0300894

Inp: 400-460 Vac 50/60Hz 3Ph Zmin=1%
Firmware HW release S/N 0300894 Prod.
Release D F P R S BU SW . CFG CONF
Out : 0-400V 500Hz 3Ph 0.75kW @ 400Vac
2.2A@400Vac Cont. serv. C 2.03 A -.A -.- 1.000 A1

2A@400V Ovld. 150% 60s

LISTED
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

12 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 3.2 Component Identification

Figure 3.2.1: Basic Setup of Frequency Inverter

An ADV80 Drive converts the constant voltage and frequency of a three-phase power supply into a direct
voltage and then converts this direct voltage into a new three-phase power supply with a variable voltage
and frequency. This variable three-phase power supply can be used for the infinitely variable adjustment of
the speed of three-phase asynchronous motors.

1 AC Input supply voltage: 400Vac ... 480Vac

2 AC Mains choke (see section 5.7.1).
3 Three-phase rectifier bridge
Converts the alternating current into direct current using a three phase full wave bridge.
4 DC intermediate circuit
With charging resistor and smoothing capacitor.
Direct voltage (UDC) = √2 x Mains voltage (ULN)
5 IGBT inverter
Converts direct voltage to a variable three-phase alternating voltage with variable frequency.
6 Configurable control section
Modules for open-loop and closed-loop control of the power section. This is used for processing con-
trol commands, reference values and actual values.
7 Output voltage:
Three-phase, variable alternating voltage from 0 up to 94% of Mains voltage (ULN).
8 Encoder (option)
For speed feedback (see section 4.4.2)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 13

 3.3 Standard Specifications

3.3.1 Permissible Environmental Conditions

Table 3.3.1.1: Environmental Specification
ENVIRONMENT
[°C] 0 … +40; +40…+50 with derating
TA Ambient temperature
[°F] 32 … +104; +104…+122 with derating
Pollution degree 2 or better (free from direct sunligth, vibration, dust, corrosive or inflammable gases,
Installation location
fog, vapour oil and dripped water, avoid saline environment)
Up to 1000m (3281 feet) above sea level; for higher altitudes a current reduction of 1.2% for every
Installation altitude
100m (328 feet) of additional height applies. Max altitude 2000m.
Temperature:
operation 1) 0…40°C (32°…104°F)
operation 2) 0…50°C (32°…122°F)
storage -25…+55°C (-13…+131°F), class 1K4 with EN50178
-20…+55°C (-4…+131°F), for devices with keypad
transport -25…+70°C (-13…+158°F), class 2K3 with EN50178
-20…+60°C (-4…+140°F), for devices with keypad

Umidita` aria:
operation 5 % to 85 %, 1 g/m3 to 25 g/m3 without moisture condensation or icing (Class 3K3 as per EN50178)
storage 5% to 95 %, 1 g/m3 to 29 g/m3 (Class 1K3 as per EN50178)
transport 95 % 3) 60 g/m 4)
A light condensation of moisture may occur for a short time occasionally if the device is not in opera-
tion (class 2K3 as per EN50178)

Pressione aria:
operation [kPa] 86 to 106 (class 3K3 as EN50178)
storage [kPa] 86 to 106 (class 1K4 as EN50178)
transport [kPa] 70 to 106 (class 2K3 as EN50178)

STANDARD
General standards EN 61800-1, EN 61800-2
Safety EN 50178
Climatic conditions EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3. EN 60068-2-2, test Bd.
Clearance and creepage EN 50178, UL508C (*), UL840 (*). Overvoltage category for mains connected circuits: III; degree of pollution 2
Vibration EN 60068-2-6, test Fc.
EMC compatibility EN61800-3 (see “EMC Guidelines” instruction book)
Rated input voltages IEC 60038
Protection degree IP20 according to EN 60529
Approvals CE (all sizes), UL and cUL (in certification phase)

Drive shall operate under environmental service conditions ( climatic, mechanical, polution,...) defined in
EN 61800-2 as for “usual service condition”.
Important

1)
Over 40°C (104°F):
- current reduction of 2% of rated output current per K
- remove front plate (better than class 3K3 as per EN50178).
2)
Current derated to 0.8 rated ouput current
Over 40°C (104°F): removal of the top cover (better than class 3K3 as per EN50178).
3)
Greatest relative air humidity occurs with the temperature @ 40°C (104°F) or if the temperature of the
device is brought suddenly from -25 ...+30°C (-13°...+86°F).
4)
Greatest absolute air humidity if the device is brought suddenly from 70...15°C (158°...59°F).

Disposal of the Device

The ADV80 can be disposed as electronic scraps in accordance with the currently valid national regula-
tions for the disposal of electronic parts. The plastic covering of the Drives are recyclable: the material used
is (“ABS+PC”).

14 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 3.3.2 Mains Connection and Inverter Output

The ADV80 series must be connected to an AC mains supply capable of delivering a symmetrical short
circuit current lower or equal to the values indicated on table 3.3.2.1. For the use of an AC input choke see
paragraph 5.7.1.
Note from the table of paragraph 3.3.2.1. the allowable mains voltages. The cycle direction of the phases is free.
Voltages lower than the min. tolerance values can cause the block of the inverter.
It is possible to obtain the automatical restart of the inverter, after another failure has occured (For further
information, see chapter 7.6, section Autoreset Configuration).

Note ! In some cases AC Input chokes, and possibly noise suppression filters should be fitted on the AC Input side of the device. See
chapter “Chokes/Filters”.

Adjustable Frequency Drives and AC Input filters have ground discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA. EN
50178 specifies that with discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective conductor ground connec-
tion (PE1) must be fixed type.
Table 3.3.2.1: AC Input/Output Specifications
1004

1005

1007

2015

2022

2030

2040

2055

2075

3110

3150

3185

3220
Inverter model

Inverter Output (IEC 146 class2),

[kVA] 0.8 1.0 1.4 2.6 3.6 4.7 6.4 8.2 11.2 15.9 21.5 26.3 31.8
150% overload for 60s
PN mot (recommended motor output):
@ ULN=3x400Vac; fSW=default; IEC 146 class 2 [kW] 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
@ ULN=3x480Vac; IEC 146 class 2 [Hp] 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 4 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

U2 Max output voltage [V] 0.94 x ULN (AC Input voltage)

O
f2 Max output frequency [Hz] 500
U
T I Rated output current:
P 2N
U @ ULN=3x400Vac; fSW=default; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 1.1 1.5 2 3.7 5.2 6.8 9.2 11.8 16.1 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0
T @ ULN=3x480Vac; fSW=default; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 1.0 1.4 1.8 3.2 4.5 5.9 7.6 9.7 13.2 20.7 27.9 34.2 41.4

fSW switching frequency (Default) [kHz] 8

fSW switching frequency (Higher) [kHz] 12
Derating factor:
KT for ambient temperature 0.8 @ 50°C (122°F)
KF for switching temperature 0.7 for higher fSW

ULN AC Input voltage [V] 400 V -15% ... 480 V +10%, 3Ph
AC Input frequency [Hz] 50/60 Hz ±5%
IN AC Input current for continuous service:
- Connection with 3-phase reactor
I
@ 3x400Vac; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 1.3 1.6 2.1 4 5.6 7.1 9.6 10.8 16 23 33 38 43
N
P @ 3x480Vac; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 1.1 1.3 2 3.6 5 6.5 8.8 9.1 14.3 21 31 36 40
U - Connection without 3-phase reactor
T
@ 3x400Vac; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 2.1 2.6 3.4 5.9 8.1 10.2 13.0 17 19 28 40 47 53
@ 3x480Vac; IEC 146 class 2 [A] 1.7 2 3.1 5.3 7.2 9.1 12 14.5 17 26 38 44 49

Max short circuit power without line reactor

[kVA] 85 115 160 270 380 500 650 850 1115 1600 2200 2700 3200
(Zmin=1%)
Overvoltage threshold [V] 800 VDC
380 VDC (for 380. 400VAC),
Undervoltage threshold [V] 400 VDC (for 420, 440 VAC),
415 VDC (for 460, 480 VAC)
Braking IGBT Unit (standard drive) Standard internal (with external resistor); Braking torque 150%
Braking unit intervention threshold
[Vdc] ON = 780 Vdc, OFF= 770 Vdc
(@ 400 V - 480 V)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 15

 3.3.3 AC Input Current

Note ! The Input current of the Drive depends on the operating state of the connected motor. The tables 3.3.2.1 shows the values
corresponding to rated continuous service, keeping into account typical output power factor for each size.

3.3.4 AC Output

The output of the ADV80 drive is ground fault and phase to phase output short protected.

Note ! The connection of an external voltage to the output terminals of the Drive is not permissible! It is allowed to disconnect the
motor from the Drive output, after the Drive has been disabled.

The rated value of direct current output ( ICONT ) depends on the supply voltage (KV), the ambient tempera-
ture (KT) and the switching frequency (KF) if higher than the default setting:
ICONT = I2N x KV x KT (Values of derating factor are the listed on tables 3.3.2.1) with an overload capacity
IMAX = 1.5 x ICONT for 60 seconds.

Recommended motor outputs

The coordination of the motor rated powers with the Drive type presented in the table 3.3.2.1 refers to the
use of standard motors with a rated voltage equal to the rated voltage of the input supply.
As for those motors with different voltages, the type of Drive to use is determined by the rated current of
the motor.

Note ! Max allowed overload: ≡ 150% . I2N cl.2.

Table 3.3.2.1 shows nominal current values for typical service profiles (Ambient temperature =40°C [104°F], standard
switching frequency).
Similar criteria apply for operation with additional derating factors.

16 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 3.3.5 Open-Loop and Closed-Loop Control Section

No 2 2 Programmable Analog Inputs:

- Analog input 1: ±10 V or 0…4...20mA type 0.5 mA max, 10 bit + sign / unipolar or bipolar
(0...10V=default)
- Analog input 2: ±10 V or 0…4...20mA type 0.5 mA max, 10 bit + sign / unipolar or bipolar
(±10V=default)

No 2 Programmable Analog Outputs:

- Analog output 1 = 0...10V type , 8 bit, Frequency output absolute value (default)
- Analog output 2 = 0…4...20mA type , 8 bit, Output current (default)

No 4 Programmable Digital Inputs:

- Digital input 1 = Run (default)
- Digital input 2 = Reverse (default)
- Digital input 3 = External fault NO (default)
- Digital input 4 = Jog (default)
- Digital input 5 = Alarm reset (default)

Note ! Digital input 1, 2, 3: 5mA@+24Vdc

Digital input 4, 5: 9mA@+24Vdc

No 2 Programmable Digital Outputs:

- Digital output 1 = Drive ready (default)
- Digital output 2 = Steady state(default)

Note ! Dig. out. 1 > open collector type: 50V / 40mA

Dig. out. 2 > relay type: 250Vac-6A / 30Vdc-6A

No 1 RS 485 standard port with implemented the followig protocol types:

- Propetary protocol
- Modbus RTU protocol (default)
- Jbus protocol

Internal voltage supply:

Load capacity + 24 V 75 mA Terminal 22
024V Terminal 20
+ 10 V 10 mA Terminal 5
- 10 V 10 mA Terminal 7

Tollerance: + 10 V ±3 %
+ 24 V ± 3 %

3.3.6 Accuracy

Reference value : Resolution Reference preset via terminals 0.1 Hz

Resolution Reference preset via interface 0.1 Hz

Speed: Open-loop speed control: Load-dependent on speed fluctuations are minimized by slip com-
pensation. The accuracy depends on the motor connected.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 17

Notes:

18 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 4 - Installation Guidelines

4.1 Mechanical Specification

Figure 4.1.1: Size 1 Dimensions

70 (2.76)
7.5 (0.30)
mm (inches)
4.4 (0.17)
M4

192 (7.56)
204 (8.03)
192 (7.56)
5 (0.2)

4.5 (0.18)
4.4 (0.17)
10 (0.39) 50 (1.97) 151 (5.94)

Size 1 weight: 1.31 kg (2.89 lbs)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 19

 Figure 4.1.2: Size 2 Dimensions

M4 104 (4.09) 54.5 (2.15) 122 (4.80)

221 (8.70)
212 (8.35)

190 (7.48)
15.5 (0.61)
4.6 (0.18)

130 (5.12)
176.5 (6.95)

Size 2 weight: 3.05 kg (6.72 lbs)

Figure 4.1.3: Mounting Size 2

Wall mounting Mounting with external heatsink

mm (inches)
123 (7.84)

M4
M4
202 (7.95)
212 (8.35)
190 (7.48)

5 (0.2)

104 (4.09) 104 (4.09)

20 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Figure 4.1.4: Size 3 Dimensions

227.8 mm (8.97”) 151.2 mm 30.4 mm

13 mm
387 mm (15.23”)
181.6 mm (7.15”)

Size 3 weight: 10,5 kg (23,15 lbs)

Figure 4.1.5: Size 3 Wall mounting

168 mm (6.61“)
374.5 mm (14.74”)

164 mm (6.45”)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 21

 4.2 Watts Loss, Heat Dissipation, Internal Fans and Minimum Cabinet
Opening Suggested for the Cooling

The heat dissipation of the Drives depends on the operating state of the connected motor. The table below
shows values that refer to operation at default switching frequency (see section 3.3.4, “AC Output”), amb.
temp. ≤ 40°C (104°F), typ. motor power factor and nominal continuous current.

Table 4.2.1: Heat Dissipation and Required Air Flow

Inverter model 1004 1004 1007 2015 2022 2030 2040 2055 2075 3110 3150 3185 3220

PV Heat dissipation:
@ULN=400Vac 1) [W] 24 24 38 101 124 147 183 205 256 250 300 380 460
@ULN=480Vac 1) [W] 23 30 37 95 122 146 180 213 266 250 300 380 460
1)
fSW=default; I2=I2N
Airflow of fan:
Internal fan [m3/h] -- -- -- 11 11 11 11 11 11 - 32 32 32
Heatsink fans [m3/h] -- -- -- -- 20 2X20 2X20 2X20 2X20 2 x 32 2 x 80 2 x 80 2 x 80

Minimum cooling opening:

cm2 31 31
control section
(sq.inch) (4.8) (4.8) 144 328 328 328
cm2 36 72 (22.3) (50.8) (50.8) (50.8)
heatsink
(sq.inch) (5.6) (11.1)

22 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 4.3 Installation Mounting Clearance

Note ! The dimensions and weights specifed in this manual should be taken into consideration when the device is mounted. The
technical equipment required (carriage or crane for large weights) should be used. Improper handling and the use of unsuit-
able tools may cause damage.

Figure 4.3.1: Max. Angle of Inclination

Max 30°

The maximum angle of inclination is 30°.

The Drives must be mounted in such a way that the free flow of air is ensured. The clearance to the device
must be at least 150 mm (6 inches). A space of at least 50 mm (2 inches, sizes 1-2) / 25 mm (0.98 inch,
size 3) must be ensured at the front. Devices that generate a large amount of heat must not be mounted in
the direct vicinity of the frequency inverter.
Fastening screws should be re-tightened after a few days of operation.

Figure 4.3.2: Mounting Clearance

Size 1-2 Size 3

A 50 (1.97) 150 (6)

B 50 (1.97) 25 (.98)

C 10 (0.39) 25 (.98)

D 20 (0.79) 25 (.98)

E 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)

C D E mm(inches)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 23

 4.4 AC Induction Motors

The ADV80 Drives are designed for open-loop and closed-loop operation of standard three-phase induction
AC motors.

FOR BEST RESULTS:

Select a inverter duty single cage induction motor with a minimum slip of 3-5%.

a) Minumum motor size: motor amps no less than 30% of drive rated amps at 400 VAC con-
tinuous rating
b) General purpose motors can be used but require additional AC output chokes
c) Inverter duty motors are desirable and do not require output chokes.

The electrical and mechanical data of standard three-phase motors refers to a particular operating range.
The following points should be noted when these motors are connected to an AC Drive:

Is it possible to use standard induction motors?

With the ADV80 Drives it is possible to use standard induction motors. Some features of the motor have
a great influence on the obtained performances. Notice also what is stated in section 3.3.4, “AC Output”,
about the voltages and the motor power.

Star or delta connection?

Motors can be connected in both star or delta connections. Experience has shown that star connected motors
have better control properties, so star connections are preferred.

Cooling
The cooling of three-phase motors is normally implemented by means of a fan that is mounted on the motor
shaft. Remember that the output of the fan is reduced when the motor is running at lower speeds, which in
certain circumstances may mean that the cooling is insufficient for the motor. Check with the motor manu-
facturer whether an external fan is required and the motor speed range in the application concerned.

Operation above the rated speed

Due to the mechanical factors involved (bearings, unbalance of rotor) and due to the increased iron losses,
consult the manufacturer of the motor if this is operated above the rated speed.

What motor data is required for connecting the frequency inverter?

Nameplate specifications:
- Motor rated voltage
- Motor rated current
- Motor rated frequency
- Motor rated speed
- Power factor
- Pole pairs
- Connection type (star or delta)

Motor protection
Temperature-dependent contacts in the motor winding
Temperature-dependent contacts “Klixon” type can disconnect the drive via the external control or can be
reported as an external fault on the frequency inverter (terminal 6).

24 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Note ! The motor PTC interface circuit (or klixon) has to be considered and treated as a signal circuit. The connections cables to the
motor PTC must be made of twisted pairs with a shield, the cable route should not be parallel to the motor cable or far away
at least 20 cm (8 inches).

Current limitation of the frequency inverter

The current limitation can protect the motor from impermissible overloads. For this the current limitation and
the motor overload control function of the Drive must be set so that the current is kept within the permissible
range for the motor concerned.

Note ! Remember that the current limitation can control an overheating of the motor only due to overload, not due to insufficient
ventilation. When the drive is operated at low speeds the additional use of PTC resistors or temperature-dependent contacts
in the motor windings is recommended, unless separate forced ventilation is available!

Output chokes
When using general purpose standard motors, output chokes are recommended to protect winding isola-
tion in some cases. See section 5.7.2, “ Output chokes”.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 25

Chapter 5 - Wiring Procedure

5.1 Accessing to the Connectors

Note ! Observe the safety instructions and warnings given in this manual.

Figure 5.1.1: Access to the Regulation Control Terminals

To have access to the section of the regutation terminals, it is necessary to open the front door.

26 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.2 Power Section

3 - Input phases

PE1 U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3

PE1 U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

Sizes 1-2 Size 3

U2/L2 V2/T2 W2/T3 BR1 C D

PE2

U2/L2 V2/T2 W2/T3 BR1 C D

PE2

U2/L2 V2/T2 W2/T3 BR1 C D

Motor output phases
DC-BUS terminals L1 L2 L3 BR C1 C D U V W
BR1-C : External braking PE1 PE2
resistor terminals 3 - Input phases Not used
Motor output phases
External braking resistor
terminals (BR-C1) DC-BUS terminals (C-D)

Power terminals lay-out

Sizes 1004...2075 The power terminals are external directly accessible throught the
top side (PE1, U1/L1, V1/L2 e W1/L3) and the bottom side (U2/T1,
V2/T2 , W2/T3 e PE2) of the inverter.
Sizes 3110...3220 The power terminals are external directly accessible throught the
bottom side of the inverter.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 27

 5.2.1 Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals

Note ! Use 60°C / 75°C (140°F / 167°F) copper conductor only.

1004

1005

1007

2015

2022

2030

2040

2055

2075

3110

3150

3185

3220
Inverter model

U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, AWG 16 14 8 6

C, C1, D terminals [mm2] 2 4 6 16
Tightening torque [Nm] from 0.5 to 0.6 from 1.2 to 1.5 from 1.5 to 1.7

AWG 16 12 8 6
BR1, BR terminals
[mm2] 2 4 6 16
Tightening torque [Nm] from 0.5 to 0.6 from 1.2 to 1.5 from 1.5 to 1.7

AWG 16 12 8 6
PE1 terminal
[mm2] 2 4 6 16
Tightening torque [Nm] from 0.5 to 0.6 6 6

AWG 16 14 8 6
PE2 terminal
[mm2] 2 4 6 16
Tightening torque [Nm] from 0.5 to 0.6 6 6

The grounding conductor of the motor cable may conduct up to twice the value of the rated current if there is a ground fault
at the output of the ADV80 Drive.
Caution

28 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.2.2 Rectification and Intermediate (D.C.) Circuit

The mains voltage is rectified and buffered by capacitors. A diode bridge with a pre-charging resistor is
mounted for all sizes.
In the event of an overvoltage in the intermediate circuit (message “OV” appears in the display) or under-
voltage (message “UU”), the Inverter blocks and no power can be taken from the intermediate circuit.
In normal operation the intermediate (DC) circuit voltage UDC is equal to ULN * 2. With oversynchronous
operation of the connected motor (deceleration or braking phase), energy is fed back into the intermediate
circuit via the Inverter, resulting in an increase in the intermediate (DC) circuit voltage UDC. Once a certain
voltage is reached the Inverter is blocked due to intervention of Overvoltage alarm. To RESET see chapter
7.6, section Autoreset Configuration.

ULN

ULN ULN

UDC

Figure 5.2.2.1: Rectification and Intermediate Circuit

The automatic restart of the Inverter can be obtained after a fault indication condition has occurred (for further
information of these functions see chapter 7.6, section Autoreset Configuration). Switching off can be prevented
by extending the deceleration ramp or by the use of a suitable braking unit (see 5.8).

5.2.3 Inverter

IGBTs (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors) for all sizes are used. The Inverter is protected against faults of
overvoltage, overcurrent, short circuit between phases and ground. In the event of a fault the Inverter is
disabled. To RESET see chapter 7.6, section Autoreset Configuration.
The automatic restart of the Inverter can be obtained after a fault indication condition has occurred (for
further information on these functions see chapter 7.6, section Autoreset Configuration).

Table 5.2.3.1: Fault Indication of the Protection of the Inverter Bridge

Signalation Block caused by

OV Overvoltage
OC, OCH Overcurrent, short-circuit between phases
OC Short-circuit to ground

The variable output voltage is generated by pulse-width modulation of the intermediate (D.C.) circuit volt-
age. A special process of sinusoidal evaluation in conjunction with the inductance of the motor produces
a very good sinusoidal waveform of the output current I2. Parameters can be allocated to the voltage/fre-
quency characteristics to adapt it to the motor to be supplied.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 29

 A number of motors can be driven in parallel at the output of the Inverter. These motors can have different
speeds, even if they have the same number of poles, since the slips of each motor change in relation of the
load variation and of its characteristics. Motors can be connected or disconnected individually at the output.
Particular care should be taken when connecting or disconnecting motor units.
The following should be noted: at the instant of disconnection, motors generate voltage peaks, since an
inductive current is being broken. This is not generally a problem for the output of the Inverter if the motors
are low-power devices, or if a number of other motors remain connected to the Inverter.

If the last remaining motor connected to the Inverter is being connected, it should be ensured that the magnetizing current
of the motor has already decayed at the instant of disconnection. For this purpose the Inverter should be blocked and the
Caution motor disconnected only after a certain time has elapsed. This time is determined by the motor and will have a magnitude of
approximately 0.5 to several seconds.

If a motor is to be connected to an existing Inverter network during operation, it should be borne in mind
that the motor will draw a multiple of its rated current. The Inverter should be rated in such a way that the
starting current lies within the range of the Inverter rated current. Furthermore it is possible to take into con-
sideration the overload that the Inverter can give, if the connection duty cycle is within the times at which
the overload is allowed.

The outputs of more than one Inverter must not be connected directly in parallel.
Caution

30 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.3 Regulation Section

S6
2 OFF ON
1 OFF ON

Strip1
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
Options internal
bus connection Strip2
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

S6-1 = ON Þ Analog Input 1 as Current Type S6-2 = ON Þ Analog Input 2 as Current Type
S6-1 = OFF Þ Analog Input 1 as Voltage Type S6-2 = OFF Þ Analog Input 2 as Voltage Type
Terminal
Type

Name Function Default parameter Signal level MAX

I.200 = [1] ±10V / 0.5mA o

1 Analog input 1 Programmable VOLTAGE/CURRENT analog input (S6-1)
0...10V/0...20mA 20mA 500Ohm
3 Analog input 2 Programmable VOLTAGE/CURRENT analog input (S6-2) I.210 = [0] ± 10V
5 + 10V OUT + 10 Vdc potential voltage reference - +10Vdc / 10mA
7 - 10V OUT - 10 Vdc potential voltage reference - -10Vdc / 10mA
Programm. OPEN COLLECTOR digital output (positive I.100 = [6] Steady
9 Digital output 1+ +50V / 40mA
Strip 1

terminal) state
Programm. OPEN COLLECTOR digital output (negative
11 Digital output 1- -
terminal)
13 RS485 Link+ Link+ (RxA / TxA) signal of RS 485 serial line - -
15 RS485 Link- Link- (RxB / TxB) signal of RS 485 serial line
17 RS 485 Eq. ref Equipotential reference of RS 485 serial line
19 I.101 = [0] Drive 250Vac / 6A
Digital output 2 Programmable RELAY digital output
21 ready 30Vdc / 6A

2 COM An inp/out Potential reference of analog inputs/outputs -

I.300 = [0] Freq
4 Analog output 1 VOLTAGE programmable analog output (0...10V) 0...10V / 5mA
out abs
CURRENT programmable analog output (0...20 / I.310 = [2] Output 0...20mA,
6 Analog output 2
4...20mA) curr 50...550Ohm
12...30Vdc max
8 Digital input 1 Programmable digital inputs I.000 = [1] Run
5mA@+24Vdc
10 Digital input 2 I.001 = [2] Reverse
I.002 = [3] Ext
Strip 2

12 Digital input 3
Fault NO
+24Vdc ±10%
9mA @ +24Vdc
14 Digital input 4 Programmable digital input or A (K1) encoder channel I.003 = [6] Jog
Encoder (HTL)
24Vdc±10% 25kHz
I.004 = [5] Alarm
16 Digital input 5 Programmable digital input or B (K2) encoder channel
reset
18 COM Dig inputs 0 potential reference of digital inputs -
20 0 V 24 0 V 24 potential reference -
22 + 24V OUT + 24 Vdc potential voltage reference +24Vdc / 75mA

Note ! If Digital input 4 and Digital input 5 are used as encoder input, I.003 and I.004 must be set to [0] None.
Than encoder feedback parametrizzation must be execute.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 31

 Maximum Cable Sizes for control terminals

Table 5.3.2.1: Maximum Permissible Cable Cross-section on the Plug-in Terminals of the Regulator Section

Maximum Permissible Cable Cross-Section

Tightening torque
Terminals mm2 (inch)
AWG Nm (lbt. inch)
Flexible Multi-core
1 ... 22 0.5 … 1.5 (0.02…0.06) 0.5 ...1.5 (0.02…0.06) 28 …16 0.4 (35.4)

The use of a 75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm (3 x 0.1 x 0.02 inch) flat screwdriver is recommended. Remove 6.5 mm (0.26
inch) of the insulation at the cable ends. Only one unprepared wire (without ferrule) should be connected
to each terminal point.

Maximum Cable Length

Table 5.3.2.2: Maximum Control Cable Lengths

Cable section [mm2] 0.22 0.5 0.75 1 1.5

Max length m [feet] 27 [88] 62 [203] 93 [305] 125 [410] 150 [492]

5.3.1 CANopen/DeviceNet Terminals (optional)

Those terminals are exclusively available in the drive version with CANopen/Devicnet integrated (ADV80...-C).

V+ H SH L V-

Terminal Name Function Signal level MAX

V+ Supply Positive supply voltage 11 … 30V

H CAN_H CAN_H signal -
SH Shield Shield wire cable -
L CAN_L CAN_L signal -
V- Supply 0 reference of supply voltage 0V

32 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.4 Typical Connection Diagrams

Figure 5.4.1-A: Connection through Terminals Strip, Typical Connection Diagram (sizes 1-2)

Braking
Resistor

BR1 C D

U1/L1 U2/T1
V1/L2 V2/T2 M
W1/L3 W2/T3
PE1 PE2
Run
8 Dig Input 1
Reverse
10 Dig Input 2
Ext Fault NO
12 Dig Input 3
Jog
Multi-Function 14 Dig Input 4
Fault Reset 9
inputs 16 Dig Input 5
Dig Output 1
18 COM 50 Vdc / 40mA
20 024V 11
22 +24V
19 Dig Output 2
Shield Ground 250 Vac / 1A
21 30 Vdc / 1A
7 -10V(10mA)

5 +10V(10mA)
Frequency 2 K 1 An Input 1
Reference 2 Voltage /
2 S6 1
Current
3 An Input 2
4 An Output 1 (Voltage)
13 Link+
Modbus FM 0...10 Vdc, 5 mA
2
Communications 15 Link-
RS-485 FM 0...20 mA
17 Equ. Ref. 6
An Output 2 (Current)

Note ! The connections indicated for command inputs represent the most common solution for an PNP type command. Other exam-
ples are given on figures 5.4.2/3.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 33

 Figure 5.4.1.: Connection through Terminals Strip, Typical Connection Diagram (size 3)

Braking
Resistor

BR C1 C D

L1 U
L2 V M
L3 W
PE1 PE2
Run
8 Dig Input 1
Reverse
10 Dig Input 2
Ext Fault NO
12 Dig Input 3
Jog
Multi-Function 14 Dig Input 4
Fault Reset 9
inputs 16 Dig Input 5
Dig Output 1
18 COM 50 Vdc / 40mA
20 024V 11
22 +24V
19 Dig Output 2
Shield Ground 250 Vac / 1A
21 30 Vdc / 1A
7 -10V(10mA)

5 +10V(10mA)
Frequency 2 K 1 An Input 1
Reference 2 Voltage /
2 S6 1
Current
3 An Input 2
4 An Output 1 (Voltage)
13 Link+
Modbus FM 0...10 Vdc, 5 mA
2
Communications 15 Link-
RS-485 FM 0...20 mA
17 Equ. Ref. 6
An Output 2 (Current)

Note ! The connections indicated for command inputs represent the most common solution for an PNP type command. Other exam-
ples are given on figures 5.4.2/3.

34 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Figure 5.4.2: PNP Digital Input/Output with internal or external supply

Run Run
8 Dig Input 1 8 Dig Input 1
Reverse Reverse
10 Dig Input 2 10 Dig Input 2
Ext Fault NO Ext Fault NO
12 Dig Input 3 12 Dig Input 3
Jog Jog
14 Dig Input 4 14 Dig Input 4
Fault Reset Fault Reset
16 Dig Input 5 16 Dig Input 5
22 +24V + 22 +24V
18 COM
V
- 18 COM
20 024V
20 024V

LOAD Dig Output 1 LOAD Dig Output 1

9 9

11 11

Figure 5.4.3: NPN Digital Input/Output with internal or external supply

Run Run
8 Dig Input 1 8 Dig Input 1
Reverse Reverse
10 Dig Input 2 10 Dig Input 2
Ext Fault NO Ext Fault NO
12 Dig Input 3 12 Dig Input 3
Jog Jog
14 Dig Input 4 14 Dig Input 4
Fault Reset Fault Reset
16 Dig Input 5 16 Dig Input 5
20 024V 20 024V
-
22 +24V V 22 +24V
18 COM + 18 COM

LOAD LOAD
Dig Output 1 Dig Output 1
9 9

11 11

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 35

 5.4.1 Engineering Notes

Cables for analog reference and correction values should be screened.

The screen should be on one side of the Inverter on terminal PE1. The same applies to the frequency
signals for setting the reference value or feed back and for the connected speed and current displays (ter-
minals 26, 33, 31).

Grounding the reference point

The reference point of shield cable for the control terminals must be normally grounded (to the terminal
in case of one inverter).
Where several inverters are used in a single installation, their reference points of shield cable for the control
terminals should be linked and grounded to the ground reference of the cabinet (with due attention to the
minimum cable cross- section stated above).

Direct connection to PLC input/output sections

The following points should be noted when the control commands or reference values are taken directly
from the input/output level of a programmable controller.
Grounding of the 0 V rail of a PLC is generally required. In this instance the reference points for the control
commands on the Inverter must not be grounded. To provide a high level of noise immunity, it is recom-
mended that a 0,1mF 250V DC capacitor be connected between terminals 10,11 and ground. Where an
installation contains several Inverters, this measure should be taken on each Inverter.

Relay on the Inverter

To provide improved noise immunity, RC suppressors should be connected in parallel with the contactor
coils, which are switched onto the Inverter by one of the potential-free contacts.

5.4.2 Serial Interface

The RS 485 serial line on the drives of the ADV80 series allows the data transmission through a loop made
of two symmetrical conductors, which are twisted with a common shield. The maximum transmission speed
is 38400 Baud.
The transmission is performed via a standard RS 485 differential signal (half-duplex).
If two or more drives are connected on the serial line (Multidrop configuration), the OPT-QX option has to
be used on each device.
This option has to be inserted between the inverter terminals and the transmission data cable.
With the Multidrop configuration it is possible to connect a maximum of 20 units of ADV80 inverters (for
further details see the OPT-QX manual).
The shield of serial line cable must be connected to the ground.

RS485 serial terminals

The RS 485 serial line is supplied through 13, 15 and 17 terminals, placed on the regulation card of the inverter.
The differential signal is transmitted on the Pin 13 (TxA/RxA) and on the Pin 15 (TxB/RxB). Terminal 17 is used as
equipotential reference of the serial line.

Note ! As for the connection of the serial line, make sure that the power cables and the cables controlling the contactors and the auxiliary
relays are located into different panduits.

Serial protocol
The serial protocol is set via the “I.600 - Serial link cfg” parameter, which allows the selection of the fol-
lowing types:
proprietary protocol FoxLink, RTU Modbus (default) and Jbus.
The serial address is set via the “I.602 - Device address” parameter. Further details about the parameter
transmission, the parameter type and the value range can be found in the tables of Chapter 7.1 (INTER-
FACE Menu / Serial Configuration). For the RTU Modbus Protocol see chapter 8.1 of this manual.

36 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Figure 5.4.2.1: Serial Connections

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
PCI-QX Interface

Marrone/Brown
Giallo / Yellow

Bianco/White
Verde/Green

XS1 - Drive Side

XS2 - PC Side
Cavo standard / Standard cable
cod. S7QAF9

PCI-QX Wire colour Signal Terminals

Pin 3 Yellow Link + 13
Pin 7 Green Link - 15
Pin 1 Brown + 24V Supply 22
Pin 8 White 0V Supply 20

5.4.3 Encoder Input

Figure 5.4.3.1: Connection of Encoders

U2/T1
V2/T2 M
W2/T3

PE2
Channel A +24V
Digital Input 4 14 E External
024V power supply
Channel B
Digital Input 5 16

COM 18

Table 5.4.3.1: Recommended Cable Section and Length for the Connection of Encoders

Cable section [mm2] 0.22 0.5 0.75 1 1.5

Max length m [feet] 27 [88] 62 [203] 93 [305] 125 [410] 150 [492]

Requirements:
Digital encoder:
- max frequency: 25 kHz (select the appropriate number of pulses depending on required max. speed)
- Channels:
- one-channel: A (one-channel complementary A-, NOT allowed)
- two-channel: A and B (two-channel complementary A- and B-, NOT allowed).
Encoder loss detection is not possible.
- Power supply: + 24V externally supplied.
- The digital inputs common (terminal 18) have to be rightly connected to the external supply:
- to 0 V of supplier, if the encoder is PNP type
- to + 24 V of supplier, if the encoder is NPN type.

Note ! If Digital input 4 and Digital input 5 are used as encoder input, I.003 and I.004 must be set to [0] None.
Than encoder feedback parametrizzation must be execute.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 37

 5.5 Parallel Connection on the AC (Input) and DC (Intermediate Cir-
cuit) Side of Several Inverters

Features and Limits:

- The inverters used have to be all the same size.

- AC input line chokes (see chapter 5.7.1) have to be the same (provided by the same supplier).
- The mains power supply has to be simultaneous for all inverters, i.e. a single switch /line contactor has
to be used.
- Such connection is suitable for a maximum of 6 inverters.
- If necessary dissipate braking energy; a single internal braking unit (with external resistor) has to be
used or one (or several) external braking unit (see manual: “BU32-...” , “BUy-...”).
- Fast fuses (F12...F62) have to be fitted on the dc-link side ( C and D terminals) of each inverters (see
chapter 5.6.2).

Figure 5.5.1: Parallel Connection on the AC and DC Side of Several Inverters

F11 L1
U2
U
V2 M1
V INVERTER 1 W2 3
C
W
D
F12

F21 L2
U2
U
V2 M2
V INVERTER 2 W2 3
C
W
D
BR
F22
L1

L2
(*)
L3 RBR

K1
F.. L..
U2
U
V2 M..
V INVERTER .. W2 3
C
W
D
F..

F61 L6
U2
U
V2 M6
V INVERTER 6 W2 3
C
W
D
F62

F7
7 8 9 10
BR D
RBR BU-32-...
CR (BUy-...) C

(*) Do not connect if external braking units (BU32-.., BUy..) are used.
Caution

38 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.6 Circuit Protection

5.6.1 External Fuses of Input Voltage

The inverter must be fused on the AC Input side. Slow-blow fuses may be used. Fast-acting fuses provide
greater protection.

Note ! If the terminals of the intermediate circuit (C and D) are connected to external devices, fast-acting fuses must mainly be used.
Examples of situations when this is the case:
- Connection to external braking units (BU...)
- Connection of several inverters to the intermediate circuit
- Connection of external capacitors.

Connections with three-phase inductance on AC input will improve the DC link capacitors life time.

Table 5.6.1.1: External Fuse Types for AC Input Side

DC link capaci- F1 - Fuses type (Code)

Inverter
tors life time Europe USA
model
[h] Connections without three-phase reactor on AC input
1004 35000
1005 50000
GRD2/10 (F4D13) or Z14GR10 (F4M03) A70P10 FWP10 (S7G49)
1007 30000
2015 20000
2022 20000
GRD2/16 (F4D14) or Z14GR16 (F4M05) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2030 30000
2040 25000 GRD2/20 (F4D15) or Z14GR20 (F4M07) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2055 22000 GRD2/25 (F4D16) or Z14GR25 (F4M09) A70P25 FWP25 (S7G51)
2075 15000 GRD2/25 (F4D16) or Z14GR25 (F4M09) A70P30 - (S7I50)
3110 15000 GRD3/35 (F4D20) A70P35 - (S7G51)
3150 15000 Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60-4 - (S7I34)
3185 15000 Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60-4 - (S7I34)
3220 15000 Z22GR80 (F4M19) A70P80 - (S7G54)
Connections with three-phase reactor on AC input
1004 80000
1005 80000
1007 65000 GRD2/10 (F4D13) or Z14GR10 (F4M03) A70P10 FWP10 (S7G49)
2015 65000
2022 65000
2030 80000
GRD2/16 (F4D14) or Z14GR16 (F4M05) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2040 70000
2055 80000 GRD2/20 (F4D15) or Z14GR20 (F4M07) A70P20 FWP20 (S7G48)
2075 45000 GRD2/20 (F4D15) or Z14GR20 (F4M07) A70P25 FWP25 (S7G51)
3110 45000 GRD3/35 (F4D20) A70P35 - (S7G51)
3150 45000 Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60-4 - (S7I34)
3185 45000 Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60-4 - (S7I34)
3220 45000 Z22GR80 (F4M19) A70P80 - (S7G54)

Fuse manufacturers: Type GRD... , Z..., Jean Müller, Eltville

A70... Ferraz
FWP... Bussmann

Note ! The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation, auxiliary contactors, are reported in the corre-
sponding data sheets.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 39

 5.6.2 External Fuses of DC Input Side

In case of it is preferred a connection through common DB Bus, using an external AD/DC power supply
device, the fuses listed in the table below must be used as protection of inverter C and D terminals.

Table 5.6.2.1: External Fuses Type for DC Input Side

Inverter Europe USA

model Fuses type (Code) Fuses type (Code)
1004
1005 Z14GR6 (F4M01) A70P10 or FWP10A14F (S7G49)
1007
2015
Z14GR10 (F4M03) A70P10 or FWP10A14F (S7G49)
2022
2030
Z14GR16 (F4M05) A70P20-1or FWP20A14F (S7G48)
2040
2055 Z14GR20 (F4M07) A70P20-1or FWP20A14F (S7G48)
2075 GR2/25 (F4D16) A70P30-1or FWP20A14F (S7I50)
3110 GRD3/50 (F4D21) A70P50 (S7G53)
3150 Z22GR63 (F4M17) A70P60-4 (S7I34)
3185 Z22GR80 (F4M19) A70P80 (S7G54)
3220 Z22GR80 (F4M19) A70P80 (S7G54)

Fuse manufacturers: Type GRD... , Z... Jean Müller, Eltville

A70... Gould Shawmut
FWP... Bussmann

Note ! The technical data of the fuses, e.g. dimensions, weights, heat dissipation, auxiliary contactors, are reported in the corresponding data
sheets.

40 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.7 Chokes / Filters (Optional)

Note ! A three-phase inductance should be connected on the AC Input side in order to limit the input RMS current of ADV80 series Drives. The
inductance can be provided by an AC Input choke or an AC Input transformer.

Note ! For the use of output sinusoidal filters, please contact the nearest Gefran office.

Figure 5.7.1: Input/output choke dimensions

5.7.1 Input Chokes

Table 5.7.1.1: 3-Phase AC Input Chokes
3-phase Input choke
Inverter Mains Rated Saturat. Dimensions: mm (inch)
Freq. Model Weigth
model Induct. current current Code
[Hz] Number kg (lbs) a b c D1 E1
[mH] [A] [A]
1004
1005 6.1 2.5 5 50/60 LR3y-1007 S7AAD 1.8
1007 (3.9)
65 45
2015 3.69 3.7 7.4 50/60 LR3y-1015 S7AAE
120 125 (2.56) 100 (1.77)
2022 2.71 5.5 11 50/60 LR3y-1022 S7AAF 1.9 (4.72) (4.92) (3.94)
2030 2.3 7.1 16 50/60 LR3y-1030 S7AB3 (4.2)
2040 1.63 9.6 22 50/60 LR3y-2040 S7AAG 2 (4.4)
65 55
2055 1.29 11.8 24.5 50/60 LR3y-2055 S7AB5 2 (4.4)
(2.6) (2.2)
150 155 79 90 54
2075 0.89 17.4 36.5 50/60 LR3y-2075 S7AB6 2 (4.4)
(5.9) (6.1) (3.1) (3.5) (2.1)
150 155 79 90 54
3110 0.68 22 46.5 50/60 LR3y-3110 S7AB7 5 (11)
(5.9) (6.1) (3.1) (3.5) (2.1)
5.5 150 169 85 90 56
3150 0.51 30 61 50/60 LR3y-3150 S7AB8
(12.1) (5.9) (6.7) (3.3) (3.5) (2.2)
7.8 180 182 130 150 74
3185 0.35 38 83 50/60 LR3-022 S7FF4
(17.2) (7.1) (7.2) (5.1) (5.9) (2.9)
7.8 180 182 130 150 74
3220 0.35 45 83 50/60 LR3-022 S7FF4
(17.2) (7.1) (7.2) (5.1) (5.9) (2.9)

Note ! The current rating of these chokes (reactors) is based on nominal current of standard motors, listed in table 3.3.2.1.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 41

 5.7.2. Output Chokes

The ADV80 drives can be used with general purpose standard motors or with motors specially designed for
drive use. The latter usually have a higher isolation rating to better withstand PWM voltage.
Motors designed for use with Adjustable Frequency Drives do not require any specific filtering of the volt-
age waveform from the Drive. For general purpose motors and using drives up to 2040 size, especially with
long cable runs (typically over 100 m [328 feet]) an output choke is recommended to mantain the voltage
waveform within the specified limits. Suggested choke ratings and part numbers are listed in table 5.7.2.1.
The rated current of the filters should be approx. 20% above the rated current of the frequency Drive in
order to take into account additional losses due to PWM waveform.

Table 5.7.2.1: Recommended Values for Output Chokes

3-phase Output choke

Mains Rated Saturat. Dimensions: mm (inch)
Inverter model Model Weigth
Induct. current current Code
Number kg (lbs) a b c D1 E1
[mH] [A] [A]
1004
1005 1.4 2.15 3.9 LU3-QX01 S7FL2
1007 2 120 130 65 100 40
2015
2022 (4.4) (4.72) (5.12) (2.56) (3.94) (1.57)
0.87 10.1 18.4 LU3-QX02 S7FL3
2030
2040
5.8 180 170 110 150 64
2055 0.87 16 34 LU3-005 S7FG3
(12.8) (7.1) (6.7) (4.3) (5.9) (2.5)
2075 8 180 170 110 150 64
0.51 27 57 LU3-011 S7FG4
3110 (17.6) (7.1) (6.7) (4.3) (5.9) (2.5)
7.5 180 160 170 150 70
3150 0.43 32 68 LU3-015 S7FH2
(16.5) (7.1) (6.3) (6.7 (5.9) (2.8)
180 160 170 150 70
3185 0.33 42 72 LU3-022 S7FH3 8 (17.6)
(7.1) (6.3) (6.7 (5.9) (2.8)
9.5 180 160 170 150 80
3220 0.23 58 100 LU3-030 S7FH4
(20.9) (7.1) (6.3) (6.7 (5.9) (3.1)

Nota ! When the Drive is operated at the rated current and at 50 Hz, the output chokes cause a voltage drop of approx. 2% of the output voltage.

5.7.3. Interference Suppression Filters

The inverters of ADV80 series must be equipped with an external EMI filter in order to reduce the radiofre-
quency emissions on the mains line. The filter selection is depending on the drive size and the installation
environment. For this purpose see the “EMC Guidelines” instruction book.
In the Guide it is also indicated how to install the cabinet (connection of filter and mains reactors, cable
shield, groundig, etc.) in order to make it EMC compliant according the EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC.
The document describes the present situation concerning the EMC standards and the compliance tests
made on the Gefran drives.

42 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Table 5.7.3.1: EMI filter
Motor cable EN 61800-3 norm
Inverter model Filter model Code
length Conducted emission
1004
1005 EMI-FTF-480-7 S7GHL 10 m Category C2
1007
2015
2022
2030
EMI-FTF-480-16 S7GHO 10 m Category C2
2040
2055
2075
3110 EMI FTF-480-30 S7GHP
3150 EMI FTF-480-42 S7GOA
10 m Category C3
3185 EMI FTF-480-55 S7GOB
3220 EMI FTF-480-55 S7GOB

Figure 5.7.3.1: EMI-FTF-480-.. filter

E1 b
M

D1

Table 5.7.3.2: EMI-FTF-480-... filters dimensions

Dimensions mm [inches] Weigth

Model Code
a b c D1 E1 M kg (lbs)
EMI FTF-480-7 S7GHL 190 [7,48] 40 [1,57] 70 [2,76] 175 [6,89] 20 [0,79] Ø5 0,6 [1,3]
EMI FTF-480-16 S7GHO 250 [9,84] 45 [1,77] 70 [2,76] 235 [9,25] 25 [0,98] Ø6 0,8 [1,8]
EMI FTF-480-30 S7GHP 270 [10,63] 50 [1,97] 85 [3,35] 255 [10,04] 30 [1,18] Ø6 1 [2,2]
EMI FTF-480-42 S7GOA 310 [12,20] 50 [1,97] 85 [3,35] 295 [11,61] 30 [1,18] Ø6 1,3 [2,9]
EMI FTF-480-55 S7GOB 250 [9,84] 85 [3,35] 90 [3,54] 235 [9,25] 60 [2,36] Ø6 1,9 [4,2]

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 43

 5.7.3.1 EMI-FFT Filter Connections for ADV80
AC Mains
AC fuses Contactor AC Drive Cabinet Mounting panel

AC
Power
Supply

PE1 U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3

DIN ......
Optional Kit for
Prg Rev Run Limit Alarm
size 1 only

AC
Mains
choke
Required only
if size 1 is mounted
on DIN guide

U2/L2 V2/T2 W2/T3 BR1 C D

PE2

EMI filter
Output
reactor

Ground Motor cable

Bus terminals

AC Motor

44 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.8 Braking

Two means of braking are possible:

- Throught internal braking unit
- Throught injection of direct current from the Inverter into the motor (D.C. braking).

here are two essential differences between the two braking methods:
- A braking unit can be used for speed reduction (e.g.: from 1000 to 800 rpm), whereas DC braking can
only be used for braking to standstill.
- The energy in the drive is converted into heat in both cases. This conversion takes place in a braking re-
sistor encased in the braking unit. With DC braking, the energy is converted into heat in the motor itself,
resulting in a further rise in motor temperature.

5.8.1. Braking Unit

In oversynchronous or regenerative operation, the frequency-controlled three-phase motor feeds energy

back to the DC link circuit via the Drive. This leads to an increase in the intermediate circuit voltage. Brak-
ing units (BU) are therefore used in order to prevent the DC voltage rising to an impermissible value. When
used, these activate a braking resistor that is connected in parallel to the capacitors of the intermediate
circuit. The feedback energy is converted to heat via the braking resistor (RBR), thus providing very short
deceleration times and restricted four-quadrant operation.

E
_ R BR
U ZK
M
3
BU

Figure 5.8.1: Operation with Braking Unit (Principle)

All the drive sizes have as standard an internal braking unit.

The braking resistor is optional and has always to be mounted externally.

Note ! When the circuit terminals C and D are connected to external devices, the AC Input must be protected with superfast semiconductor fuses!
Observe the mounting instruction concerned.

The braking resistors can be subject to unforeseen overloads due to possible failures.
The resistors have to be protected using thermal protection devices. Such devices do not have to interrupt the circuit where
Warning
the resistor is inserted but their auxiliary contact must interrupt the power supply of the drive power section. In case the
resistor foresees the precence of a protection contact, such contact has to be used together with the one belonging to the
thermal protection device.

The braking threshold VBR , of the internal braking unit, is 760 VDC for all the values of the supply voltage of
the drive .

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 45

 5.8.1.1 External Braking Resistor (Optional)

Recommended resistors for use with internal braking unit:

Table 5.8.1.1: Lists and Technical Data of the External Standard Resistors

Max. overload, 1” Max. overload, 30"

Size Resistor type Code Q.ty Pnbr Rbr Housing
- service 10% - service 25%
Ebr (kJ) Ebr (kJ) (W) (Ω)
1004 RF 100 T 360R S8S81 1 0.7 5 150 360 IP44
1005 RF 100 T 360R S8S81 1 0.7 5 150 360 IP44
1007 RF 100 T 360R S8S81 1 0.7 5 150 360 IP44
2015 RF 150 T 100R S8S82 1 1 9 300 100 IP44
2022 RF 150 T 100R S8S82 1 1 9 300 100 IP44
2030 RF 150 T 100R S8S82 1 1 9 300 100 IP44
2040 RF 200 T 75R S8S83 1 1.5 11 200 75 IP44
2055 RF 200 T 68R S8T00T 1 1.5 11 200 68 IP44
2075 RF 400 68R S85A16 1 3.5 25 400 68 IP44
3110 RFPD 1100 DT 40R S8SY6 1 11 58 1100 40 IP44
3150 RFPD 1900 D 28R S8SZS 1 19 75 1900 28 IP44
3185 BRT4K0-15R4 S8T00G 1 40 150 4000 15,4 IP20
3220 BRT4K0-15R4 S8T00G 1 40 150 4000 15,4 IP20

Parameters description:
PNBR Nominal power of the braking resistor
RBR Braking resistor value
EBR Max surge energy which can be dissipated by the resistor
PPBR Peak power applied to the braking resistor
TBRL Maximum braking time in condition of limit operating cycle (braking power = PPBR with typical
triangular profile).
EBR
TBRL = 2 ____________ = [s]
PPBR

Figure 5.8.3: Limit Operating Braking Cycle with Typical Triangular Power Profile

n,P

PPBR

EBR

TBRL t
TCL

TCL
Minimum cycle time in condition of limit operating cycle (braking power = PPBR with typical
triangular profile)
1 PBR
TCL = __ TBRL __________ = [s]
2 PNBR

46 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Figure 5.8.1.1: External resistor dimensions

a c

RF_T...
a1

2
Cables length 500 mm / Section 4 mm

b
Thermal protection
cable b1

c1
a c RFPD...

BR T2K0: PG 11/PG16
BR T4K0: PG 13
BR T8K0: PG 16

c
PG 7: on version with
Thermostat only

a b

13x6.5

b1

b1

= BRT...
a1

Protection
Dimensions mm (inches) Weight
degree
a b c a1 b1 c1 Cable lenght g (oz.)
RF 100 T 360R 90 (3,54) 27 (1,06) 36 (1,42) 79 (3,11) - - 300 (11,81) 160 (5,64) IP44
RF 150 T 100R 155 (6,10) 27 (1,06) 36 (1,42 144 (5,67) - - 300 (11,81) 305 (10,76) IP44
RF 200 T 75R 200 (7,87) 27 (1,06) 36 (1,42 189 (7,44) - - 300 (11,81) 425 (14,99) IP44
RF 220 T 68R 300 (11,81) 27 (1,06) 36 (1,42 290 (11,42) - - 300 (11,81) 510 (17,99) IP44
RF 400 68R 220 (8,66) 20 (0,78) 100 (3,93) 180 (7,08) - - 500 (19,68) 980 (34,57) IP44
RFPD 1100 DT 40R 320 (12,6) 70 (2,8) 106 (4,17) 17,5 (0,69) 93,5 (3,68) - 2,7 (5,95) IP44
350
RFPD 1900 D 28R 365 (14,4) 75 (2,95) 100 (3,9) 70 (2,8) 30 (1,2) - 4,2 (9,3) IP44
(13,78)
BRT4K0-15R4 625 (24,6) 100 (3,9) 250 (9,8) 605 (23,8) 40 (1,6) - 500 (19,68) 7,0 (15,43) IP20
BRT4K0-15R4 625 (24,6) 100 (3,9) 250 (9,8) 605 (23,8) 40 (1,6) - 500 (19,68) 7,0 (15,43) IP20

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 47

 5.8.2 D.C. Braking

The Inverter offers the facility of D.C. braking as a standard. To this end, the Inverter injects D.C. current
into two motor phases, thereby generating braking torque. The kinetic energy of the machine is dissipated
as heat in the motor.

This option enables the drive to be braked to a standstill. It does not permit deceleration to a lower speed. It may be necessary
to measure the braking current in the “U” phase.
Caution

Figure 5.8.7: D.C. Braking, Schematic

Inverter
+

/2
W
UDC V
U

Energy
M Machine
3~
_ Energy

48 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 5.9 Discharge Time of the DC-Link

Table 5.9.1: DC Link Discharge Times

Inverter model I2N Time (seconds)

1004 1.1 300
1005 1.5 300
1007 2 300
2015 3.7 300
2022 5.2 300
2030 6.8 300
2040 9.2 300
2055 11.8 300
2075 16.1 300
3110 23,0 300
3150 31,0 300
3185 38,0 300
3220 46,0 300

This is the minimum time that must be elapsed since an ADV80 Drive is disconnected from the AC Input
before an operator may service parts inside the Drive to avoid electric shock hazard.

Condition These values consider a turn off for a Drive supplied at 480Vac +10%, without any option (indicated times for inverted disabled condition).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 49

Chapter 6 - Drive Keypad and Startup Operation

In this chapter the parameters management is described, by using the drive keypad.

6.1 Keypad

Changes made to parameter have immediate effect on drive operation, but are not automatically stored in permanent memory.
An explicit command is required to permanently store the parameters:
Caution
“C.000 - Save parameters” and confirming with Enter.

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

Al Op

Prg

Enter

Prg Scroll menu: Allows navigation throught the drive main menu (d.xxx, S.xxx, I.xxx, F.xxx, P.xxx,
A.xxx and C.xxx). Also used to exit the editing mode of a parameter without appling the
changes.
E Enter button: Used to enter the editing mode of the selected parameter or to confirm the value.
UP button: Used to scroll up through parameters or to increase numeric values while in edit-
ing mode; it can also be used to increase motorpotentiometer reference value, when
“F.000-Motorpot ref” parameter is displayed (F, FREQ RAMP menu).
DOWN button: Used to scroll down through parameters or to decrease numeric values while in edit-
ing mode; it can also be used to decrease motorpotentiometer reference values, when
“F.000-Motorpot ref” parameter is displayed (F, FREQ RAMP menu).
I Start button: Used to START the drive via keypad; “S.200-Cms source sel = [0] Keypad” parameter
setting and +24V between 8 & 22 terminals are always required to initiate a start com-
mand from Keypad.
O Stop button: Used to STOP the drive via keypad;
The action of the Stop key can be programmed by the parameter “P.005-Stop Key
Mode”, and also depends on the actual source of drive main commands:
- P.000=0: (default configuration) main commands are coming from keypad. Therefore,
the Stop key will cause a normal stop of the motor.
- P.000>0 and P.005 = 0, pressing the Stop key will have no effect.
- P.000>0 and P.005 = 1, pressing the Stop key, the motor will execute an emergency
stop, following the ramp programmed by F.206. After the speed reaches the zero value,
the drive will trip with the dedicated alarm “EMS“. An alarm reset will be needed to re-
store drive operation (see paragraph 9.2).

50 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Keypad LEDs meaning:

LED state Color Meaning

Prg Yellow Flashing if the parameters have not been storage in the permanent memory
Rev Green Motor reverse running (*)
Fwd Green Motor forward running (*)
Limit Yellow Inverter limit state
Alarm Red Inverter alarm state
Al (**) Red Operational state of CANopen or DeviceNet indication (see below)
Op (**) Yellow “bF” (bus Fault) alarm state of CANopen or DeviceNet indication (see below)

(*) Flashing indicates the action of the motor stall prevention.

(**) “Al” and “Op” LEDs have implemented in the inverterd with CANopen/DeviceNet integrated.

Op state Al state DeviceNet meaning

On On Power-up of the card
Blinking Blinking Self test and Duplicate MAC-ID checking
Blinking Off Wait config. of Master and/or I/O Polling not active
On Off I/O Polling active, operational state
Off Blinking Fault recovering (DUP MAC-ID fail, bus-off, bus-loss)
Off On Grave Fault (internal configuration error)
Off Off DeviceNet not configured

The pictures below show the display meaning:

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

S.000
AI Op

Parameter code (Mains voltage)

Menu S (STARTUP)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 51

 6.2 Moving Through the Drive Main Menu

Soon after, the keypad display will show “Output frequency (d.000)” parameter of DISPLAY menu.

0.00
Prg

.000 Menu of read-only parameters (display)

Prg

S.000 Menu of basic drive start up parameters

Prg

I.000 Menu of input/output drive settings (digital/analog)

Prg

Prg
F.000 Menu of multi frequencies and ramps settings

Prg

P.000 Menu of read/write drive parameters

Prg

A.000 Menu of PID function settings

Prg

C.000 Menu of control-type parameters (Save, Load default, etc.)

52 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 6.3 Scrolling Through the Drive Parameters

INTERFACE menu example:

I.000

I.00 i

I.002
----------------

I.775

6.4 Parameters Modification

Example: how to change a frequency reference (FREQ & RAMP menu).

I 0.0
Increase

To confirm
F.000 EnterE 0.0 E
Enter new setting
desired

Decrease

- 20.0
Note ! Same procedure is also valid to Enable/Disable a function (ex.: S.401 Auto boost en) or program the drive I/Os (ex.: I.000 Dig input 1 cfg,
etc. …).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 53

 6.5 Quickstart procedure

Impostazioni base per l’avviamento

1 Goto menu S – Startup Edit and proceed to step 2.

Edit parameter S.000 to set the nominal voltage of input

2 Set the drive input mains voltage
mains (ex. 380V, 400V, 420V 460V, 480V). Goto step 3.

Edit parameter S.001 to set the nominal frequency of input

3 Set the drive input mains frequency
mains (50Hz or 60Hz). Goto step 4.

Set the maximum voltage to be ap- Set parameter S.100 to the rated voltage of the motor in use,
4
plied to the motor as shown in the nameplate. Goto step 5.

Set parameter S.150 to the full load current of the motor in

5 Set the rated current of the motor
use, as shown in the nameplate. Goto step 6.

Set parameter S.151 to number of pole pairs of the motor in

6 Set the pole pairs of the motor
use (number of poles divided by 2). Goto step 7.

Set parameter S.152 to the rated power factor of the motor in

7 Set the power factor of the motor
use, as shown in the nameplate.

At this point, the drive is ready for a trial run. Applying +24V between terminals 8 and 22, and
pressing the START button on the keypad, the drive will start and the motor will accelerate up to a
frequency equal to the one of the input AC mains.
Before executing the trial run, make sure that motor rotation at rated frequency is
compatible with the applied load. If not, skip the test run and proceed to the standard
Note! settings. It is possible to execute the trial run at reduced speed, by setting the value of
parameter S.203 to the desired value of the output frequency, prior to give the START
command..

Standard settings

By default, the drive is started and stopped by pressing the

START and STOP buttons on the keypad, provided +24V are
Select the source of drive main
8 applied between terminals 8 and 20, as safety interlock. If
commands
this setting is satisfactory, skip to step 9, otherwise change
the value of S.200 as follows:
Start & Stop are given by pressing the relative
keypad buttons. (+24V between terminal 8 and
S.200 = [0]
20 must be applied as safety interlock). This is
the default setting.
Start & Stop are given by asserting and de-
S.200 = [1]
asserting drive terminal 8.
It is possible to program several other sources
Note! for Start and Stop commands. See chap 7.6,
section Commands, for details.
Goto step 9

54 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 By default, the reference frequency is limited to the frequency
reference frequency of the input mains. If the
Set the drive maximum allowed
9 application requires higher settings of the motor reference
reference frequency
frequency, increase the value of parameter S.201. Goto step
10.

By default, the drive frequency reference is the value written

frequency reference. in parameter S.203.
Select the source of drive main
10 If this setting is satisfactory, skip to step 11,
frequency reference
otherwise change the source of the drive reference frequen-
cy, by setting S.202 as follows:

S.202 = [1] Analog input 1 is the drive frequency reference.

The value of S.203 is the drive frequency refer-
S.202 = [3]
ence. This is the default setting.
Motorpotentiometer F.000 is the drive frequency
S.202 = [5] reference. Refer to chap. 7.5, section Motorpo-
tentiometer, for details.

It is possible to program several other sources

Note! for the drive frequency reference. See chap 7.5,
section Reference Sources, for details.

Edit parameter S.300 to set the desired acceleration time.

This is the time needed to accelerate from zero to rated fre-
11 Set the drive acceleration and quency, and is expressed in seconds.
deceleration ramp times. Edit parameter S.301 to set the desired deceleration time.
This is the time needed to decelerate from rated frequency to
zero, and is expressed in seconds.

If the drive is connected to multiple motors, or if the motor

rated current is less than one fifth of the drive rated current,
12 Set the voltage boost characteris- set the manual boost S.400 and skip to point 15. Otherwise,
tic of the drive enable the automatic voltage boost (S.401 = [1]) and goto
13. For details about the voltage boost setting, refer to chap.
7.6, section Boost.

Slip compensation is needed if the natural speed variation

of the drive of the motor due to the applied load is an issue
for the application. If not, skip to point 14. Amount of slip
Set the slip compensation charac- compensation is set by the parameter S.450. S.450 = 100%,
13 teristic of the drive means that the rated slip (evaluated from nameplates and
measured resistance) is assumed at rated motor current. Dy-
namics of the slip estimation is set by the parameter S.451.
Refer to chap. 7.6, section Slip Compensation for details.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 55

 If the resistance of stator windings is known, its ohmic value
can be entered in parameter S.153, and the autotuning
Measure the resistance of stator
14 procedure can be skipped. Otherwise, execute the autotun-
windings.
ing command (S.900 = [1]) and wait for the procedure to end.
Goto 15.

Execute the Save Parameter command (S.901 = [1]), in

order to store the actual set of parameters in the drive per-
15 Save drive parameters. manent memory. If this operation is not performed, all the
modified parameters will be restored to the last saved value if
the power is cycled.

Advanced settings
Depending on the application, it may be necessary to change drive parameters that are not included
in the Startup menu. Refer to chapters 7.4 through 7.7 for a complete explanation of available drive
functions.

56 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 7 - Parameter Description

7.1 Parameters List

Legend of drive menu contents.

Menu d - DISPLAY Menu of read-only parameters (display)

Menu S - STARTUP Menu for basic drive start up

Menu I - INTERFACE Menu of input/output settings (digital/analog)

Menu F - FREQ & RAMP Menu of multi frequencies and ramps settings

Menu P - PARAMETER Menu for drive regulation and optimization

Menu A - APPLICATION Menu for PID function settings

Menu C - COMMAND Menu of control-type parameters (Save, Load default, etc.)

Menu not available on the keypad. It is reserved to set the drive parameters through Serial line
Menu H - HIDDEN
and/or through Field bus cards.

Note ! In this chapter, the functions of each drive parameter are described.
Moreover chapter 7 describes the code and the name of each single parameter..

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 57

 Figure 7.1: Parameters Description Legend

Code: Parameter Code, showed on the display.

Format = X.YYY:

Parameter sw number, used via serial

X = Menu d=DISPLAY
S=STARTUP
I=INTERFACE
F=FREQ & RAMPS

Parameter step of variation

Parameter maximum value
P=PARAMETER

Parameter unit of measure

Parameter minimum value
A=APPLICATION

Parameter default value

C=COMMAND
H=HIDDEN
YYY = Parameter number

Name: Parameter name [Code]: Pick List code [in

braket]
Selection Name: Text on the display

Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Code]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

START-UP
S.000 Mains voltage Rated value of the line 380 380V (****) (****) (****) V 404
voltage 400 400V (P.020)
power Supply

420 420V
440 440V
460 460V
480 480V

S.001 Mains frequency Rated value of the line 50 50Hz (****) (****) (****) Hz 405
frequency 60 60Hz (P.021)

If IPA bold =
not writable parameter with running
motor.

Notes ! (Alias) On Startup menu only. Parameter code of same parameter on other menu.
(*): Parameter value dependent of the drive size.
(**): Parameter value dependent of the drive nominal main voltage and main frequency.
(***): Value dependent of the setting of another parameter.
(****): Value dependent of the drive type: 400V or 460V input.

58 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

DISPLAY
d.000 Output frequency Drive output frequency Hz 0.01 001

d.001 Frequency ref Drive frequency reference Hz 0.01 002

d.002 Output current Drive output current (rms) A 0.1 003

d.003 Output voltage Drive output voltage (rms) V 1 004

d.004 DC link voltage DC Bus drive voltage (DC) V 1 005

Basic

d.005 Power factor Power factor 0.01 006

d.006 Power [kW] Power kW 0.01 007

d.007 Output speed Drive output speed 0.01/1 008

(d.000)*(P.600)

d.008 Speed ref Drive speed reference 0.01/1 009

(d.001)*(P.600)

d.050 Heatsink temp Drive heatsink temperature °C 1 010

(linear sensor measured)

d.051 Drive OL Drive overload (100% = % 0.1 011

alarm threshold)
Overload

d.052 Motor OL Motor overload (100% = % 0.1 012

alarm threshold)

d.053 Brake res OL Braking resistor overload % 0.1 013

(100%=alarm thr)

d.054 Reserved

d.100 Dig inp status Digital inputs status ac- 014

quired by the drive (terminal
or virtual)

d.101 Term inp status Digital inputs terminal status 015

of the drive regulat. card

d.102 Vir dig inp stat Virtual digital inputs status 016
from drive serial link or field
bus card

d.120 Exp dig inp stat Expansion digital inputs 017

status (optional terminal or
virtual)

d.121 Exp term inp Expansion digital inputs 018

terminal status of the drive
expansion card
Input/Output

d.122 Vir exp dig inp Expansion virtual digital in- 019
puts status from drive serial
link or field bus card

d.150 Dig out status Digital outputs status on the 020

terminals of the drive regula-
tion card (commanded by
DO functions or virtual DO)

d.151 Drv dig out sta Digital outputs status, com- 021
manded by DO functions

d.152 Vir dig out sta Virtual digital outputs status, 022
commanded via serial link
or field bus card

d.170 Exp dig out sta Expansion digital outputs 023

status on the terminals of
the drive regulation card
(commanded by DO func-
tions or virtual DO)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 59

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

d.171 Exp DrvDigOutSta Expansion digital outputs 024

status, commanded by DO
functions

d.172 Exp vir dig sta Expansion virtual digital out- 025
out puts status, commanded via
serial link or field bus card

d.200 An in 1 cnf mon Analog input 1 destination; [[0] Null funct 026
it shows the function asso- [1] Freq ref 1
ciated to this analog input [2] Freq ref 2
[3] Bst lev fact
[4] OT lev fact
[5] Vred lev fac
[6] DCB lev fact
[7] RampExt fact
[8] Freq Ref fact
[9] SpdPI LimFac
Input/Output

[10] Mlt rif frq 1

[11] Mlt rif frq 2

d.201 An in 1 monitor Analog input 1 output block 027

% value

d.202 An in 1 term mon Analog input 1 input block 028

% value

d.210 An in 2 cnf mon Analog input 2 destination; As for d.200 029

it shows the function as-
sociated to this AI

d.211 An in 2 monitor Analog input 2 output block 030

% value

d.212 An in 2 term mon Analog input 2 input block 031

% value

d.220 Reserved

d.221 Reserved

d.222 Reserved

d.300 EncPulses/Sam- Number of encoder pulses, 0.001 035

ple recorded in the time interval
defined by parameter I.504.
Encoder

d.301 Encoder freq Encoder frequency reading Hz 0.01 036

(Motor frequency)

d.302 Encoder speed Encoder speed reading 0.01/1 037

(d.000)*(P.600)

d.350 Option 1 state Drive option 1 state (expan- 0 Reserved 038

sion card type programmed) 1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Data exchange
.. ..
32 Regulation card error (card
Option

type)
33 Regulation card error (check-
sum)
34 Regulation card error (card
incompatible)
.. ..
64 Expansion error
65 Reserved
66 Reserved

60 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

d.351 Option 2 state Drive option 2 state (expan- As for d.350 039
sion card type programmed)

d.352 Reseved

d.353 SBI State Communication state be- 0 Wait parametrization 059

tween SBI and Master 1 Wait configuration
2 Data exchange
3 Error
option

d.354 SBI Baudrate Communication speed 0 12 Mbit / s 060

between SBI and Master 1 6 Mbit / s
2 3 Mbit / s
3 1.5 Mbit / s
4 500 Kbit / s
5 187.5 Kbit / s
6 93.75 Kbit / s
7 45.45 Kbit / s
8 19.2 Kbit / s
15 unknown

d.400 PID reference PID reference signal % 0.1 041

d.401 PID feedback PID feedback signal % 0.1 042

PID

d.402 PID error PID error signal % 0.1 043

d.403 PID integr comp PID integral component % 0.1 044

d.404 PID output PID output signal % 0.1 045

d.800 1st alarm-latest Last alarm stored by the See paragraph 046
drive alarm list 9.3
Alarm List

d.801 2nd alarm Second to last alarm 047

d.802 3rd alarm Third to last alarm 048

d.803 4th alarm Fourth to last alarm 049

d.950 Drive rated curr Drive rated current (it de- 0.1 050
pends on the drive size)

d.951 SW version (1/2) Software version - part 1 03.01 0.01 051

d.952 SW version (2/2) Software version - part 2 00.00 0.01 052

d.953 Reseved

d.954 Reseved
Drive Identification

d.955 Reseved

d.956 Reseved

d.957 Drive size Drive size code 0 0.37kW (400V) - 0.5Hp (480V) 057
1 0.55kW (400V) - 0.75Hp (480V)
2 0.75kW (400V) - 1Hp (480V)
4 1.5kW (400V) - 2Hp (480V)
5 2.2kW (400V) - 3Hp (480V)
6 3kW (400V) - 4Hp (480V)
7 4kW (400V) - 5Hp (480V)
8 5.5kW (400V) - 7.5Hp (480V)
9 7.5kW (400V) - 10Hp (480V)
10 11kW (400V) - 15Hp (480V)
11 15kW (400V) - 20Hp (480V)
12 18.5kW (400V) - 25Hp (480V)
13 22kW (400V) - 30Hp (480V)

d.958 Drive cfg type Drive cofiguration type [0] 400Vac Drive configured for 400Vac 061
/ 50Hz
Utility

[1] 460Vac Drive configured for 460Vac

/ 60Hz

d.999 Display Test Drive display test 099

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 61

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

START-UP
S.000 Mains voltage Rated value of the line 380 380V (****) (****) (****) V 404
voltage 400 400V (P.020)
Power Supply

420 420V
440 440V
460 460V
480 480V

S.001 Mains frequency Rated value of the line 50 50Hz (****) (****) (****) Hz 405
frequency 60 60Hz (P.021)

S.100 Max out voltage Maximum value of the volt- (**) 50 (**) V 413
age applied to the motor (P.061)
V/f

S.101 Base frequency Rated frequency of the (**) 25 500 Hz 414

motor (P.062)

S.150 Motor rated curr Rated current of the motor (*) (*) (*) A 406
(P.040)

S.151 Motor pole pairs Pole Pairs of the motor (*) 1 60 407
Motor Data

(P.041)

S.152 Motor power fact Motor power factor (*) 0.01 1 408
(P.042)

S.153 Motor stator R Measurement of the stator (*) 0 99.99 ohm 409
resistance of the motor (P.043)

S.200 Cmd source sel Source of the START and [0] Tastiera START & STOP via keypad 0 0 4 400
STOP commands (+24V between 22 & 8 termi- (P.000)
nals required).
[1] Terminals START & STOP via terminal
Main commands via Virtual &
[2] Virtual Terminal setting

[3] Serial Main commands via serial line

[4] Control word Main commands from ProfiD-

rive control word

S.201 Max ref freq Maximum frequency (****) 25 500 Hz 305

reference threshold and / (F.020)
Commands & Referencies

or digital reference (both

directions)

S.202 Ref 1 channel Source of the Reference 1 [0] Null Null 3 0 8 307
[1] Analog inp 1
Analog input 1 (F.050)
[2] Analog inp 2
Analog input 2
[3] Freq ref x Frequency reference S.203
(F.100)
[4] Multispeed Multi frequencies

[5] Motorpotent Motorpotientometer reference

[6] Null Null

[7] Encoder Encoder signal
[8] Profidrive Reference by Profibus

S.203 Frequency ref 0 Digital speed reference (****) -S.201 S.201 311
(F.100) (F.100)

S.300 Acc time 1 Acceleration ramp delay 5 1 999.9 sec 329

time 1 (***) (***) (F.201)

S.301 Dec time 1 Deceleration ramp delay 5 1 999.9 sec 330

time 1 (***) (***) (F.202)

62 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

S.400 Manual boost [%] Manual boost at low revolu- 1.0 0.0 25.0 % of 0.1 421
tions S.100 (P.120)

S.401 Auto boost en Automatic boost function [0] Disable Automatic boost function 0 0 1 423
enabling [1] Enable disabled (P.122)
Functions

Automatic boost function

enabled

S.450 Slip compensat Slip compensation 0 0 250 % of 1 419

S.100 (P.100)

S.451 Slip comp filter Response time of slip com- 0.1 0 10 sec 0.1 420
pensation (P.101)

S.900 Measure stator R Motor tuning command oFF No action oFF oFF do 806
do Autotune command execu- C.100)
tion
Utility

S.901 Save parameters Save parameters oFF No action oFF oFF do 800
do Autotune command execu- C.000)
tion

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 63

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

INTERFACE
I.000 Dig input 1 cfg Digital Input 1 configuration [0] None Not active 1 0 30 100
[1] Run RUN command for the motor START
[2] Reverse Speed REVERSE command
[3] Ext Fault NO External fault with NO (Normal
Open) contact
[4] Ext Fault NC External fault with NC (Norm.
Closed) contact
[5] Alarm reset Alarm reset command
[6] Jog JOG frequency reference enabling
[7] Freq sel 1 Binary selection for Multispeed
[8] Freq sel 2 Binary selection for Multispeed
[9] Freq sel 3 Binary selection for Multispeed
[10] Freq sel 4 Binary selection for Multispeed
[11] Ramp sel 1 Binary selection for Multiramp
[12] Ramp sel 2 Binary selection for Multiramp
[13] Enable NO Drive Enable with NC (Norm.
Closed) contact
[14] Enable NC Drive Enable with NO (Nor-
mal Open) contact
[15] DCBrake en Enabling of the DC braking
function
[16] DCBrake Command for execution of
DC braking
[17] Autocapture Execution of the flying restart
[18] Ramp enable Enabling / Disabling of the
Ramp block
Digital Input of the Regulation card

[19] Zero ref Ramp to 0Hz & main com-

mands active
[20] PID enable Enabling of the PID regulation
[21] PID freeze Enabling PID freeze output
signal.
[22] PID gain sel Selection of the PID regulator
gain.
[23] Motorpot Up Motorpotentiometer reference
increasing
[24] Motorpot Dn Motorpotentiometer reference
decreasing
[25] Reset Motorp Reset of Motorpotentiometer
ref.
[26] Fast stop Emergency stop
[27] Zero freq Output frequency forced to
zero, following the ramp pro-
grammed for Fast stop (F.206).
[28] Stop (3Wires) Stop function (NC) with P.001
= [2] 3 Wires.
[29] Local/Remote Start/Stop commands from
keypad (Local) or from the
source programmed by P.000
(Remote)
[30] En lim Steady Activate the stationary status
current regulator

I.001 Dig input 2 cfg Digital Input 2 configuration As for I.000 2 0 30 101

I.002 Dig input 3 cfg Digital Input 3 configuration As for I.000 3 0 30 102

I.003 Dig input 4 cfg Digital Input 4 configuration As for I.000 6 0 30 103

I.004 Dig input 5 cfg Digital Input 5 configuration As for I.000 5 0 30 104

I.005 Reserved

I.006 Reserved

I.007 Reserved

64 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

I.050 Exp dig in 1 cfg Expansion Digital Input 1 As for I.000 0 0 30 108
Digital Input of the Expansion card

configuration (on Expansion

card)

I.051 Exp dig in2 cfg Expansion Digital Input 2 As for I.000 0 0 30 109
configuration (on Expansion
card)

I.052 Exp dig in3 cfg Expansion Digital Input 3 As for I.000 0 0 30 110
configuration (on Expansion
card)

I.053 Exp dig in4 cfg Expansion Digital Input 4 As for I.000 0 0 30 111
configuration (on Expansion
card)

I.070 AND 1 out cfg Output block set up AND 1 As for I.000 0 0 30 186

I.071 AND 2 out cfg Output block set up AND 2 As for I.000 0 0 30 187

I.072 AND 3 out cfg Output block set up AND 3 As for I.000 0 0 30 188
Programmable logic

I.073 OR 1 out cfg Output block set up OR1 As for I.000 0 0 30 189

I.074 OR 2 out cfg Output block set up OR 2 As for I.000 0 0 30 190

I.075 OR 3 out cfg Output block set up OR 3 As for I.000 0 0 30 191

I.076 NOT 1 out cfg Output block set up NOT 1 As for I.000 0 0 30 192

I.077 NOT 2 out cfg Output block set up NOT 2 As for I.000 0 0 30 193

I.078 NOT 3 out cfg Output block set up NOT 3 As for I.000 0 0 30 194

I.079 NOT 4 out cfg Output block set up NOT 4 As for I.000 0 0 30 195

I.100 Dig output 1 cfg Digital Output 1 configura- 6 0 77 112

tion [0] Drive Ready Drive ready to start
[1] Alarm state Alarm signalling (Positive
logic)
[2] Not in alarm Alarm signalling (Negative
logic)
[3] Motor run Run command active or
Digital Output of the Regulation card

output frequency ¹ 0Hz

[4] Motor stop Run command not active and
output frequency =0Hz
[5] REV rotation Counter-clockwise rotation of
the motor.
[6] Steady state Motor is running in steady
state.
[7] Ramping Acceleration or Deceleration
Ramp in progress.
[8] UV running The drive has tripped for UV,
and automatic restart is tak-
ing place.
[9] Out trq>thr Output torque higher than the
value of P.241.
[10] Current lim Current limit (during ramp or
at steady state).
[11] DC-link lim DC Bus limit.

[12] Limit active General signalling of drive

limit condition.
[13] Autocapt run Autocapture in progress.

[14] BU overload Set when the integrator d.054

= 100%, and Reset when
d.054 = 0%
[15] Neg pwrfact Negative inverter output
power factor.
[16] PID err >< PID error is within the limits
defined by A.058 and A.059.
[17] PID err>thr PID error is >A.058.
[18] PID err<thr PID error is <=A.059.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 65

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name
[19] PIDer><(inh) PID error is within the limits
defined by A.058 and A.059.
(see chapter 7.7).
[20] PIDerr>(inh) PID error is >A.058 (see
chapter 7.7).
[21] PIDerr<(inh) PID error is <=A.059 (see
chapter 7.7).
[22] FWD enc rot Clockwise rotation of the
encoder.
[23] REV enc rot Counter-clockwise rotation of
the encoder.
[24] Encoder stop Encoder not rotating.

[25] Encoder run Encoder is rotating. general

signalling.
[26] Extern fault Positive logic for Ext. fault
alarm signalling.
[27] No ext fault Negative logic for Extern.
fault alarm signalling.
[28] Serial TO Serial link communication
time out.
[29] freq=thr1 Output frequency within the
range defined by P.440 and
P.441.
[30] freq!=thr1 Output frequency outside the
range defined by P.440 and
P.441.
[31] freq>thr1 Output frequency above the
values defined by P.440 and
P.441.
[32] freq<thr1 Output frequency below the
values defined by P.440 and
P.441.
[33] freq=thr2 Output frequency within the
range defined by P.442 and
P.443.
[34] freq!=thr2 Output frequency outside the
range defined by P.442 and
P.443.
[35] freq>thr2 Output frequency above the
values defined by P.442 and
P.443.
[36] freq<thr2 Output frequency below the
values defined by P.442 and
P.443.
[37] HS temp=thr Heatsink temp within the
range defined by P.480 and
P.481.
[38] HS temp!=thr Heatsink temp outside the
range defined by P.480 and
P.481.
[39] HS temp>thr Heatsink temp above the
threshold defined by P.480
and P.481.
[40] HS temp<thr Heatsink temp below the
threshold defined by P.480
and P.481.
[41] Output freq Square wave synchronized
with the inverter output
frequency
[42] Out freq x 2 Square wave synchronized
with twice the inverter output
frequency
[43] CoastThrough Kinetic energy recovering
during mains loss
[44]EmgStop Emergency stop after mains
loss detection
[45] DC braking CD braking in progress

[46] Drv OL status Set when the integrator d.051

= 100%, and Reset when
d.051 = 0%
[47] Drv OL warn Set if d.051 is greater or
equal to 90%

66 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name
[48] Mot OL state Set when the integrator d.052
= 100%, and Reset when
d.052 = 0%
[49] False False assume value 0
[50] True True assume value 1
[51] Reserved
[52] Reserved
[53] Reserved
[54] Reserved
[55] Reserved
[56] DI 1 State of digital input 1
[57] DI 2 State of digital input 2
[58] DI 3 State of digital input 3
[59] DI 4 State of digital input 4
[60] DI 5 State of digital input 5
[61] DI 6 State of digital input 6
[62] DI 7 State of digital input 7
[63] DI 8 State of digital input 8
[64] Exp DI 1 Digital input 1 expansion
state
[65] Exp DI 2 Digital input 2 expansion
state
[66] Exp DI 3 Digital input 3 expansion
state
[67] Exp DI 4 Digital input 4 expansion
state
[68] AND 1 out Output block AND 1 state
[69] AND 2 out Output block AND 2 state
[70] AND 3 out Output block AND 3 state
[71] OR 1 out Output block OR 1 state
[72] OR 2 out Output block OR 2 state
[73] OR 3 out Output block OR 3 state
[74] NOT 1 out Output block NOT 1 state
[75] NOT 2 out Output block NOT 2 state
[76] NOT 3 out Output block NOT 3 state
[77] NOT 4 out Output block NOT 4 state
I.101 Dig output 2 cfg Digital Output 2 configura- As for I.100 0 0 77 113
tion

I.102 Reserved

I.103 Reserved

I.150 Exp DigOut 1 cfg Expansion Digital Output 1 As for I.100 0 0 77 116
Dig. Outputof the Exp. card

configuration (on Expansion

card)

I.151 Exp DigOut 2 cfg Expansion Digital Output 2 As for I.100 0 0 77 117
configuration (on Expansion
card)

I.152 Exp DigOut 3 cfg Expansion Digital Output 3 As for I.100 0 0 77 180
configuration (on Expansion
card)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 67

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

I.200 An in 1 Type Setting of the Analog Input [0] +/- 10V Bipolar -/+10V 1 0 2 118
1 type reference (voltage) [1] 0-10V/0-20mA Unipolar +10V or 0...20mA
[2] 4-20mA 4 ... 20mA

I.201 An in 1 offset Analog Input 1 offset 0 -99.9 99.9 % 0.1 119

I.202 An in 1 gain Analog Input 1 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 120

I.203 An in 1 minimum An Input 1 minimun value 0 0 99.99 % 0.01 121

I.204 An in 1 filter Time constant of digital filter 0.1 0.001 0.25 sec 0.001 122
on Analog input 1

I.205 An In 1 DeadBand Analog Input 1 dead band 0 0 99.9 % 0.1 182

Analog Input Regulation Board

I.210 An in 2 Type Setting of the Analog Input [0] +/- 10V Bipolar -/+10V 0 0 2 123
2 type reference (voltage) [1] 0-10V/0-20mA Unipolar +10V or 0...20mA
[2] 4-20mA 4 ... 20mA

I.211 An in 2 offset Analog Input 2 offset 0 -99.9 99.9 % 0.1 124

I.212 An in 2 gain Analog Input 2 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 125

I.213 An in 2 minimum An Input 2 minimun value 0 0 99.99 % 0.01 126

I.214 An in 2 filter Time constant of digital filter 0.1 0.001 0.25 sec 0.001 127
on Analog input 2

I.215 An In 2 DeadBand Analog Input 2 dead band 0 0 99.9 0.1 183

I.220 Reserved

I.221 Reserved

I.222 Reserved

I.223 Reserved

I.224 Reserved

I.225 Reserved

I.300 Analog out 1 cfg Analog Output 1 configura- [0] Freq out abs Output Frequency absolute 0 0 22 133
tion value.
[1] Freq out Output Frequency.
[2] Output curr Output Current.
[3] Out voltage Output Voltage.
[4] Out trq pos Output Torque positive value.
Analog Output Regulation Board

[5] Out trq abs Output Torque absolute value.

[6] Out trq Output Torque.
[7] Out pwr pos Output Power positive value.
[8] Out pwr abs Output Power absolute value.
[9] Out pwr Output Power.
[10] Out PF Output Power Factor.
[11] Enc freq abs Encoder frequency absolute
value.
[12] Encoder freq Encoder frequency.
[13] Freq ref abs Frequency reference abso-
lute value.
[14] Freq ref Frequency reference
[15] Load current Load Current.
[16] Magn current Motor Magnetizing Current.
[17] PID output PID regulator output.
[18] DClink volt DC bus capacitors level.
[19] U current Output phase U current
signal.
[20] V current Output phase V current
signal.
[21] W current Output phase W current
signal.
[22] Freq ref fac Multiplier factor for frequency
reference

68 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

I.301 An out 1 offset Analog output 1 offset 0 -9.99 9.99 0.01 134

I.302 An out 1 gain Analog output 1 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 135

I.303 An out 1 filter Time constant of output 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 136
filter

I.310 Analog out 2 cfg Analog Output 2 configura- As for I.300 2 0 22 137
tion

I.311 An out 2 offset Analog output 2 offset 0 -9.99 9.99 0.01 138

I.312 An out 2 gain Analog output 2 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 139

I.313 An out 2 filter Time constant of output 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 140
filter

I.350 Exp an out 1 cfg Expansion Analog Output 1 As for I.300 3 0 22 141
Analog Output Exp card

configuration (on Exp. card)

I.351 Exp AnOut 1 offs Expansion Analog Output 0 -9.99 9.99 0.01 142
1 offset

I.352 Exp AnOut 1 gain Expansion Analog Output 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 143
1 gain

I.353 Exp AnOut 1 filt Time constant of output 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 144
filter

I.400 Inp by serial en Virtual Digital enabling 0 0 255 145

I.410 Exp in by ser en Expansion Virtual Digital 0 0 15 146

Enabling Virtual I/O

I.420 Out by serial en Inputs enabling 0 0 15 147

I.430 Exp OutBySer en Virtual Digital Outputs set- 0 0 3 148

ting enabling

I.440 An Inp by ser en Expansion Virtual Digital 0 0 255 196

Outputs enabling

I.450 An out by ser en Virtual Analog Inputs 0 0 255 149

enabling

I.500 Encoder enable Virtual Analog Outputs [0] Disable Encoder measure disabled. 0 0 1 150
enabling [1] Enable Encoder measure enabled.

I.501 Encoder ppr Enabling of the encoder 1024 0 9999 151

measure

I.502 Enc channels cfg Encoder nameplate pulses [0] One Channel A (K1) encoder channel 1 0 1 152
per revolution [1] Two Channels A and B (K1 and K2) encoder
Encoder Config

channels

I.503 Enc spd mul fact Encoder channels configura- 1 0.01 99.99 153
tion

I.504 Enc update time Multiplier factor of the [0] 1ms 0 0 5 154
encoder pulses, set in the [1] 4ms
I.501 [2] 16ms
[3] 0.25s
[4] 1s
[5] 5s

I.505 Reserved

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 69

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

Protocol

Data Bit

Stop Bit
Parity
type
I.600 Serial link cfg Serial line configuration [0] FoxLink 7E1 FoxLink 7E1 7 Even 1 4 0 5 155
protocol & mode [1] FoxLink 701 FoxLink 7O1 7 Odd 1
[2] FoxLink 7N2 FoxLink 7N2 7 None 2
[3] FoxLink 8N1 FoxLink 7O1 8 None 1
[4] ModBus 8N1 Modbus 8N1 8 None 1
[5] JBus 8N1 Jbus 8N1 8 None 1

I.601 Serial link bps Serial line baudrate [0] 600 baud 600 baud rate 4 0 6 156
Serial Line Config

[1] 1200 baud 1200 baud rate

[2] 2400 baud 2400 baud rate
[3] 4800 baud 4800 baud rate
[4] 9600 baud 9600 baud rate
[5] 19200 baud 19200 baud rate
[6] 38400 baud 38400 baud rate

I.602 Device address Serial line address of the 1 0 99 1 157

drive

I.603 Ser answer delay Serial line answer delay 1 0 250 msec 1 158
time

I.604 Serial timeout Serial line transmission 0 0 25 sec 0.1 159

timeout

I.605 En timeout alm Setting time out alarm [0] Disable Drive NOT in alarm and 0 0 1 160
signal on a digital output
[1] Enable Drive IN alarm and signal on
a digital output

I.700 Option 1 type Expansion optional 1 card [0] Card Off None 0 0 4 161
type (Note: Selected card [1] Card master Reserved
Option Config Board

must be installed on drive) [2] IO Card EXP-D6-A1R1-ADV80

[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI Card SBI-PDP-ADV80

I.701 Option 2 type Expansion optional 2 card [0] Card Off None 0 0 4 162
type (Note: Selected card [1] Card master Reserved
must be installed on drive) [2] IO Card EXP-D6-A1R1-ADV80
[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI Card SBI-PDP-ADV80

70 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

I.750 SBI address SBI Address 3 0 255 163

I.751 CAN baudraute CAN Open baudraute [0] 10 Kbit 5 0 6 164

[1] 20 Kbit
[2] 50 Kbit
[3] 125 Kbit
[4] 250 Kbit
[5] 500 Kbit
[6] 1000 Kbit

I.752 SBI Profibus mod SBI Profibus Mode [0] Custom Profidrive custom 2 0 4 165
[1] PPO1 Profidrive type 1
[2] PPO2 Profidrive type 2
[3] PPO3 Profidrive type 3
[4] PPO4 Profidrive type 4

I.753 SBI CAN mode Selection of the Bus pro- [0] OFF None 0 0 2 166
tocol [1] CAN Open CAN Open protocol
[2] DeviceNet DeviceNet protocol
Field Bus Config

I.754 Bus Flt Holdoff Delay time for Bus Fault 0.0 0.0 60.0 sec 0.1 179
Alarm from profibus

I.760 SBI to Drv W 0 Word 0 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 167

I.761 SBI to Drv W 1 Word 1 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 168

I.762 SBI to Drv W 2 Word 2 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 169

I.763 SBI to Drv W 3 Word 3 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 170

I.764 SBI to Drv W 4 Word 4 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 171

I.765 SBI to Drv W 5 Word 5 from SBI to drive 0 0 1999 172

I.770 Drv to SBI W 0 Word 0 from drive to SBI 1 0 1999 173

I.771 Drv to SBI W 1 Word 1 from drive to SBI 2 0 1999 174

I.772 Drv to SBI W 2 Word 2 from drive to SBI 3 0 1999 175

I.773 Drv to SBI W 3 Word 3 from drive to SBI 4 0 1999 176

I.774 Drv to SBI W 4 Word 4 from drive to SBI 5 0 1999 177

I.775 Drv to SBI W 5 Word 5 from drive to SBI 6 0 1999 178

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 71

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

FREQ & RAMP

F.000 Motorpot ref Motopot reference (it can 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.01 300
be set using up and down
commands)

F.010 Mp acc/dec time Motorpot Accel. and Decel. 10 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 301
ramp time

F.011 Motorpot offset Motopotentiometer mini- 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 302

Motorpotentiometer

mum reference

F.012 Mp output mode Unipolar / bipolar Motorpo- [0] Unipolar Motorpotentiometer unipolar 0 0 1 303
tentiometer [1] Bipolar Motorpotentiometer bipolar

F.013 Mp auto save Motopotenziometer auto [0] Disable Motorpot auto save function 1 0 1 304
save function disabled
[1] Enable Motorpot auto save function
enabled

F.014 MpRef at stop Behavior of the frequency [0] Last value Mot. reference will retain its 0 0 1 351
reference from Motorpo- current value
tentiometer during a Stop [1] Follow Mot. reference will ramp
sequence ramp down to zero, following the
deceleration ramp in use

F.020 Max ref freq Motor maximum frequency (****) 25 500 Hz 0.1 305
Reference Limit

value (for both directions)

F.021 Min ref freq Minimum frequency value 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 306

F.050 Ref 1 channel Source of the Reference 1 [0] Null Null 3 0 8 307
[1] Analog inp 1 IAnalog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2
[3] Freq ref x Frequency reference F.100
[4] Multispeed Multispeed
[5] Motorpotent Motorpotientometer reference
[6] Null Null
[7] Encoder Encoder signal
[8] Profidrive Reference by Profibus
Reference Sources

F.051 Ref 2 channel Source of the Reference 2 [0] Null Null 0 0 8 308
[1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2
[3] Freq ref x Frequency reference F.101
[4] Multispeed Multispeed
[5] Motorpotent Motorpotientometer reference
[6] Null Null
[7] Encoder Encoder signal
[8] Profidrive Reference by Profibus

F.060 MltFrq channel 1 Source of the Multispeed 1 As for F.050 3 0 8 309

F.061 MltFrq channel 2 Source of the Multispeed 2 As for F.051 3 0 8 310

F.080 FreqRef fac src Frequency reference multi- [0] Null Null. 0 0 3 342
plier factor source [1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

72 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

F.100 Frequency ref 0 Digital Reference frequency 0 (****) -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 311

F.101 Frequency ref 1 Digital Reference frequency 1 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 312

F.102 Frequency ref 2 Digital Reference frequency 2 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 313

F.103 Frequency ref 3 Digital Reference frequency 3 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 314

F.104 Frequency ref 4 Digital Reference frequency 4 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 315

F.105 Frequency ref 5 Digital Reference frequency 5 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 316
Multi Frequency Function

F.106 Frequency ref 6 Digital Reference frequency 6 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 317

F.107 Frequency ref 7 Digital Reference frequency 7 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 318

F.108 Frequency ref 8 Digital Reference frequency 8 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 319

F.109 Frequency ref 9 Digital Reference frequency 9 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 320

F.110 Frequency ref 10 Digital Refer. frequency 10 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 321

F.111 Frequency ref 11 Digital Refer. frequency 11 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 322

F.112 Frequency ref 12 Digital Refer. frequency 12 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 323

F.113 Frequency ref 13 Digital Refer. frequency 13 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 324

F.114 Frequency ref 14 Digital Refer. frequency 14 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 325

F.115 Frequency ref 15 Digital Refer. frequency 15 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 326

F.116 Jog frequency Jogging frequency reference 1 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 327

F.200 Ramp resolution Accuracy of the ramp set- [0] 0.01s From 0.01s to 99.99s 1 0 2 328
ting [1] 0.1s From 0.1s to 999.9s
[2] 1s From 1s to 9999s

F.201 Acc time 1 Acceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 329
delay 1 (***) (***) (***)

F.202 Dec time 1 Deceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 330
delay 1 (***) (***) (***)

F.203 Acc time 2 Acceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 331
delay 2 (***) (***) (***)

F.204 Dec time 2 Deceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 332
Ramp Config

delay 2 (***) (***) (***)

F.205 Acc time 3 Acceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 333
delay 3 (***) (***) (***)

F.206 Dec time 3 / FS Deceleration ramp time 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 334
delay 3 / Fast Stop decel. (***) (***) (***)

F.207 Acc time 4 / Jog Accel. ramp time delay 4 / 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 335
Accel. time in jogging state (***) (***) (***)

F.208 Dec time 4 / Jog Decel. ramp time delay 4 / 5 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 336
Decel. time in jogging state (***) (***) (***)

F.250 Ramp S-shape S Ramp shaping 0 0 10 sec 0.1 337

F.260 Ramp extens src Source for the Ramp time [0] Null Null 0 0 2 338
extension function [1] Ing analog 1 Analog input 1
[2] Ing analog 2 Analog input 2
Jump frequency

F.270 Jump amplitude Jump frequencies hysteresis 0 0 100 Hz 0.1 339

F.271 Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 1 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 340

F.272 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 2 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 341

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 73

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

PARAMETER
P.000 Cmd source sel It defines the use of START [0] Keypad START & STOP via keypad 0 0 4 400
and STOP commands (+24V between 5 & 8 termi-
nals required).
[1] Terminals START & STOP via terminal
Main commands via Virtual &
[2] Virtual Terminal setting

[3] Serial Main commands via serial

line
[4] Control word Main commands from ProfiD-
rive control word

P.001 RUN /REV cmd Command logic [0] Run/Rev Run and Reverse commands 0 0 2 401
mode
[1] Fwd/Rev Run Forward and Run Re-
verse commands
Commands

[2] 3-Wires Run , Stop and Reverse com-

mands

P.002 Reversal enable Reversal enabling [0] Disable Disabling reverse rotation 1 0 1 402
[1] Enable Enabling reverse rotation

P.003 Safety Safe start definition [0] OFF START allowed with RUN 1 0 1 403
temirnal connected at the
power on
[1] ON START not allowed with RUN
temirnal connected at the
power on

P.004 Stop mode Motor stop control function [0] Ramp to stop Ramp to stop 0 0 1 493
[1] Coast to stop Coast to stop

P.005 Stop Key Mode STOP key configuration [0] Not active No action 1 0 1 496
[1] EmgStop & Al Emergency stop execution
and tripping when zero
speed is reached

P.010 Control Mode Drive control mode [0] V/f open loop V/f control w/o encoder 0 0 1 498
Control Mode

feedback
[1] V/f clsd loop V/f control with encoder
feedback

P.020 Mains voltage Rated value of the line 380 380V (****) (****) (****) V 404
voltage 400 400V
Power Supply

420 420V
440 440V
460 460V
480 480V

P.021 Mains frequency Rated value of the line volt- 50 50Hz (****) (****) (****) Hz 405
age frequency 60 60Hz

P.040 Motor rated curr Rated current of the motor (*) (*) (*) A 0.1 406

P.041 Motor pole pairs Pole Pairs of the motor (*) 1 60 407

P.042 Motor power fact Motor power factor (*) 0.01 1 0.01 408
Motor Data

P.043 Motor stator R Measurement of the stator (*) 0 99.99 ohm 0.01 409
resistance of the motor

P.044 Motor cooling Motor type cooling [0] Natural Self ventilated 0 0 1 410
[1] Forced Assisted ventilation

P.045 Motor thermal K Motor thermal constant 30 1 120 min 411

74 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.060 V/f shape V/F Curve Type [0] Custom V/F curve defined by the user 1 0 2 412
[1] Linear Linear characteristic
[1] Quadratic Quadratic characteristic
V/f curve

P.061 Max out voltage Maximum output voltage (**) 50 (**) V 1 413

P.062 Base frequency Base frequency (**) 25 500 Hz 0.1 414

P.063 V/f interm volt V/F intermediate voltage (**) 0 P.061 V 1 415

P.064 V/f interm freq V/F intermediate frequency (**) 1.0 P.062 Hz 0.1 416

P.080 Max output freq Maximum output frequency 110 0 110 % of 1 417
Slip Comp. Outp. Freq. Limit

F.020

P.081 Min output freq Minimum output frequency 0.0 0.0 25.0 % of 0.1 418
F.020

P.100 Slip compensat Slip compensation 0 0 250 % 1 419

P.101 Slip comp filter Time constant of slip com- 0.1 0 10 sec 0.1 420
pensation

P.120 Manual boost [%] Torque boost level 1 0 25 % of 1 421

P.061

P.121 Boost factor src Boost level source [0] Null Null 0 0 2 422
[1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
Boost

[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

P.122 Auto boost en Automatic boost function [0] Disable Automatic boost function 0 0 1 423
enabling disabled
[1] Enable Automatic boost function
enabled
Anti Oscillation function automatic Flux Regulation

P.140 Magn curr gain Magnetizing current regula- 0 0 100 % 0.1 424
tor gain

P.160 Osc damping Damping gain 0 0 100 1 425

gain

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 75

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.170 SpdPgainL Speed loop proportional 2.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 501
gain (low speed)

P.171 SpdIgainL Speed loop integral gain 1.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 502
(low speed)

P.172 SpdPgainH Speed loop proportional 2.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 503
gain (high speed)
Closed Loop Speed Control

P.173 SpdIgainH Speed loop integral gain 1.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 504
(high speed)

P.174 SpdGainThrL Speed loop gain scheduling 0.0 0.0 F.020 Hz 0.1 507
low threshold

P.175 SpdGainThrH Speed loop gain scheduling 0.0 0.0 F.020 Hz 0.1 508
high threshold

P.176 SpdRegHLim Speed regulator High limit 10.0 0.0 100.0 % of 0.1 509
F.020

P.177 SpdRegLLim Speed regulator Low limit -10.0 -100.0 0.0 % of 0.1 510
F.020

P.178 SRegLimFkSrc Speed regulator limits factor [0] Null Null 0 0 2 511
source [1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

P.180 SW clamp enable Current clamp enable [0] Disable 1 0 1 426

Sw Curr. Clamp

[1] Enable

P.181 Clamp alm HldOff Hold off time for the current 25.5 0.0 25.5 sec 0.1 512
clamp alarm

P.200 Ramp Currlim Enable current limitation [0] None None 0 0 2 427
Mode during ramp [1] PI Limitator PI Limit regulator
[2] Ramp freeze On/Off Ramp

P.201 Accel curr lim Current limit in acceleration (*) 20 (*) % of I 1 428
phase nom

P.202 En lim in steady Enable current limitation in [0] Disable 0 0 1 429

steady state [1] Enable
Current Limit

P.203 Curr lim steady Current limit at constant (*) 20 (*) % of I 1 430
speed nom

P.204 Curr ctrl P-gain Current limiter proportional 10.0 0.1 100.0 % 431
gain

P.205 Curr ctrl I-gain Current limiter integral gain 30.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 432

P.206 Curr ctr feedfwd Current limiter feed-forward 0 0 250 % 1 433

P.207 Decel curr limit Current limit in deceleration (*) 20 (*) % of I 1 494
phase nom

P.220 En DC link ctrl Stall prevention during dec. [0] None None 0 0 2 434
for overvoltage [1] PI Limitator PI Limit regulator
[2] Ramp freeze On/Off Ramp
Dc Link Limit

P.221 DC-lnk ctr Pgain DC link voltage limiter pro- 10.0 0.1 100.0 % 0.1 435
portional gain

P.222 DC-lnk ctr Igain DC link voltage limiter 50.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 436
integral gain

P.223 DC-link ctr FF DC link voltage limiter feed- 0 0 250 % 1 437

forward

76 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.240 OverTorque mode Overtorque mode [0] No Alm,Chk on 0: Overtorque detection al- 0 0 3 438
ways active and Over-torque
alarm disabled.
[1] No Alm,Chk ss 1: Overtorque detection in
steady state and Over-torque
alarm disabled.
Over Torque Alarm Config

[2] Alm always 2: Overtorque detection al-

ways active and Over-torque
alarm enabled.
[3] Alm steady st 3: Overtorque detection in
steady state and Over-torque
alarm enabled.

P.241 OT curr lim thr Current limit for overtorque 110 20 200 % 1 439

P.242 OT level fac src Overtorque level factor [0] Null Null 0 0 2 440
source [1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

P.243 OT signal delay Delay time for overtorque 0.1 0.1 25 sec 0.1 441
signaling
Motor Overload Config

P.260 Motor OL prot en Enabling of motor overload [0] Disable 1 0 1 444

protection [1] Enable

P.280 BU Config Braking unit configuration [0] BU disabled BU disabled 1 0 2 445

[1] BU en OL BU enabled & Overload
dis disable
[2] BU en OL en BU & Overload enabled
BU Config

P.281 Brake res value Ohmic value of braking (*) 1 250 ohm 1 446
resistor

P.282 Brake res power Braking resistor power (*) 0.01 25 kW 0.01 447

P.283 Br res thermal K Braking resistor thermal (*) 1 250 sec 1 448
constant

P.300 DC braking level DC braking level 0 0 100 % of I 1 449

nom

P.301 DCB lev fac src DC braking level factor [0] Null Null 0 0 2 450
DC Brake Config

source [1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1

[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

P.302 DC braking freq Frequency for DC braking 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 451

enabling

P.303 DC braking start DC braking time at start 0 0 60 sec 0.1 452

P.304 DC braking stop DC braking time at stop 0 0 60 sec 0.1 453

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 77

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.320 Autocapture Flying restart mode [0] Disable Null 0 0 2 454

mode [1] 1st run only Flying restar at first Run after
power on
[2] Always Flying restart at each Run
command

P.321 Autocapture Ilim Catch on flight current limit 120 20 (*) % of I 1 456
nom
Autocapture function

P.322 Demagnetiz time Demagnetization minimun (*) 0.01 10 sec 0.01 457
time

P.323 Autocap f scan t Frequency scanning time 1 0.1 25 sec 0.1 458
during Pick Up

P.324 Autocap V scan t Voltage scanning time dur- 0.2 0.1 25 V 0.1 459
ing Pick Up

P.325 Autocap spd src Source of the reference for [0] Frequency ref From active frequency refer- 0 0 3 460
Pick Up function ence
[1] Max freq ref From the Max fre ref param-
eter (F.020).
[2] Last freq ref From freq. set desired
[3] Encoder From encoder

P.340 Undervoltage thr Undervoltage threshold 0 0 80 % of 1 462

P.020
Undervoltage Config

P.341 Max pwrloss time Restart time from undervolt- 0 0 25 sec 0.1 463
age

P.342 UV alarm storage Enabling of undervoltage [0] Disable 1 0 1 464

alarm storage [1] Enable

P.343 UV Trip mode Undervoltage tripping mode [0] Disabled Function disabled 0 0 2 491
[1] CoastThrough Kinetic energy recovering
[2] Emg stop Emergency stop mode

BU threshold Soglia intervento unità di [0] OFF BU-OFF (Vdc*P.344/100)

P.344 100 80 100 % 1 514
factor frenatura [1] ON BU-ON (Vdc*P.344/100)
Overvoltage Config

P.360 OV prevention Automatic PickUp enabling [0] Disable 0 0 1 465

after Overvoltage [1] Enable

P.380 Autoreset attmps Number of autoreset at- 0 0 255 466

tempts
Autoreset Config

P.381 Autoreset clear En. automatic reset of 10 0 250 min 1 467

autorestart attempts

P.382 Autoreset delay Autoreset time delay 5 0.1 50 sec 0.1 468

P.383 Autores flt rly Alarm relay contacts behav- [0] OFF 1 0 1 469
iour during autoreset [1] ON

P.400 Ext fault mode External fault detection 0] AlmAlw, - Drive in alarm 0 0 3 470
mode NoAR Alarm always active
Alarm autoreset is not pos-
sible.
External Fault Config

[1] AlmRun, - Drive in alarm

NoAR Alarm active only with run-
ning motor.
Alarm autoreset is not pos-
sible.
[2] AlmAlw, - Drive in alarm
ARes Alarm always active
Alarm autoreset is possible.
- Drive in alarm
[3] AlmRun, Alarm active only with run-
ARes ning motor
Alarm autoreset is possible.

78 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.410 Ph Loss detec en Phase Loss detection [0] Disable 0 0 1 492

Phase Loss

enabling [1] Enable

Frequency Threshold Voltage Reduction Config

P.420 Volt reduc mode Voltage reduction mode [0] Always Always 0 0 1 471
[1] Steady state Costant speed only

P.421 V reduction fact Output voltage reduction 100 10 100 % of 1 472

factor P.061

P.422 V fact mult src Source of voltage reduction [0] Null Null 0 0 2 473
factor multiplier [1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2

P.440 Frequency thr 1 Frequency 1 level detection 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 474

P.441 Freq prog 1 hyst Hysteresis amplitude re- 0.5 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 475
lated to P-420

P.442 Frequency thr 2 Frequency 2 level detection 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 476

P.443 Freq prog 2 hyst Hysteresis amplitude re- 0.5 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 477
lated to P-422

P.460 Const speed tol Tolerance at constant 0 0 25 Hz 0.1 478

Steady State Signalling

speed

P.461 Const speed dly Ramp end signalling delay 0.1 0 25 sec 0.1 479

P.480 Heatsnk temp lev Heatsink temperature sig- 70 10 110 °C 1 480

Heatsink Temp. Threshold

nalling level

P.481 Heatsnk temp hys Hysteresis band related to 5 0 10 °C 1 481

P.480

P.482 UHS Detect Mode Enable UHS alarm [0] Disable 0 0 1 513
[1] Enable

P.500 Switching freq Modulation frequency [0] 1kHz (*) P.502 (*) 482
[1] 2kHz
[2] 3kHz
[3] 4kHz
[4] 6kHz
[5] 8kHz
PWM Settings

[6] 10kHz
[7] 12kHz

P.501 Sw freq reduc en Enabling of switching fre- [0] Disable 0 0 1 483

quency reduction [1] Enable

P.502 Min switch freq Overmodulation level As for P.500 (*) 0 P.500 495

P.520 Overmod max lev Overmodulation level 0 0 100 % 1 484

P.540 Out Vlt auto adj Automatic adjustment of 1 0 1 485

output voltage

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 79

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

P.560 Deadtime cmp lev Dead times compensation (*) 0 255 486
Dead Time Comp.

limit

P.561 Deadtime cmp slp Dead times compensation (*) 0 255 487
slope

P.580 Startup display

Display Settings

IPA of the parameter to be 1 1 1999 488

displayed at power on

P.600 Speed dsply fact Speed conversion constant 1 0.01 99.99 489
for display

P.999 Param prot code Parameters protection code 0 Protection Stopped motor: possibility to 0 0 3 490
disabled write all parameters.
Running motor: some
parameters are writing pro-
tected (IPA in bold)

1 Protection All parameters are writing

enabled protected excepted:
- F000, F100..F116, multi-
speed function parameters
- P999 Param prot code
(*) = only - C000 Save parameter (*)
with motor - C020 Alarm clear
stopped - H500..H511, serial line com-
Protection

mands.

2 Protection All parameters are writing

enabled protected excepted:
- P999 Param prot code
(*) = only - C000 Save parameter (*)
with motor - C020 Alarm clear
stopped - H500..H511, serial line com-
mands.

3 Protection Stopped motor: possibility to

disabled write all parameters.
Running motor: some
parameters are writing pro-
tected (IPA in bold)
Possibility to execute Save
parameter also with running
motor.

80 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

APPLICATION
A.000 PID mode PID mode [0] Disable Null 0 0 6 1200
[1] Freq sum PID out in sum with ramp out
ref (Feed forward)
[2] Freq direct PID out not in sum with ramp
out ref (no Feed forward)
[3] Volt sum PID out in sum with voltage
ref from V/f curve (Feed
forward)
[4] Volt direct PID out not in sum with volt-
age ref from V/f curve (no
Feed forward)
[5] Stand alone PID function as generic con-
trol (only with drive in RUN)
[6] St-Al always PID function as generic con-
trol (any drive status)

A.001 PID ref sel PID reference selector [0] Null Null 0 0 7 1201
[1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2
[3] Null Null
[4] Frequency ref Frequency reference
[5] Ramp output Ramp output
PID Settings

[6] Digital ref Internal reference

[7] Encoder freq Encoder frequency

A.002 PID fbk sel PID feedback selector [0] Null Null 0 0 7 1202
[1] Analog inp 1 Analog input 1
[2] Analog inp 2 Analog input 2
[3] Null Null
[4] Encoder freq Encoder frequency
[5] Output curr Output peak current
[6] Output torque Output torque
[7] Output power Output power

A.003 PID digital ref PID digital reference 0 -100 100 % 0.1 1203

A.004 PID activat mode PID active in steady state [0] Always 0 0 1 1204
only [1] Steady state

A.005 PID-Encoder sync Enabling of encoder / PID [0] Disable 0 0 1 1205

synchronism [1] Enable

A.006 PID err sign rev Error sign reversal [0] Disable 0 0 1 1206
[1] Enable

A.007 PIDInteg init en Integral term initialization [0] Disable 0 0 1 1207

at start [1] Enable

A.008 PID update time PID updating time 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 1208

A.050 PID Prop gain 1 Proportional term gain 1 0 0 99.99 0.01 1209

A.051 PID Int tconst 1 Integral action time 1 99.99 0 99.99 0.01 1210
PID Gains

A.052 PID Deriv gain 1 Derivative action time 1 0 0 99.99 0.01 1211

A.053 PID Prop gain 2 Proportional term gain 2 0 0 99.99 0.01 1212

A.054 PID Int tconst 2 Integral action time 2 99.99 0 99.99 0.01 1213

A.055 PID Deriv gain 2 Derivative action time 2 0 0 99.99 0.01 1214

A.056 PID high limit PID output upper limit 100 -100 100 % 0.1 1215
PID Limits

A.057 PID low limit PID output lower limit -100 -100 100 % 0.1 1216

A.058 PID max pos err PID max. positive error 5 0.1 100 % 0.1 1217

A.059 PID min neg err PID max. negative error 5 0.1 100 % 0.1 1218

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 81

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

A.300 AND1 In 1 src Set up input block AND1 As for I.100 49 0 77 1355

A.301 AND1 In 2 src Set up input block AND1 As for I.100 49 0 77 1356

A.302 AND2 In 1 src Set up input block AND2 As for I.100 49 0 77 1357

A.303 AND2 In 2 src Set up input block AND2 As for I.100 49 0 77 1358

A.304 AND3 In 1 src Set up input block AND3 As for I.100 49 0 77 1359

A.305 AND3 In 2 src Set up input block AND3 As for I.100 49 0 77 1360
Programmable Logic

A.306 OR1 In 1 src Set up input block OR1 As for I.100 49 0 77 1361

A.307 OR1 In 2 src Set up input block OR1 As for I.100 49 0 77 1362

A.308 OR2 In 1 src Set up input block OR2 As for I.100 49 0 77 1363

A.309 OR2 In 2 src Set up input block OR2 As for I.100 49 0 77 1364

A.310 OR3 In 1 src Set up input block OR3 As for I.100 49 0 77 1365

A.311 OR3 In 2 src Set up input block OR3 As for I.100 49 0 77 1366

A.312 NOT1 In src Set up input block NOT1 As for I.100 49 0 77 1367

A.313 NOT2 In src Set up input block NOT2 As for I.100 49 0 77 1368

A.314 NOT3 In src Set up input block NOT3 As for I.100 49 0 77 1369

A.315 NOT4 In src Set up input block NOT4 As for I.100 49 0 77 1370

82 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Variation
Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Unit
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Name Description Description
Selection Name

COMMAND
C.000 Save parameters Save parameters command oFF No action. oFF oFF do 800
do Save parameters command.

C.001 Recall param Recall last set of saved oFF No action. oFF oFF do 801
parameters do Recall last set of saved
Basic

parameters.

C.002 Load default Recall of the factory param- oFF No action. oFF oFF do 802
eters. do Load default parameters.

C.020 Alarm clear Reset of the the Alarm List oFF No action. oFF oFF do 803
Alarm Reset

register do Clear alarm register com-

mand.

C.040 Reserved
External Key

C.041 Reserved

C.070 Reserved
LCD keypad

C.071 Reserved

C.100 Measure stator R Motor Autotune command oFF No action. oFF oFF do 806
do Autotune command.
Tuning

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 83

 Parameter Pick List

Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Description Description
Selection Name
HIDDEN
This menu is not available on the keypad. The setting and the reading of the parameters here contained, can be performed exclusively via serial
line or through SBI card.

H.000 Virtual digital command 0 0 255 1000

H.001 Exp virtual digital command 0 0 255 1001

H.010 Virtual digital state 0 0 255 1002

Virtual I/Os Commands

H.011 Exp Virtual digital state 0 0 255 1003

H.020 Virtual An Output 1 0 -32768 32767 1004

H.021 Virtual An Output 2 0 -32768 32767 1005

H.022 Exp Virtual An Output 1 0 -32768 32767 1006

H.025 Virtual analog input 1 0 -32768 32767 1082

H.026 Virtual analog input 2 0 -32768 32767 1083

H.027 Reserved

H.030 Profidrive Control word (see Profibus instruction 0 0 65535 1007

manual)
Profidrive Profile

H.031 Profidrive Status word (see Profibus instruction 0 0 65535 1008

manual)

H.032 Profidrive reference (see Profibus instruction 0 -16384 16383 1040

manual)

H.033 Profidrive actual reference (see Profibus in- 0 -16384 16383 1041
struction manual)
Drive Status

H.034 Drive status 0 0 65535 1042

H.040 Progress 0 0 100 1009

H.050 Drive output frequency at 32bit (LSW) (d.000) 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1010

H.052 Drive reference frequency at 32bit (LSW) 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1012

Parameters Reading Extension

(d.001)

H.054 Output speed (d.000)*(P.600) at 32bit (LSW) 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1014

(d.007)

H.056 Speed Ref (d.001)*(P.600) at 32bit (LSW) 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1016

(d.008)

H.058 Encoder freq at 32bit (LSW) (d.301) 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1018

H.060 Encoder speed (d.000)*(P.600) at 32bit (LSW) 0 -2 31

2 31
-1 1044
(d.302)

H.062 Bitwise reading of active alarms (32 bits). Each 0 0 2 32 -1 1060

bit is associated to a specific alarm, according
to table 9.3.1.

H.100 Remote Digital Inputs (0..15) 0 0 65535 1021

H.101 Remote Digital Inputs (16..31) 0 0 65535 1022

Remote I/Os Control

H.110 Remote Digital Outputs (0..15) 0 0 65535 1023

H.111 Remote Digital Outputs (16..31) 0 0 65535 1024

H.120 Remote Analog input 1 0 -32768 32767 1025

H.121 Remote Analog input 2 0 -32768 32767 1026

H.130 Remote Analog output 1 0 -32768 32767 1027

H.131 Remote Analog output 2 0 -32768 32767 1028

84 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Parameter Pick List

Default
S.Menu

(Alias)
Max
Min

Ipa
[Cod.]
Code Description Description
Selection Name
H.500 Hardware reset 0 0 1 1029

H.501 Alarm reset 0 0 1 1030

H.502 Coast to stop 0 0 1 1031

Serial Link Commands

H.503 Stop with ramp 0 0 1 1032

H.504 Clockwise Start 0 0 1 1033

H.505 Anti-clockwise Start 0 0 1 1034

H.506 Clockwise Jog 0 0 1 1035

H.507 Anti-clockwise Jog 0 0 1 1036

H.508 Clockwise Flying restart 0 0 1 1037

H.509 Anti-clockwise Flying restart 0 0 1 1038

H.510 DC Brake 0 0 1 1039

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 85

7.2 Menu d - DISPLAY

Basic

d.000 Output frequency

Drive output frequency [Hz].

d.001 Frequency ref (Frequency reference)

Drive frequency reference [Hz] .

d.002 Output current

Drive output current (rms) [A].

d.003 Output voltage

Drive output voltage (rms) [V].

d.004 DC link voltage

Drive DC Bus voltage (DC) [V].

d.005 Power factor

Drive output power factor.

d.006 Power [kW]

Drive output active power

d.007 Output speed

Calculated speed (d.000 * P.600).

d.008 Speed ref (Speed reference)

Calculated speed reference (d.001 * P.600).

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.000 Output frequency Hz 0.01 001
d.001 Frequency ref Hz 0.01 002
d.002 Output current A 0,1 003
d.003 Output voltage V 1 004
d.004 DC link voltage V 1 005
d.005 Power factor 0.01 006
d.006 Power [kW] kW 0.1 007
d.007 Output speed 0.01 / 1 008
d.008 Speed ref 0.01 / 1 009

86 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Overload

d.050 Heatsink temp (Heatsink temperature)

Drive heatsink temperature [°C].

d.051 Drive OL (Drive overload level)

The drive overload control function is based on a I2t, that allows for the IEC 146 class 2 service.
The I2t integrator level can be read in d.051, and is calculated as follows:

d.051[%] = KOL x ò(I2out - I2CONT)

Where:
Iout Inverter output current;
ICONT Inverted rated output current level, calculated taking into accounts all applicable deratings (see
Table 3.3.2.1).
KOL I2t integration constant, calculated in order to obtain d.0.51 = 100%, after operating for 60s with
Iout = 1.50 x ICONT.

Overload time and restore time for different current levels are reported in the following figures:

Sec
700
Sec

650
650
600
600
550
550
500
500
450
450
400 400
350 350
300 300
250 250
200 200
150 150
100 100
50 50
0 0
100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% x Icont % x Icont
Figure 7.2.1: Overload Time Figure 7.2.2: Pause Time

The I2t logic acts on the limits of the inverter output current. When the overload level d.051 reaches 100%, the
output current limit is reduced to 100% of inverter rated, and stays there until the overload integrator is com-
pletely discharged.

Note ! If active current limiters (see P.200, P.202) and current clamp (see P.180) are all disabled, the drive is not able to
protect himself against excessive output current and will trip for overload as soon as the integrator reaches 100%.

Status of the overload function can be monitored on any digital output of the drive, programmed as follows
(see Chap. 7.4, section Digital Inputs Regulation card):

[46] Drv OL status Digital output is set when the integrator d.051 reaches 100%, and is reset when the
integrator is completely discharged.
[47] Drv OL warn Digital output is set when the integrator d.051 is equal or above 90%, and is reset
otherwise.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 87

d.052 Motor OL (Motor overload)
Motor overload level (100% = alarm threshold).

d.053 Brake res OL (Brake resistror overload)

Braking resistor overload level (100%=alarm thr)

d.054 Reserved
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.050 Heatsink temp °C 1 010
d.051 Drive OL % 0.1 011
d.052 Motor OL % 0.1 012
d.053 Brake res OL % 0.1 013
d.054 Reserved

Inputs/Outputs

d.100 Dig inp status (Digital inputs status)

Status of the digital inputs acquired by the drive. Each of the inputs can come either from regulation card ter-
minal , from optional field bus card or from serial line. See figure 7.4.8 .
According to the type of keypad in use, the status of digital inputs will be displayed as follows:

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

. I. . i.
AI Op

Digital input 5 = ON Digital input 1 = ON

Digital input 4 = OFF Digital input 2 = OFF
Digital input 3 = OFF

d.101 Term inp status (Terminal inputs status)

Status of the digital inputs terminal of the drive regulation card.
See example d.100.

d.102 Vir dig inp stat (Virtual digital inputs status)

Status of the virtual digital inputs received by serial link or field bus card, by writing parameter H.000.
See example d.100.

88 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

d.120 Exp dig inp stat (Expansion card digital inputs status)
Status of the expansion digital inputs acquired by the drive. Each of the inputs can come either from regulation
card terminal , from optional field bus card or from serial line. See figure 7.4.8.

According to the type of keypad in use, the status of expansion digital inputs will be displayed as follows:

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

AI Op
I.
Digital output 2 = ON Digital output 1 = OFF

d.121 Exp term inp (Expansion card terminal inputs status)

Status of the expansion digital inputs terminal of the drive expansion card.
See example d.120

d.122 Vir exp dig inp (Expansion card virtual digital inputs status)
Status of the expansion virtual digital inputs received by drive serial link or field bus card, by writing parameter
H.001.
See example d.120

d.150 Dig out status (Digital outputs status)

Status of the digital outputs terminals of the regulation card. Each output can be set by the associated drive
function (see I.100, ..., I.103) or by writing the parameter H.010 (see figure 7.4.9).
According to the type of keypad in use, the status of digital outputs will be displayed as follows:

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

AI Op
I.
Digital output 2 = ON Digital output 1 = OFF

d.151 Drv dig out sta (Terminal digital outputs status)

Status of the digital outputs set by the drive function programmed by parameters I.100 through I.103.
See example d.150

d.152 Vir dig out sta (Virtual digital outputs status)

Status of the virtual digital outputs set via serial link or field bus card, by writing parameter H.010.
See example d.150.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 89

d.170 Exp dig out sta (Expansion card digital outputs status)
Status of the expansion digital outputs terminals of the regulation card. Each output can be set by the associ-
ated drive function (see I.150, ..., I.152) or by writing the parameter H.010 (see figure 7.4.9).
According to the type of keypad in use, the status of expansion digital outputs will be displayed as follows:

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

AI Op
I.
Digital output 2 = ON Digital output 1 = OFF

d.171 Exp DrvDigOutSta (Expansion card terminal outputs status)

Status of the expansion digital outputs set by the drive function programmed by parameters I.150 through I.152.
See example d.170.

d.172 Exp VirDigOutSta (Expansion card virtual digital outputs status)

Status of the expansion virtual digital outputs set via serial link or field bus card, by writing parameter H.011.
See example d.170.

d.200 An in 1 cnf mon (Analog input 1 configuration monitor)

Monitor of the function associated to the Analog input 1:
[0] Null funct No function programmed
[1] Freq ref 1 Frequency reference 1 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.050)
[2] Freq ref 2 Frequency reference 2 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.051)
[3] Boost lev fac Level of voltage boost chapter PARAMETERS, section Boost (P.121)
[4] OT level fact Level of over torque chapter PARAMETERS, section OT level factor src (P.242)
[5] V red lev fac Output voltage reduction level chapter PARAMETERS, section Voltage Red Config P.422)
[6] DCB level fac DC braking current level chapter PARAMETERS, section DC brake Config (P.301)
[7] Ramp ext fact Ramp extension factor chapter PARAMETERS, section Ramp Config (F.260)
[8] Freq ref fact Multiplier factor for frequency reference chapter FREQ & RAMP, section F.080
[9] SpdPI LimFac Level of speed PI limit chapter PARAMETERS, section Closed Loop Speed Control
[10] Mlt frq ch 1 Multi frequency reference 1 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.060)
[11] Mlt frq ch 2 Multi frequency reference 2 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.061)

d.201 An in 1 monitor (Analog input 1 monitor)

Analog input 1 - block output (%). See Fig. 7.4.1 .

d.202 An in 1 term mon (Analog input 1 terminals monitor)

Analog input 1 block input (%). See Fig. 7.4.1 .
It monitors the signal at the An In 1 regulation card terminals, according to the value of An inp 1 Type (I.200)
parameter:
• selection: [0] +/- 10V: 0V = 0%, -10V = -100%, +10V = +100%
• selection: [1] 0-10V/0-20mA: 0V = 0%, +10V = 100%
0mA = 0%, 20mA = 100%
• selection: [2] 4-20mA 4mA = 0%, 20mA = 100%

d.210 An in 2 cnf mon (Analog input 2 configuration monitor)

Monitor of the function associated to Analog Input 2. See param. d.200.

90 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

d.211 An in 2 monitor (Analog input 2 monitor)
Analog input 2 - block output (%). See figure 7.4.1.

d.212 An in 2 term mon (Analog input 2 terminals monitor)

Analog input 2 - block input (%). See Fig. 7.4.1.
It monitors the signal at the An In 2 regulation card terminals, according to the value of An inp 2 Type (I.210) parameter:
• selection: [0] +/- 10V: 0V = 0%, -10V = -100%, +10V = +100%
• selection: [1] 0-10V/0-20mA: 0V = 0%, +10V = 100%
0mA = 0%, 20mA = 100%
• selection: [2] 4-20mA 4mA = 0%, 20mA = 100%

d.220 Reserved

d.221 Reserved

d.221 Reserved

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.100 Dig inp status 014
d.101 Term inp status 015
d.102 Vir dig inp stat 016
d.120 Exp dig inp stat 017
d.121 Exp term inp 018
d.122 Vir exp dig inp 019
d.150 Dig out status 020
d.151 Drv dig out sta 021
d.152 Vir dig out stat 022
d.170 Exp dig out stat 023
d.171 Exp DrvDigOutSta 024
d.172 Exp VirDigOutSta 025
d.200 An in 1 cnf mon 026
d.201 An in 1 monitor % 027
d.202 An in 1 term mon % 028
d.210 An in 2 cnf mon 029
d.211 An in 2 monitor % 030
d.212 An in 2 term mon % 031
d.220 Reserved
d.221 Reserved
d.222 Reserved

Encoder

d.300 EncPulses/Sample (Encoder Pulses / Sample)

Number of encoder pulses, recorded in the time interval defined by parameter I.504.

d.301 Encoder freq (Encoder frequency)

Frequency detected by the encoder (Motor electrical frequency) [Hz]

d.302 Encoder speed

Speed detected by the encoder (d.000 * P.600).
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.300 EncPulses/Sample 0.001 035
d.301 Encoder freq Hz 0.01 036
d.302 Encoder speed 0.01 / 1 037

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 91

Option

d.350 Option 1 state

It monitors the status of the optional card 1.

d.351 Option 2 state

It monitors the status of the optional card 2.

d.353 SBI State

Status of the communication between SBI optional card (Slave) and Master.

d.354 SBI Baudrate

Baudrate of the communication between SBI and Master
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.350 Option 1 state 038
0...3 Reserved
4 Data exchange
..
32 Regulation card error (card type)
33 Regulation card error (checksum)
34 Regulation card error (card incompatible)
..
64 Expansion error
65 .. 66 Reserved
d.351 Option 2 state As per d.350 039
d.353 SBI State 0 Wait parametrization 059
1 Wait configuration
2 Data exchange
3 Error
d.354 SBI Baude rate 0 12 Mbit / s 060
1 6 Mbit / s
2 3 Mbit / s
3 1.5 Mbit / s
4 500 Mbit / s
5 187.5 kbit / s
6 93.75 kbit / s
7 45.45 kbit / s
8 19.2 kbit / s
15 unknowk

Pid

d.400 PID reference

PID reference signal (%), see figure 7.7.1.

d.401 PID feedback

PID feedback signal (%), see figure 7.7.1.

d.402 PID error

PID error signal (%), see figure 7.7.1.

d.403 PID integr comp (PID integral component)

PID integral component (%), see figure 7.7.1.

92 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

d.404 PID output
PID output signal (%), see figure 7.7.1.

Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.400 PID reference % 0.1 041
d.401 PID feedback % 0.1 042
d.402 PID error % 0.1 043
d.403 PID integr comp % 0.1 044
d.404 PID output % 0.1 045

Alarm list

d.800 1st alarm-latest

Last alarm stored in the drive alarm list (see paragraph 9.3).

d.801 2nd alarm

Second to last alarm stored in the drive alarm list (see paragraph 9.3).

d.802 3rd alarm

Third to last alarm stored in the drive alarm list (see paragraph 9.3).

d.803 4th alarm

Fourth to last alarm stored in the drive alarm list (see paragraph 9.3).
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.800 1st alarm-latest 046
d.801 2nd alarm 047
d.802 3rd alarm 048
d.803 4th alarm 049

Drive Identification

d.950 Drive rated curr (Drive rated current)

Drive rated current (dependent on the drive size, main voltage and programmed switching frequency): IEC146
Class 2 (Overload 150%).

d.951 SW version (1/2) (Software version - part 1)

Display example: 03.04
03 = index of software identification
04 = index of software revision (new functions or parameters)

d.952 SW version (2/2) (Software version - part 2)

Display example: 00.00
00 = index of revision (fixing bugs)
00 = index of identification (special version)

Note ! to be considered as reference for Gefran personell.

d.953 Reserved

d.954 Reserved

d.955 Reserved

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 93

d.956 Reserved

d.957 Drive size

Drive size code.

d.958 Drive cfg type

Drive configuration type: 0 = 400Vac/50Hz, 1 = 460 Vac / 60Hz.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.950 Drive rated curr 0.1 050
d.951 SW version (1/2) 0.01 051
d.952 SW version (2/2) 0.01 052
d.953 Reserved
d.954 Reserved
d.955 Reserved
d.956 Reserved
d.957 Drive size 0 0.37kW (400V) - 0.5Hp (480V)
1 0.55kW (400V) - 0.75Hp (480V)
2 0.75kW (400V) - 1Hp (480V)
4 1.5kW (400V) - 2Hp (480V)
5 2.2kW (400V) - 3Hp (480V)
6 3kW (400V) - 4Hp (480V)
7 4kW (400V) - 5Hp (480V)
8 5.5kW (400V) - 7.5Hp (480V)
9 7.5kW (400V) - 10Hp (480V)
10 11kW (400V) - 15Hp (480V)
11 15kW (400V) - 20Hp (480V)
12 18.5kW (400V) - 25Hp (480V)
13 22kW (400V) - 30Hp (480V)
d.958 Drive cfg type 0 400Vac 061
1 460 Vac

Utility

d.999 Display Test

Drive display test. On the 7-seg display, all the segments should be on.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
d.999 Display Test Drive display test 099

94 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

7.3 Menu S - START-UP

Note ! The START UP menu is a set of parameters and functions that allows a quick start of the motor.These parameters are
actually links to a selection of parameters present in other menus. Therefore, avy modification on a parameter in the
START-UP menu is also reflected on the linked parameter found on a different menu, and vice-versa.

Power Supply

S.000 Mains voltage (linked to P.020)

Rated value of the AC input mains line to line voltage [V].
The undervoltage trip function is based on this value (see chapter PARAMETERS, section Undervoltage con-
figuration).

S.001 Mains frequency (linked to P.021)

Rated value of the AC input mains frequency [Hz].
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.000 Mains voltage 380, 400, 420, 440, 460, 480 (****) 380 480 V 404
S.001 Mains frequency 50 (****) 50 60 Hz 405
60
(****) parameter value dependent on drive type.

V/F Characteristic

S.100 Max out voltage (Maximum output voltage) (linked to P.061)

Maximum value of the voltage applied to the motor (normally set as the nameplate, see figure 7.3.2).

S.101 Base frequency (linked to P.062)

Rated frequency of the motor (given on the nameplate, see figure 7.3.2)
It is the frequency at which the inverter output voltage reaches the Max out voltage (S.100).

V V

S.100 S.100

F S.201 F
(S.101) S.101
(n) (n)
(S.201)
Figure 7.3.1: Characteristic

Note ! For further setting of the V/F characteristic, see the chapter PARAMETERS, section V/F Curve.

Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.100 Max out voltage (**) 50 (**) V 1 413
S.101 Base frequency (**) 25 500 Hz 0.1 414
(**) parameter value dependent on drive nominal mains voltage and mains frequency.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 95

Motor Data

S.150 Motor rated curr (Motor rated current) (linked to P.040)

Rated current of the motor at rated kilowatt/horsepower and voltage (given on the nameplate, see figure7.3.2).

In case of control with multiple motors, enter a value equal to the sum of the rated currents of all the motors.
Do not perform any self tune.

S.151 Motor pole pairs (linked to P.041)

Pole pairs of the motor.
Starting from nameplate data, the number of pole pairs is calculated as follows:
60 [s] x f [Hz]
P= ____________
nN [rpm]

where: p = motor pole pairs

f = rated frequency of the motor (S.101)
nN = rated speed of the motor (see figure 7.3.2)
S.101 (P.062) S.100 (P.061) S.150 (P.040) S.101 (P.062) S.100 (P.061) S.150 (P.040)

Motor & Co. Motor & Co.

Type: ABCDE IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530 Type: ABCDE IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530
Motor: 3 phase 50 Hz Nr
. 12345-91 Motor: 3 phase 60 Hz Nr
. 12345-91
Rated voltage 400 V I nom 6.7 A Rated voltage 460 V I nom 2A
Rated power 3 kW Power factor 0.8 Rated power 2 Hp Power factor 0.83
Rated speed (nN) 1420 rpm Rated speed (nN) 1750 rpm Efficiency 86.5

IP54 Iso Kl F S1 IP54 Iso Kl F S1

Made in .............. Made in ..............

S.152 (P.042) S.152 (P.042)

Figure 7.3.2: Motor Nameplate (Example: kW rating for 400V motor and Hp rating for 460V motor)

Example: calculation of the pole pairs of a motor having data shown in the above 400V label.

60 [s] x f [Hz] 60 [s] x 50 [Hz]

p [polepairs] = ___________ = ______________
nN [rpm] 1420 [rpm]

the value to be set in the parameter S.152 is “2”

S.152 Motor power factor (linked to P.042)

Motor power factor in rated condition (given on the nameplate, see figure 7.3.2).

S.153 Motor stator R (Motor stator Resistance) (linked to P.043)

Ohmic value of the stator resistance of the motor.
This value will be automatically updated, by performing the self tune procedure.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.150 Motor rated curr (*) (*) (*) A 0.1 406
S.151 Motor pole pairs (*) 1 60 407
S.152 Motor power fact (*) 0.01 1 0.01 408
S.153 Motor stator R (*) 0 99.99 ohm 0.01 409
(*) parameter value dependent on drive size.

96 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Commands & Referencies

S.200 Cmd source sel (Command source selection) (linked to P.000)

It defines the source of the main commands (START and STOP) and auxiliary commands (REVERSE, EN-
ABLE, DC-BRAKE, etc.).

S.200 = 0 START & STOP via keypad, auxliliary commands via digital input terminals.
In this configuration, START and STOP commands are given through the keypad buttons.
START botton STOP botton

In order to start the motor, the Digital Input 1 (terminal 8), factory programmed as RUN, must be asserted.
If the Digital input programmed as RUN is not active, the motor will STOP with the deceleration ramp time in
use.
All auxliliary commands are given via digital input terminals.

S.200 = 1
START & STOP and auxliliary commands via digital input terminals.
In this configuration, all drive commands are given through the digital input terminals.
By default, The START command i given by asserting the Digital Input 1 (terminal 8), factory
set as RUN, while the STOP command is given by de-asserting the same Digital Input.
It is possible to use several other configurations for giving START, STOP and REV commands
from digital input terminals. See chapter PARAMETERS, section Commads, for details.

Note ! At power on, the motor will not start until a positive transition is seen on the Digital Input programmed as RUN (edge
sensitive). See description of parameter P.003 for further details.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

S.200 = 2 START & STOP and auxliliary commands via terminals or virtual digital inputs.
In this configuration, any drive command may come either from digital input terminals or from
virtual digital inputs. Virtual digital inputs are used to give commands from serial line or field-
bus. Refer to chapter INTERFACE, section Enabling Virtual I/O, for explanation about the
use of virtual commands.

Note ! At power on, the motor will not start until a positive transition is seen on the Digital Input programmed as RUN (edge
sensitive). See description of parameter P.003 for further details.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

S.200 = 3 START & STOP and auxiliary commands via serial line.
All drive commands are given through via serial line or filedbus, by using dedicated com-
mands. Refer to chapter HIDDEN, section Commands, for a complete description of the
available commands.

Note ! No interlock from digital input terminals is provided, when using commands from serial line.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

P.200 = 4 START & STOP and auxiliary commands via Profidrive control word
In this configuration, all commands are given through the Profidrive standard control word.
The optional ProfiBus SBI card is needed.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 97

 Note ! No interlock from digital input terminals is provided, when using commands from Profidrive.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

S.201 Max ref freq (Maximum reference frequency) (linked to F.020)

It is the maximum allowed value for the frequency reference (absolute value), which ever the source.
(See figure 7.5.1).

S.202 Ref 1 Channel (Reference 1 channel) (linked to F.050)

It defines the source of the frequency reference 1. By default, the frequency reference is supplied through the
parameter S.203.
For further details, refer to chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference Source.

S.203 Frequency ref 0 (Frequency reference 0) (linked to F.100)

It is the effective frequency reference when S.202 = [3] FreqRefx (default settings).
It is possible to set either positive or negative values that do not exceed the setting of S.201.
The polarity will determine the direction of rotation of the motor.
Regardless of the polarity, the REV command will reverse the direction of rotation.

The maximum settable value is correlated to Max ref freq (S.201).

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.200 Cmd source sel [0] Keypad 0 0 4 400
[1] Terminals
[2] Virtual
[3] Serial
[4] Control word
S.201 Max ref freq (****) 25 500 Hz 0.1 305
S.202 Ref 1 channel [0] Null 3 0 8 307
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)
[3] Freq ref x (setting through S.203 or F.100)
[4] Multispeed (setting through F.100…F.116)
[5] Motorpotent (setting through F.000…F013)
[6] Null
[7] Encoder (setting through I.500…I.505)
[8] Profidrive Reference by Profibus
S.203 Frequency ref 0 0 -S.201 S.201 311
(****) parameter value dependent on drive type.

S.300 Acc time 1 (Acceleration time 1) (linked to F.201)

The drive is equipped with a ramp generator, in order to avoid abrupt changes in output frequency when the
frequency reference is changed or when the drive is started.
Acceleration time S.300 represents the time needed to ramp up the frequency from zero to the maximum
value defined by “S.201-Max ref freq” parameter.

S.301 Dec time 1 (Deceleration time 1) (linked to F.202)

The drive is equipped with a ramp generator, in order to avoid abrupt changes in output frequency when the
frequency reference is changed or when the drive is started.
Deceleration time S.301 represents the time needed to ramp down the frequency from the maximum value
defined by “S.201-Max ref freq” parameter to zero.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.300 Acc time 1 5 1 999.9 sec 0.1 (***) 329
S.301 Dec time 1 5 1 999.9 sec 0.1 (***) 330

98 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Functions

S.400 Manual boost [%] (linked to P.120)

The resistive impedance of the stator windings causes a voltage drop within the motor, which results in a
reduction of torque in the lower speed range.
Compensation can be made for this effect by boosting the output voltage.

S.100

S.400

F
P.064 S.101 S.201 (n)
Figure 7.3.3: Manual Boost Voltage

The setting is in percentage of the Max out voltage (S.100).

Nota ! When custom V/f shape is selected (P.060 = 0):

P.064 parameter represents the return point of the output voltage, on the linear characteristic of V/f characteristic (see
figure 7.3.3).

S.401 Auto boost en (Automatic boost enabling) (linked to P.122)

By enabling the automatic boost calculation, the drive will optimize the V/f profile in order to obtain constant
flux level inside the motor over the whole operating speed range. This will improve torque availability at low
speed, increasing the starting torque of the drive. The drive uses the stator resistance of the motor in use (ei-
ther set in parameter S.153 or measured by the autotuning procedure S.900) and the current measured at the
inverter output terminals to calculate the necessary voltage boost for the V/f profile.

Note ! Performance achievable with the automatic voltage boost depends on motor parameters. Therefore, in order to obtain
best performance, motor nameplate data should be set correctly and the stator resistance value should be measured
by running the autotuning procedure.

Note ! Automatic boost calculation must be disabled when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter.

In some applications, it can be necessary to overflux the machine in order to obtain even more starting torque.
In those cases, the manual boost (set by S.400) can be used in conjunction to the automatic boost. The result-
ing voltage boost will be the sum of the two contributions.

S.450 Slip compensat (Slip compensation) (linked to P.100)

hen an induction motor is loaded, the mechanical speed of the shaft varies due to the electrical slip between
stator and rotor quantities which is responsible for the generation of torque.
In order to keep the shaft speed constant, the slip compensation function of the drive can be used.
The compensation is performed by varying the inverter output frequency of an amount that is calculated from
inverter output current and motor parameters. therefore, in oder to obtain best results, motor nameplate data
has to be properly set, and the correct value of the stator resistance (S.153) has to be either edited or meas-
ured by self-tuning (S.901). Tuning of the slip compensation function is performed by editing the parameter
S.450. If S.450 = 0.0 (default), the slip compensation assumes the nominal value, calculated from nameplate
data.

Note ! When using the slip compensation, it is advised to set the inverter maximum output frequency limit (P.080) to a value
higher than 100% (default). If it is not done, slip compensation will not take place when the frequency reference ap-

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 99

 proaches its limit (defined by S.201), since the inverter output frequency will be clamped (See also chapter PARAM-
ETER, section Output Frequency Limit).

Note ! The Slip compensation must be disabled when a multiple motor connection is being used.

S.451 Slip comp filter (Slip compensation filter) (linked to P.101)

It is the response time (in seconds) of the slip compensation function.
The lower the setting of this parameter, the quicker will be the response od slip compensation. However, set-
ting too low may give rise to undesired oscillations of the speed after sudden load variations.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.400 Manual boost [%] 1.0 0.0 25.0 % of S.100 0.1 421
S.401 Auto boost en [0] Disable 0 0 1 423
[1] Enable
S.450 Slip compensat 0 250 10 % of S.101 1 419
S.451 Slip comp filter 0.1 0 10 sec 0.1 420

Utility

S.900 Measure stator R (Measurement of stator resistance)

It measures the stator resistance of the motor connected.
A correct value of the motor parameters will optimize drive performance in terms of torque availability and
speed control, when using Automatic boost (P.401) and Slip compensation (P.450).

Do not perform any tune when a multiple motor connection is being used.

S.901 Save parameters

Every modification of parameter value has immediate effect on drive operation, but is not automatically stored
in permanent memory
The Save parameter command is used to store the set of parameters currently in use in permanent memory.
The drive signals the presence of unsaved parameters by blinking the dedicated yellow LED (Prg) on the
keypad.
When the drive is turned off, all unsaved modifications are lost.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
S.900 Measure stator R oFF oFF oFF do 806
S.901 Save parameters do oFF oFF do 800

Below, the sequence for executing the Save parameters command is shown. The sequence is also valid for
Measure stator R (S.900) command.

Enter
ff
E
Enter

100 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

7.4 Menu I - INTERFACE

Digital Inputs Regulation Card

I.000 Dig input 1 cfg (Digital input 1 configuration)

I.001 Dig input 2 cfg (Digital input 2 configuration)

I.002 Dig input 3 cfg (Digital input 3 configuration)

I.003 Dig input 4 cfg (Digital input 4 configuration)

I.004 Dig input 5 cfg (Digital input 5 configuration)

I.005 Reserved

I.006 Reserved

I.007 Reserved
The regulation card provides as standard 5 opto-coupled digital inputs. A PNP or NPN logic level, can be
selected according to figure 5.4.2/3. Every input is programmable with a specific code and function, as shown
in the list below.

DIGITAL INPUTS SELECTION LIST:

Code LCD display Description

0 None Not active

1 Run RUN command for the motor START
2 Reverse Speed REVERSE command. See paragraph 7.6, P.001.
3 Ext Fault NO External fault with NO (Normal Open) contact. See paragraph 7.6, P.400.
4 Ext Fault NC External fault with NC (Norm. Closed) contact. See paragraph 7.6, P.400.
5 Alarm reset Alarm reset command. See paragraph 9.2 .
6 Jog JOG frequency reference enabling. See paragraph 7.5, F.116.
7 Freq sel 1 Binary selection for Multispeed. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
8 Freq sel 2 Binary selection for Multispeed. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
9 Freq sel 3 Binary selection for Multispeed. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
10 Freq sel 4 Binary selection for Multispeed. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
11 Ramp sel 1 Binary selection for Multiramp. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
12 Ramp sel 2 Binary selection for Multiramp. See paragraph 7.5, F.100 ... F.115.
13 Enable NO Drive Enable with NO (Normal Open) contact. See paragraph 7.6, P.004.
14 Enable NC Drive Enable with NC (Norm. Closed) contact. See paragraph 7.6, P.004.
15 DCBrake en Enabling of the DC braking function. See paragraph 7.6, DC Brake Configu-
ration section.
16 DCBrake Command for execution of DC braking. See paragraph 7.6, DC Brake Con-
figuration section.
17 Autocapture Command for execution of Autocapture. See paragraph 7.6, Autocapture
function section.
18 Ramp enable Enabling / Disabling of the Ramp block. See paragraph 7.5 .
19 Zero ref Force the frequency reference to zero. See paragraph 7.5 .
20 PID enable Enabling of the PID regulation. See paragraph 7.7, PID setting section.
21 PID freeze PID freeze command. See paragraph 7.7, PID setting section.
22 PID gain sel Selection of the set of PID gains. See paragraph 7.7, PID setting section.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 101

 23 Motorpot Up Motorpotentiometer reference increasing command. See paragraph 7.5, Mo-
torpotentiometer section.
24 Motorpot Dn Motorpotentiometer reference decreasing command. See paragraph 7.5,
Motorpotentiometer section.
25 Reset Motorp Reset of Motorpotentiometer reference. See paragraph 7.5, Motorpotentiom-
eter section.
26 Fast stop Emergency stop command (with ramp time F.206). See paragraph 7.5 .
27 Zero freq Output frequency forced to zero, following the ramp programmed for Fast
stop (F.206). The inverter will remain enabled even after the frequency has
reached the zero value. See paragraph 7.5 .
28 Stop(3wires) STOP (NC) function. Active when P.001 = [2] 3 Wires. See paragraph 7.6,
P.001.
29 Local/Remote START/STOP commands from keypad (Local) or from the source specified
by P.000 (Remote). See paragraph 7.6, P.000.
30 En lim Steady Activate the current regulator to stationary state. See paragraph 7.6, P.202.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.000 Dig input 1 cfg See Digital inputs selection list 1 0 30 100
I.001 Dig input 2 cfg As for I.000 2 0 30 101
I.002 Dig input 3 cfg As for I.000 3 0 30 102
I.003 Dig input 4 cfg As for I.000 6 0 30 103
I.004 Dig input 5 cfg As for I.000 5 0 30 104
I.005 Reserved
I.006 Reserved
I.007 Reserved

Factory settings for digital inputs are as follows:

Dig input 1 cfg (Terminal 22) = 1 Run

Dig input 2 cfg (Terminal 23) = 2 Reverse
Dig input 3 cfg (Terminal 24) = 3 Ext fault NO
Dig input 4 cfg (Terminal 25) = 6 JOG
Dig input 5 cfg (Terminal 7) = 5 Alarm reset

Digital Inputs Expansion Card

I.050 Exp dig in 1 cfg (Expansion digital input 1 configuration)

See list associated to I.000, ..., I.007.

I.051 Exp dig in 2 cfg (Expansion digital input 2 configuration)

See list associated to I.000, ..., I.007.

I.052 Exp dig in 3 cfg (Expansion digital input 3 configuration)

See list associated to I.000, ..., I.007.

I.053 Exp dig in 4 cfg (Expansion digital input 4 configuration)

See list associated to I.000, ..., I.007.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.050 Exp dig in 1 cfg As for I.000 0 0 30 108
I.051 Exp dig in 2 cfg As for I.000 0 0 30 109
I.052 Exp dig in 3 cfg As for I.000 0 0 30 110
I.053 Exp dig in 4 cfg As for I.000 0 0 30 111

102 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Programmable Logic Output

I.070 AND 1 out cfg (AND 1 block output configuration)

I.071 AND 2 out cfg (AND 2 block output configuration)

I.072 AND 3 out cfg (AND 3 block output configuration)

I.073 OR 1 out cfg (OR1 block output configuration)

I.074 OR 2 out cfg (OR 2 block output configuration)

I.075 OR 3 out cfg (OR 3 block output configuration)

I.076 NOT 1 out cfg (NOT 1 block output configuration)

I.077 NOT 2 out cfg (NOT 2 block output configuration)

I.078 NOT 3 out cfg (NOT 3 block output configuration)

I.079 NOT 4 out cfg (NOT 4 block output configuration)

See the list of selections associated to standard digital inputs (I.000 ... I.007).
For more information see chapter 7.7 (A.300 ... A.315)
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.070 AND 1 out cfg 0 0 30 186
I.071 AND 2 out cfg 0 0 30 187
I.072 AND 3 out cfg 0 0 30 188
I.073 OR 1 out cfg 0 0 30 189
I.074 OR 2 out cfg 0 0 30 190
I.075 OR 3 out cfg 0 0 30 191
I.076 NOT 1 out cfg 0 0 30 192
I.077 NOT 2 out cfg 0 0 30 193
I.078 NOT 3 out cfg 0 0 30 194
I.079 NOT 4 out cfg 0 0 30 195

Digital Ouputs Regulation Card

I.100 Dig output 1 cfg (Digital output 1 configuration)

I.101 Dig output 2 cfg (Digital output 2 configuration)

I.102 Reserved

I.103 Reserved
The regulation card provides as standard, 2 static opto-coupled digital outputs in Open Collector configuration
and 2 relays with commutation contacts (see figure 5.4.1).
Every output is programmable with a specific code and function, as shown in the list below.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 103

 DIGITAL OUTPUTS SELECTION LIST:

Code LCD display Description

0 Drive Ready Drive ready to start
1 Alarm state Alarm signalling (Positive logic)
2 Not in alarm Alarm signalling (Negative logic)
3 Motor run RUN command active or output frequency ¹ 0Hz
4 Motor stop RUN command not active and output frequency = 0Hz
5 REV rotation Counter-clockwise rotation of the motor
6 Steady state Motor is running in steady state
7 Ramping Acceleration or Deceleration Ramp in progress
8 UV running The drive has tripped for UV, and automatic restart is taking place.
9 Out trq>thr Output torque higher than the value of P.241
10 Current lim Current limit (during ramp or at steady state)
11 DC-link lim DC Bus limit
12 Limit active General signalling of drive limit condition
13 Autocapt run Autocapture in progress
14 BU overload Set when the integrator d.054 = 100%, and Reset when d.054 = 0%.
15 Neg pwrfact Negative inverter output power factor
16 PID err >< PID error is within the limits defined by A.058 and A.059
17 PID err>thr PID error is greater than A.058
18 PID err<thr PID error is less than or equal to A.059
19 PIDer><(inh) PID error is within the limits defined by A.058 and A.059 (*)
20 PIDerr>(inh) PID error is greater than A.058 (*)
21 PIDerr<(inh) PID error is less than or equal to A.059 (*)
22 FWD enc rot Clockwise rotation of the encoder
23 REV enc rot Counter-clockwise rotation of the encoder
24 Encoder stop Encoder not rotating
25 Encoder run Encoder is rotating
26 Extern fault Positive logic for Ext. fault alarm signalling
27 No ext fault Negative logic for Ext. fault alarm signalling
28 Serial TO Serial link communication time out
29 freq=thr1 Output frequency within the range defined by P.440 and P.441
30 freq!=thr1 Output frequency outside the range defined by P.440 and P.441
31 freq>thr1 Output frequency above the values defined by P.440 and P.441
32 freq<thr1 Output frequency below the values defined by P.440 and P.441
33 freq=thr2 Output frequency within the range defined by P.442 and P.443
34 freq!=thr2 Output frequency outside the range defined by P.442 and P.443
35 freq>thr2 Output frequency above the values defined by P.442 and P.443
36 freq<thr2 Output frequency below the values defined by P.442 and P.443
37 HS temp=thr Heatsink temp within the range defined by P.480 and P.481
38 HS temp!=thr Heatsink temp outside the range defined by P.480 and P.481
39 HS temp>thr Heatsink temp above the threshold defined by P.480 and P.481
40 HS temp<thr Heatsink temp below the threshold defined by P.480 and P.481
41 Output freq Square wave synchronized with the inverter output frequency
42 Out freq x 2 Square wave synchronized with twice the inverter output frequency
43 CoastThrough Kinetic energy recovering during mains loss
44 EmgStop Emergency stop after mains loss detection.
45 DC Braking DC braking in progress
46 Drv OL status Set when the integrator d.051 = 100%, and Reset when d.051 = 0%.
47 Drv OL warn Set if d.051 is greater or equal to 90%.
48 Mot OL state Set when the integrator d.052 = 100%, and Reset when d.052 = 0%.
49 False False assume value 0
50 True True assume value 1
51 Reserved
52 Reserved
53 Reserved
54 Reserved
55 Reserved
56 DI 1 State of digital input 1
57 DI 2 State of digital input 2
58 DI 3 State of digital input 3

104 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 59 DI 4 State of digital input 4
60 DI 5 State of digital input 5
61 Reserved
62 Reserved
63 Reserved
64 Exp DI 1 Digital input 1 expansion state
65 Exp DI 2 Digital input 2 expansion state
66 Exp DI 3 Digital input 3 expansion state
67 Exp DI 4 Digital input 4 expansion state
68 AND 1 out Output block AND 1 state
69 AND 2 out Output block AND 2 state
70 AND 3 out Output block AND 3 state
71 OR 1 out Output block OR 1 state
72 OR 2 out Output block OR 2 state
73 OR 3 out Output block OR 3 state
74 NOT 1 out Output block NOT 1 state
75 NOT 2 out Output block NOT 2 state
76 NOT 3 out Output block NOT 3 state
77 NOT 4 out Output block NOT 4 state
(*) see chapter 7.7, section PID Limit.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.100 Dig output 1 cfg See Digital Outputs selection list 6 0 77 112
I.101 Dig output 2 cfg As for I.100 0 0 77 113
I.102 Reserved
I.103 Reserved

Factory settings for Digital Outputs are as follows:

Dig output 1 cfg - opto coupled type (Terminal 9-11) = 6 Steady state
Dig output 2 cfg - opto coupled type (Terminal 19-11) = 0 Drive ready

Digital Outputs Expansion Card

I.150 Exp DigOut 1 cfg (Expansion Digital Output 1 configuration)

See list associated to I.100, ..., I.103.

I.151 Exp DigOut 2 cfg (Expansion Digital Output 2 configuration)

See list associated to I.100, ..., I.103.

I.152 Exp DigOut 3 cfg (Expansion Digital Output 3 configuration)

See list associated to I.100, ..., I.103.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.150 Exp DigOut 1 cfg See Digital Outputs selection list 0 0 77 116
I.151 Exp DigOut 2 cfg As for I.100 0 0 77 117
I.152 Exp DigOut 3 cfg As for I.100 0 0 77 180

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 105

Analog Inputs Regulation Card

The figure below describes the block diagram of the standard “Analog Inputs” of the drive.

To Drive
Monitor
d201
d211
d221

1-2 Unipolar Clamp neg

value
0 Bipolar

I200
I210
I220
I203
I213
I214
min

Gain
I202
I212
I222
X
Dead
Band

I205
I215
I225
Offset
I201
I211
I221
+
+
Ref. Type
Selection

I200
I210
I220
I204
I214
I224
LPF
Monitor
d202
d212
d222

10 bits + sign
Converter
Terminal

Figure 7.4.1: Analog Inputs

The regulation card provides as standard 2 analog inputs.

Analog inputs resolution:

voltage input setting: 11 bits (10 bits + sign)
current input setting: 10 bits

A typical connection is reported in figure 5.4.1.

106 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Each analog input can be programmed to execute any of the functions below:

[1] Freq ref 1 Frequency reference 1 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.050)
[2] Freq ref 2 Frequency reference 2 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.051)
[3] Boost lev fac Level of voltage boost chapter PARAMETERS, section Boost (P.121)
[4] OT level fact Level of over torque chapter PARAMETERS, section OT level factor src (P.242)
[5] V red lev fac Output voltage reduction level chapter PARAMETERS, section Voltage Red Config P.422)
[6] DCB level fac DC braking current level chapter PARAMETERS, section DC brake Config (P.301)
[7] Ramp ext fact Ramp extension factor chapter PARAMETERS, section Ramp Config (F.260)
[8] Freq ref fact frequency reference factor chapter FREQ & RAMP, section F.080
[9] SpdPI LimFac Level of speed PI limit chapter PARAMETERS, section Closed Loop Speed Control
[10] Mlt frq ch 1 Multi frequency reference 1 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.060)
[11] Mlt frq ch 2 Multi frequency reference 2 chapter FREQ & RAMPS, section Reference sources (F.061)

Programming logic for the Analog Input function is “destination to source”.

For example, to program an analog input as drive frequency reference, the user needs to properly set the
parameter associated to the selection of the source for the frequency reference (F.050 or F.051, as shown in
figure 7.5.1).
The function currently associated to any of the analog inputs can be monitored through parameters d.200,
d.210.

I.200 An In 1 type (Analog Input 1 type)

Setting of the characteristic of Analog Input 1 (voltage input).
I.200 = 0 Bipolar -/+10V
I.200 = 1 Unipolar +10V/0-20mA
I.200 = 2 Unipolar 4-20 mA

I.210 An In 2 type (Analog Input 2 type)

Setting of the characteristic of Analog Input 2 (voltage input).
I.210 = 0 Bipolar -/+10V
I.210 = 1 Unipolar +10V
I.210 = 2 Unipolar 4-20 mA

I.220 Reserved

I.201 An In 1 offset (Analog Input 1 offset)

I.211 An In 2 offset (Analog Input 2 offset)

I.221 Reserved

I.202 An In 1 gain (Analog Input 1 gain)

I.212 An In 2 gain (Analog Input 2 gain)

I.222 Reserved

I.203 An In 1 minimum (Analog Input 1 minimun)

I.213 An In 2 minimum (Analog Input 2 minimun)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 107

I.223 Reserved

I.204 An In 1 filter (Analog Input 1 filter)

I.214 An In 2 filter (Analog Input 2 filter)

I.224 Reserved

I.205 An In 1 DeadBand (Analog input 1 dead band)

I.215 An In 2 DeadBand (Analog input 2 dead band)

I.225 Reserved
Dead band of the corresponding analog input. When the input at the terminal is below the threshold defined by
the parameter, the output of the Analog input block is kept to zero. Outside the dead band, the output varies
linearly from zero to 100%. (Refer to figure 7.4.5).
AnInp Drive AnInp Drive

I.202=2 I.202=2
100% 100%

I.202=1 I.202=1

I.201

I.201
AnInp AnInp
0 5V 10V Terminal 0 10V Terminal
50% 100% 100%
Figure 7.4.2: Analog input characteristic with offset and gain

AnInp Drive
I.202=2
100%

I.202=1

I.203=50%

AnInp
0 10V Terminal
100%
Figure 7.4.3: Analog input characteristic with minimum value, offset and gain (unipolar)

108 ADV80 • Instruction Manual


100 - I.203
An Inp Drive [%] = I.203 + _________ = x I.202 x ( An Inp Terminal [%] + I.201)
100

AnInp Drive
I.202=2
100%

I.202=1

I.203=50%

-100%
-10V AnInp
0 10V Terminal
100%

- I.203

-100%
Figure 7.4.4:Analog input characteristic with minimum value, offset and gain (bipolar)

Note ! When the analog input reference is set to 0V, an eventual “noise” can cause undesired speed oscillation between
positive and negative values of I.203 parameter.

[ (
An Inp Drive [%] = I.203 x signum I.202 x An Inp Terminal [%] + I.201 ) ] + _________ ( )
= x I.202 x An Inp Terminal [%] + I.201
100

AnInp Drive

100%
I.202=2

I.202=1
-10V
-100% I.205=50%
10V AnInp Terminal
I.205=50%
100%
I.202=1

I.202=2

-100%

Figure 7.4.5: Analog input characteristic with dead band

{
0 for | AnImp [%] | ≤ I.205
100
_________
An Inp Drive [%] = x ( An Inp [%] - I.205) for | AnImp [%] | > I.205
100 - I.205

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 109

 Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.200 An in 1 Type [0] ±10V 1 0 1 118
[1] 0...10V / 0...20mA
[2] 4...20 mA
I.201 An in 1 offset 0 -99.9 99.9 % 0.1 119
I.202 An in 1 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 % 0.01 120
I.203 An in 1 minimum 0 0 99.99 % of F.020 0.01 121
I.204 An in 1 filter 0,1 0.001 0.25 sec 0.001 122
I.205 An In 1 DeadBand 0 0 99.9 % 0.1 182
I.210 An in 2 Type [0] ± 0 0 1 123
[1] 0...10V / 0...20mA
I.211 An in 2 offset 0 -99.9 99.9 % 0.1 124
I.212 An in 2 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 % 0.01 125
I.213 An in 2 minimum 0 0 99.99 % of F.020 0.01 126
I.214 An in 2 filter 0,1 0.001 0.25 sec 0.001 127
I.215 An In 2 DeadBand 0 0 99.9 % 0.1 183
I.220 Reserved
I.221 Reserved
I.222 Reserved
I.223 Reserved
I.224 Reserved
I.225 Reserved

Analog Outputs Regulation Card

The figure below, describes the block diagram of the standard Analog Outputs of the drive.

I.300 (AN OUT 1) I.301 I.302 I303

I.310 (AN OUT 2) I.311 I.312 I313
I.350 (EXP AN OUT) I.351 I.352 I353
Time Constant
Freq out abs 0 Offset Gain
1 LPF
2 +
3
4 X Analog Output
(See Analog 5
Outputs selection list) 6 +
7
8
:
:
Figure 7.4.6: Analog Ouputs

The regulation card provides as standard 2 analog outputs.

Analog output resolution: 8 bits

A typical connection is reported in the figure 5.4.1.

Analog output 1: VOLTAGE programmable analog output (0...10V/5mA).

Analog output 2: CURRENT programmable analog output (0...20 / 4...20mA).

110 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

I.300 Analog out 1 cfg (Analog output 1 configuration)

I.310 Analog out 2 cfg (Analog output 2 configuration)

Each output is programmable with a specific code and function, as shown in the list below.

ANALOG OUTPUTS SELECTION LIST:

Code LCD display Description

0 Freq out abs Output Frequency, absolute value

1 Freq out Output Frequency
2 Output curr Output Current
3 Out voltage Output Voltage
4 Out trq pos Output Torque, positive value (negative values are clamped to zero)
5 Out trq abs Output Torque, absolute value
6 Out trq Output Torque
7 Out pwr pos Output Power, positive value (negative values are clamped to zero)
8 Out pwr abs Output Power, absolute value
9 Out pwr Output Power
10 Out PF Output Power Factor
11 Enc freq abs Encoder frequency, absolute value
12 Encoder freq Encoder frequency
13 Freq ref abs Frequency reference, absolute value
14 Freq ref Frequency reference
15 Load current Load Current
16 Magn current Motor Magnetizing Current
17 PID output PID regulator output
18 DClink volt DC bus capacitors level
19 U current Output phase U current signal
20 V current Output phase V current signal
21 W current Output phase W current signal
22 Freq ref fac Frequency reference factor

I.301 An out 1 offset (Analog output 1 offset)

I.311 An out 2 offset (Analog output 2 offset)

It is used to add an offset to the related analog output. See figure 7.4.6.

I.302 An out 1 gain (Analog output 1 gain)

I.312 An out 2 gain (Analog output 2 gain)

Gain of the analog output.
It can be used to amplify or attenuate the input value of the related analog output block. See figure 7.4.6.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 111

I.303 An out 1 filter (Analog output 1 filter)

I.313 An out 2 filter (Analog output 2 filter)

It is the time costant of the digital filtering performed on the related Analog output. See fig.7.4.6.

By using the above described parameters, it is possible to customize the input/output characteristic of each
Analog output block, as shown below. For brevity, only parameters related to AnOut1 are considered, but the
same applies to Analog output 2.

For programming code

0 10V 1 I.301 = 0 I.302 = 1
2
2 I.301 = 3 I.302 = 1
3
4 3 I.301 = 10 I.302 = - 1
5 2
4 I.301 = 10 I.302 = - 2
7 3V
3
8
1 4
11
0V
13 Internal V
18
Figure 7.4.7-A: Scaling References and Minimum Values (unipolar)

Vout x 10 x

( _______
Stp Var
Fs Var
x I.302 ) + I.301
Where:
Vout output voltage at card terminals.
Stp Var actual variable value (units of the variable)
Fs Var full scale of the variable (units of the variable)

For programming code

1 10V 1 I.301 = 0 I.302 = 1
6
2 I.301 = -3 I.302 = 1
9
10 3 I.301 = -5 I.302 = 1
12 2
4 4 I.301 = 10 I.302 = -1
14 6.5V
15 5 I.301 = 10 I.302 = -2
1
16
5V
17 Internal V
19
20 5
3
21
2.5V
22

0V
Figura 7.4.7-B : Scaling References and Minimum Values (bipolar)

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.300 Analog out 1 cfg See Analog outputs selection list 0 0 22 133
I.301 An out 1 offset 0 -9.99 9.99 0,01 134
I.302 An out 1 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 135
I.303 An out 1 filter 0 0 2,5 sec 0.01 136
I.310 Analog out 2 cfg As for I.300 2 0 22 137
I.311 An out 2 offset 0 -9.99 9.99 0.01 138
I.312 An out 2 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 139
I.313 An out 2 filter 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 140

112 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 The table below shows the analog outputs scaling.
CODE Variable Full scale value (±10V)
0 Freq out abs F.020 x P.080/100 [Hz] (Maximum output frequency)
1 Freq out Same as CODE 0
2 Output curr 2 x D.950 [Arms] (2 x Inverter rated current)
3 Out voltage P.061 [Vrms] (Maximum output voltage)
4 Out trq pos 2 x Motor rated torque [Nm]
5 Out trq abs Same as CODE 4
6 Out trq Same as CODE 4
7 Out pwr pos 2 x Motor rated power [W]
8 Out pwr abs 2 x Motor rated power [W]
9 Out pwr 2 x Motor rated power [W]
10 Out PF Power factor = 1
11 Enc freq abs F.020 x P.080/100 [Hz] (Maximum output frequency)
12 Encoder freq F.020 x P.080/100 [Hz] (Maximum output frequency)
13 Freq ref abs F.020 x P.080/100 [Hz] (Maximum output frequency)
14 Freq ref F.020 x P.080/100 [Hz] (Maximum output frequency)
15 Load current Same as CODE 2
16 Magn current Same as CODE 2
17 PID output 100% of the PID ouput
18 DClink volt 990Vdc
19 U current Same as CODE 2
20 V current Same as CODE 2
21 W current Same as CODE 2
22 Freq ref fac Factor = 2

Analog Outputs Exp Card

I.350 Exp An out 1 cfg (Expansion analog output 1 configuration)

See description of I.300, I.310.

I.351 Exp AnOut 1 offs (Expansion Analog Output 1 offset)

See description of I.301, I.311.

I.352 Exp AnOut 1 gain (Expansion Analog Output 1 gain)

See description of I.302, I.312.

I.353 Exp AnOut 1 filt (Expansion Analog Output 1 filter)

See description of I.303, I.313.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.350 Exp an out 1 cfg As for I.300 3 0 22 141
I.351 Exp AnOut 1 offs 0 -9.99 9.99 0.01 142
I.352 Exp AnOut 1 gain 1 -9.99 9.99 0.01 143
I.353 Exp AnOut 1 filt 0 0 2.5 sec 0.01 144

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 113

Enabling Virtual I/O
By using “virtual I/O”, it is possible to mix digital inputs actually coming from terminals of the regulation card
with a string of virtual digital inputs directly controlled via serial line or fieldbus.
Likewise, it is possible to control some of the drive digital and analog outputs directly from serial line or field-
bus.
It is possible to configure the drive so that some commands come from digital input terminals of the regulation
card (terminal digital inputs), while others come from serial line or fieldbus, by writing the dedicated param-
eters H.000 and H.001 (virtual digital inputs).
The selection between terminals and virtual digital inputs is determined by the binary code written in the mask
parameters I.400, I.410.
Digital outputs at the terminals of the regulation card are normally driven by the drive, according to the func-
tions programmed by the parameters I.000 to I.152. However, it is possible to drive any of the digital outputs
on the regulation card directly from serial line or fieldbus, by writing the virtual digital outputs H.010, H.011.
Whether to use the virtual settings or not is determined by mask parameters I.420, I.430.
Using “virtual assignation” the analogical inputs from the terminal card of the regulator card can be combined
with the virtual analogical entries controlled through the serial line or through the bus field.

The analogical output can also be directed directly through the series line or the bus field (virtual analogical
outputs).

Mask parameters have to be managed bitwise. Each bit corresponds to a switch, according to the following
logic.

Mask Bit i DI i source DO i source

0 Terminal Drive function
1 Virtual Virtual control

VIRTUAL DIGITAL INPUTS CONFIGURATION

Selection logics for digital input is described by the following figure.

Drive digital input (Terminals) Virtual digital commands

DI DI DI DI DI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI H.000
d.101 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 d.102

0 1 0 1 0 1

Mask I.400

Bit 7...............................Bit 1 Bit 0 d.100

To internal drive
Mask bits = 0  Dixx active digital commands
Mask bits = 1  VIxx active I.000 … I.007
Figure 7.4.8: Virtual digital inputs configuration

Note ! The digital inputs 6, 7 and 8, are not available on the drive terminals.

114 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 VIRTUAL DIGITAL OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION
Selection logics for digital output is described by the following figure.

Drive logical states

I.101 ..... I.100 Virtual settings

IDO IDO VO VO VO VO H.010

d.151 2 1 4 3 2 1 d.152

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Mask I.420
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DO DO DO DO
4 3 2 1 d.150
Mask bits = 0  DOxx setting active
Mask bits = 1  VOxx setting active
Terminal drive outputs

Figure 7.4.9: Virtual digital outputs configuration

Note ! The digital outputs 3 and 4, are not available on the drive terminals.

VIRTUAL ANALOG INPUTS CONFIGURATION

Selection logic for analog inputs is described by the following figure.

Analog inputs (terminals) Virtual analog inputs

H.026
H.025
d.212
d.202

IAI IAI VAI VAI

2 1 2 1

0 1 0 1

Mask I.440
AN2 AN1
Mask bits = 0  IAIx value active
Mask bits = 1  VAIx value active
To drive inputs
F.050, F.051, F.060, F.061, ...
Figure 7.4.10: Virtual analog inputs configuration

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 115

 VIRTUAL ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION
Analog outputs at the terminals of the regulation card are normally written by the drive, according to the set-
tings of parameters I.300, I.310, I.320. However, it is possible to control the analog outputs directly from serial
line or fieldbus, by writing parameters H.020, H.021, H.022 .
Switching between internal and virtual source for analog output is determined by the mask parameter I.450,
according to the following figure.

From internal drive

analog output function Virtual setting

IAO IAO VAO VAO

I.310 2 1 I.300 H.021 2 1 H.020

0 1 0 1

Mask I.450
Bit 1 Bit 0

AO AO
2 1
Mask Bits = 0  A0xx value active
Drive analog output Mask bits = 1  Va0xx value active
(Terminals)
Figure 7.4.11: Virtual analog outputs configuration

Some examples about the programming of basic functions via virtual assignment are given below.

A) DIGITAL INPUTS

Programming example for:

• RUN and REVERSE commands via “virtual mode”
• EXT FAULT command via “terminal”

P.000 = 2 or 4 Function mode enabled

I.400 = 3 bit 0 and bit 1 are high (1) and bit 5 is low (0)
I.000 = 1 RUN (programmed on digital input 1)
I.001 = 2 REVERSE (programmed on digital input 2)
I.005 = 3 EXTERNAL FAULT (programmed on digital input 6)

Writing H.000 = 1 the motor will turn in FORWARD direction

Writing H.000 = 3 the motor will turn in REVERSE direction
Writing H.000 = 0 the motor will STOP

Refer to chapter 7.9 for more information on H.000 parameter.

The EXTERNAL FAULT command will be activated by applying +24Vdc to terminal 12 (Digital input 3).

116 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 B) DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Programming example for:

• ALARM STATE signalling on Digital output 1
• VIRTUAL SETTING on Digital output 2

I.420 = 2 bit 1 is high (1) and bit 0 is low (0)

I.100 = 1 ALARM STATE (programmed on digital output 1)
I.101 = X ANY SELECTION (programmed on digital output 2)

Digital output 1 active in accordance with the drive alarm status

Digital output 2 active if bit 1 of H.010 = 1
not active if bit 1 of H.010 = 0

C) ANALOG INPUT
Programming examples for:
• Reference Channel 1 Analog entry 1 Terminal card.
• Reference Channel 2 Virtual analog input 2

F.050 = 1 Freq ref 1 Programmed in analog input 1

F.051 = 2 Freq ref 2 Programmed as analog input 2
I.440 = 2 Bit 1 is “high” (1) and Bit 2 is “low” (0)

Writing H.026 = +32767 Freq ref 2 = F.020

Writing H.026 = +0 Freq ref 2 = 0

D) ANALOG OUTPUTS
Programming example for:
• OUTPUT FREQUENCY signalling on Analog output 1
• VIRTUAL SETTING on Analog output 2

I.450 = 2 bit 1 is high (1) and bit 0 is low (0)

I.300 = 0 OUTPUT FREQUENCY (programmed on analog output 1)
I.310 = X ANY SELECTION (programmed on analog output 2)

Analog output 1 signal proportional to the OUTPUT FREQUENCY of the drive

Analog output 2 signal proportional to the setting of H.021

H.021: + 32767 output = +10V

H.021: - 32767 output = - 10V

I.400 Inp by serial en

Bitwise mask parameter for virtual digital input. The state of each one of the bits in this mask determines if
the corresponding digital input function of the drive (programmed by I.000 ... I.007) has to be associed to the
virtual digital input or to the terminal digital input. The value which must be assigned to the mask is the equiva-
lent decimal of the binary code defined by the state of each switch, according to the following:

Mask: = 1 Bit 0 = 1 Virtual input 1 enabling

= 2 Bit 1 = 1 Virtual input 2 enabling
= 4 Bit 2 = 1 Virtual input 3 enabling
= 8 Bit 3 = 1 Virtual input 4 enabling
= 16 Bit 4 = 1 Virtual input 5 enabling
= 32 Bit 5 = 1 Virtual input 6 enabling
= 64 Bit 6 = 1 Virtual input 7 enabling
= 128 Bit 7 = 1 Virtual input 8 enabling

Example: if we want to use virtual input 3 and virtual input 6, the value to be written to the mask is (4 + 32) = 36.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 117

I.410 Exp in by ser en (Enabling of Expansion inputs via serial line)
Bitwise mask parameter for expansion virtual digital input. The state of each one of the bits in this mask determines
if the corresponding digital input function of the drive (programmed by I.050 ... I.053) has to be associed to the ex-
pansion virtual digital input or to the expansion card digital input terminal. The value which must be assigned to the
mask is the equivalent decimal of the binary code defined by the state of each switch, as described for parameter
I.400.

I.420 Out by serial en (Enabling of Outputs via serial line)

Bitwise mask parameter for virtual digital output. The state of each one of the bits in this mask determines if the corre-
sponding digital output terminal of the regulation card is controlled by the drive function (programmed by I.100 ... I.103) or
by the virtual digital output. The value which must be assigned to the mask is the equivalent decimal of the binary code
defined by the state of each switch, according to the following:

Mask: = 1 Bit 0 = 1 Virtual output 1 enabling

= 2 Bit 1 = 1 Virtual output 2 enabling
= 4 Bit 2 = 1 Virtual output 3 enabling
= 8 Bit 3 = 1 Virtual output 4 enabling

Example: if we want to use virtual output 1 and virtual output 3, the value to be written to the mask is (1 + 4) = 5.

I.430 Exp OutBySer en (Enabling of Expansion Outputs via serial line)

Bitwise mask parameter for expansion virtual digital output.The state of each one of the bits in this mask de-
termines if the corresponding digital output terminal of the regulation card is controlled by the drive function
(programmed by I.150 ... I.152) or by the expansion virtual digital output.The value which must be assigned to
the mask is the equivalent decimal of the binary code defined by the state of each switch, as described for pa-
rameter I.420 (Bit 0, Bit1and Bit 2).

I.440 An inp by ser en (Enabling of analog inputs via serial line)

Bitwise mask parameter for virtual analog input. The state of each one of the bits in this mask determines if
the corresponding function of the drive has to be associated with the virtual analogical input or with the ana-
logical input of the terminal card. The value which must be assigned to the mask is the equivalent decimal of
the binary code defined by the state of each switch with respect to:

Mask: = 1 Bit 0 = 1 Virtual input 1 enabling

= 2 Bit 1 = 1 Virtual input 2 enabling
= 4 Bit 2 = 1 Virtual input 3 enabling
= 8 Bit 3 = 1 Virtual input 4 enabling

I.450 An out by ser en (Enabling of Analog outputs via serial line)

Bitwise mask parameter for virtual analog output. The status of each bit of this mask determines whether the
corresponding analog output terminal of the regulation card is controlled by the drive function (programmed
by I.300, I.310, I.350) or by the virtual analog output. The value which must be assigned to the mask is the
equivalent decimal of the binary code defined by the state of each switch, according to the following:

Mask: = 1 Bit 0 = 1 Virtual analog output 1 enabling

= 2 Bit 1 = 1 Virtual analog output 2 enabling
= 16 Bit 4 = 1 Virtual expansion analog output 1 enabling

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.400 Inp by serial en 0 0 255 145
I.410 Exp in by ser en 0 0 15 146
I.420 Out by serial en 0 0 15 147
I.430 Exp OutBySer en 0 0 3 148
I.440 Ab In An da ser 0 0 255 196
I.450 An out by ser en 0 0 255 149

118 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Encoder Configuration

Digital input 4 and Digital input 5 on the regulation terminals can be used as encoder inputs, A and B chan-
nels, in order to provide feedback or an external frequency reference to the drive.

Being possible to use encoders with HTL logic level inputs: 24Vdc ±10% 25kHz max.

Note ! The management of complementary A- and B-.encoder channels is NOT allowed.

The digital inputs must be set according to the follow configuration:

I.103 = [0] None
I.104 = [0] None

Note ! Using a HTL encoder, the supply has to be externally provided, not being available on the drive terminals.
Maximum encoder frequency input: 25 kHz.
The setting of encoder feedback must have effected through the use of PID function.
The digital inputs common (terminal 18) have to be rightly connected to the external supply:
- to 0 V of supplier, if the encoder is PNP type
- to + 24 V of supplier, if the encoder is NPN type.

U2/T1
V2/T2 M
W2/T3

PE2
Channel A +24V
Digital Input 4 14 E External
024V power supply
Channel B
Digital Input 5 16

COM 18

I.500 Encoder enable (Encoder enabling)

Enabling of the encoder reading.

I.501 Encoder ppr (Encoder pulses per revolution)

Setting of the encoder nameplate pulses per revolution.

I.502 Enc channels cfg (Encoder channels configuration)

Setting of the encoder type. The drive is able to read either single-channel or double-channel encoders.

I.503 Enc spd mul fact (Encoder speed multiplier factor)

Multiplier factor of the encoder pulses. This parameter allows for management of an encoder that is not di-
rectly mounted on the motor shaft (E.g. an encoder mounted on the “slow shaft side” of a gearbox).
Has no effect on the closed loop speed control (P.010 Type of control = [1] V/f Clsd loop).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 119

I.504 Enc update time (Encoder updating time)
Setting of the sampling time of the encoder pulses. The encoder sampling time affects both the measurement
accuracy and the dynamics that can be achieved in closed loop speed control. Higher sampling times yield
better accuracy on the single speed measurement (more pulses counted at a given speed), but introduce a
sampling delay that reduces the dynamics achievable in closed loop speed control.

Note ! Due to drive logic internal scaling, the encoder sampling time must be set so that the number of pulses counted in the
interval defined by I.504 never exceeds 32767.

The following formulas relate the number of encoder pulses read by the drive to the actual motor frequency:

The following formulas are for the calculation of the encoder shaft frequency.
P.041 [polepair] 1
Fmot [Hz] = Npuls x ___________________________ = x ___
I.501 [ppr] x Tc [s] x I.503 [factor] Ec

I.501 [ppr] x Tc [s] x I.503 [factor]

Npuls = Fmot [Hz] x ___________________________ = x Ec
P.041 [polepair]

Motor electrical frequency, expressed in Hz, and motor mechanical speed, expressed in revolutions per
minute, are related as follows:

Fmot [rpm] x 60 [s] Pn [rpm] x P.041 [polepair]

N [rpm] = ________________ ; Fmot [Hz] = ________________________
P.041 [polepair] 60 [s]
Where:
Fmot Motor electrical frequency detected by the encoder
n Motor mechanical speed
Tc Encoder sampling time, defined by the parameter I.504.
Npuls Number of encoder pulses counted by the drive in the interval Tc (displayed as d.300)
Ec Factor due to the encoder type: Ec = 1 if I.502 = [0] One channel
Ec = 4 if I.502 = [1] Two channel

The accuracy of Fmot depends on the number of pulses counted: at low speed the accuracy could be reduced

When the resolution of the encoder in use is low (200…600 pulses/rev), the I.504 has to be set relatively high, in
order to obtain a good average value of the signal (eg: when used for monitoring the speed on a display or an
analog output).
Using an encoder with higher number of pulses (1000…4096 pulses/rev), the setting of I.504 can be set to the
minimum values, in order to increase the sampling speed (eg. for closing the speed loop with the PID function).

I.505 Reserved
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.500 Encoder enable [0] Disable 0 0 1 150
[1] Enable
I.501 Encoder ppr 1024 0 9999 151
I.502 Enc channels cfg [0] One Channel 1 0 1 152
[1] Two Channels
I.503 Enc spd mul fact 1 0.01 99.99 0.01 153
I.504 Enc update time [0] 1ms 0 0 5 sec 0.1 154
[1] 4ms
[2] 16ms
[3] 0.25s
[4] 1s
[5] 5s
I.505 Reserved

120 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Serial Configuration
The ADV80 provides as standard an RS485 serial line.
For the connection of the serial line, terminals 13, 15 and 17 are available on the regulation card (see figure
5.4.1).

The parameters and variables can be written and read through the serial line.
It is also possible to give commands to the drive through serial line, by setting the Cmd source sel (P.000) as
follows:
P.000 = 2 Terminal or Virtual
P.000 = 3 Serial

Further information is reported in the chapter PARAMETER, section Commands.

I.600 Serial link cfg (Serial link configuration)

Selection of the serial line protocol.
Several protocols are available, as shown in the selection list of I.600 at the end of the paragraph.
DEFAULT VALUE = 4 (Modbus protocol).

I.601 Serial link bps (Serial link bit per second)

It defines the Baud rate (bit per second) of the serial communication.
Possible selections are shown on the table at the end of the paragraph.

I.602 Device address

Address at which the drive can be accessed if it is networked via the RS485 interface.
The range of the selectable addresses is between 0 and 99.
As reported in the chapter 5.4 (Serial Line), it is possible to perform a Multidrop configuration with a maximum
of 32 devices.

I.603 Ser answer delay (Serial link answer delay)

Minimum delay setting between the reception of the last byte and the beginning of the corresponding answer.
The delay will help avoid conflicts on the serial line, when the RS485 interface is not preset for an automatic
Tx/Rx communication.
The Ser answer delay (I.603) parameter is specific for the standard serial line RS485.

E.g.: if in the master the communication delay Tx/Rx has a maximum of 20 ms, the setting of Ser answer
delay (I.603) parameter will have to be higher than 20ms: 22ms.

I.604 Serial timeout (Serial link timeout)

Adjust the maximum time permitted after the reception of the two consecutive frames.
If this time elapsed from last activity exceeds the value written in I.604, the drive will behave as programmed
by I.605.
Setting I.604 to zero will disable the timeout check.

Note ! Even if the timeout control function is enabled at the drive power-on, the detection of “St” alarm is temporarily non
active.
The detection of the alarm will be automatically activated after the first restore of the communication between master
and slave.

I.605 En timeout alm (Enabling serial link timeout alarm)

Setting of the behaviour for Serial time out alarm.

I.605 = 0 Signalling of the alarm on a digital output (programmed to this purpose)

I.605 = 1 Drive in alarm and signalling on a digital output (programmed to this purpose).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 121

 Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.600 Serial link cfg [0] FoxLink 7E1 4 0 5 155
[1] FoxLink 701
[2] FoxLink 7N2
[3] FoxLink 8N1
[4] ModBus 8N1
[5] JBus 8N1
I.601 Serial link bps [0] 600 baud 4 0 6 156
[1] 1200 baud
[2] 2400 baud
[3] 4800 baud
[4] 9600 baud
[5] 19200 baud
[6] 38400 baud
I.602 Device address 1 0 99 1 157
I.603 Ser answer delay 1 0 250 msec 1 158
I.604 Serial timeout 0 0 25 sec 0,1 159
I.605 En timeout alm [0] Disable 0 0 1 160
[1] Enable

Options Configuration

I.700 Option 1 type

[0] Card Off None
[1] Card master Reserved
[2] IO Card EXP-D6-A1R1-AGy (Optionals I/O card)
[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI Card SBI-PDP-AGy (Profibus-DP card)

I.701 Option 2 type

[0] Card Off None
[1] Card master Reserved
[2] IO Card EXP-D6-A1R1-AGy (Optionals I/O card)
[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI Card SBI-PDP-AGy (Profibus-DP card)

Set up achieved:
I.700 Option 1 type = [2] IO Card
I.701 Option 2 type = [4] SBI Card
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.700 Option 1 type [0] Card Off Reserved 0 0 4 161
[1] Card master Reserved
[2] IO card EXP-D6-A1R1-ADV80
[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI card SBI-PDP-ADV80
I.701 Option 2 type [0] Card Off Reserved 0 0 4 162
[1] Card master Reserved
[2] IO card EXP-D6-A1R1-ADV80
[3] Card free Reserved
[4] SBI card SBI-PDP-ADV80

122 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

SBI Configuration
In this menu it is possible to perform the configuration of the SBI card.
Detailed information about the filedbus interfacing, is reported in the specific instruction manuals of the SBI
cards.

I.750 SBI Address

Setting of the different addresses of the slaves connected to the bus.

I.751 CAN baudrate

CAN Open or DeviceNet baudrate.

I.752 SBI Profibus Mode

Definition of the data exchange structure, between the SBI card of the drive and the Profibus master.

5 different configurations are available: PP0-0….PP0-4

PP0-0 User defined structure

PP0-1…PP0-4 Structures in accordance with Profidrive profile

I.753 SBI CAN Mode

Selection of the fieldbus protocol for:
I.753 = 0 OFF
I.753 = 1 CANOpen
I.753 = 2 DeviceNet

I.754 Bus Flt Holdoff (Bus fault hold off from profibus)
A communication drop with the fieldbus master, is detected by the SBI card.
This parameter allows the setting of a delay for the intervention of the BUS FAULT alarm.

If the communication is restored within this time, the drive will continue working. If this time is elapsed and the
communication is still missing, an alarm will occur stopping the drive.

If the communication is re-active in the time sets with this parameter, the drive will fault to an alarm storing the
“bF” code.

During this stage, the information data (received and sent) is frozen at the status prior to the communication
drop.
At the restoring of the transmission, the first data sent and received will be the one previously frozen.

I.760 SBI to Drv W 0 (SBI to Drive Word 0)

I.761 SBI to Drv W 1 (SBI to Drive Word 1)

I.762 SBI to Drv W 2 (SBI to Drive Word 2)

I.763 SBI to Drv W 3 (SBI to Drive Word 3)

I.764 SBI to Drv W 4 (SBI to Drive Word 4)

I.765 SBI to Drv W 5 (SBI to Drive Word 5)

I.770 Drv to SBI W 0 (Drive to SBI Word 0)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 123

I.771 Drv to SBI W 1 (Drive to SBI Word 1)

I.772 Drv to SBI W 2 (Drive to SBI Word 2)

I.773 Drv to SBI W 3 (Drive to SBI Word 3)

I.774 Drv to SBI W 4 (Drive to SBI Word 4)

I.775 Drv to SBI W 5 (Drive to SBI Word 5)

Sbi to Drive Wx = Word exchanged from Sbi to Drive

Drive to Sbi Wx = Word exchanged from Drive to Sbi

The structure of the data exchange is formed by 6 words.

In parameters I.760 ... I.775 must be inserted in the IPA code of the parameter which is to be read or written.

E.g.
I.760=311 written parameter F100 Frequency ref 0.
I.770=0 read parameter d000 Output frequency

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.750 SBI address 3 0 255 163
I.751 CAN baudrate [0] 10 Kbit/s 5 0 6 164
[1] 20 Kbit/s
[2] 50 Kbit/s
[3] 125 Kbit/s
[4] 250 Kbit/s
[5] 500 Kbit/s
[6] 1000 Kbit/s
I.752 SBI Profibus mod [0] Custom 2 0 4 165
[1] PPO1
[2] PPO2
[3] PPO3
[4] PPO4
I.753 SBI CAN mode [0] OFF 0 0 2 166
[1] CAN Open
[2] DeviceNet
I.754 Bus Flt Holdoff 0.0 0.1 60 sec 0.1 179
I.760 SBI to Drv W 0 0 0 1999 167
I.761 SBI to Drv W 1 0 0 1999 168
I.762 SBI to Drv W 2 0 0 1999 169
I.763 SBI to Drv W 3 0 0 1999 170
I.764 SBI to Drv W 4 0 0 1999 171
I.765 SBI to Drv W 5 0 0 1999 172
I.770 Drv to SBI W 0 1 0 1999 173
I.771 Drv to SBI W 1 2 0 1999 174
I.772 Drv to SBI W 2 3 0 1999 175
I.773 Drv to SBI W 3 4 0 1999 176
I.774 Drv to SBI W 4 5 0 1999 177
I.775 Drv to SBI W 5 6 0 1999 178

124 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

7.5 Menu F - FREQUENCIES & RAMPS
The diagram below, describes the logic for the “Reference selection”.

+F.020

-F.020
Reference

+
+

F.080
Ref. 1 Channel

Ref. 2 Channel

1.0 0

AN INP 2 2
AN INP 1 1
F.050

F.051
NULL 0

AN INP 2 2
F.100 3

MOTORPOT 5
NULL 6
AN INP 1 1

MLT SPEED 4

ENCODER 7

NULL 0
PROFIDRIVE 8

AN INP 2 2
F.101 3

MOTORPOT 5
NULL 6

PROFIDRIVE 8
AN INP 1 1

MLT SPEED 4

ENCODER 7

DEC
Dig input = Multi freq sel
Dig input = Multi freq sel
Dig input = Multi freq sel

ACC
Dig input = Multi freq sel
F.115 15
1
0

2
3

R
C
T

L
F.102
F.103
Multi Freq. 1 Channel

Multi Freq. 2 Channel

DOWN
RESET
UP
F.060

F.061
NULL 0

NULL 0
AN INP 2 2
F.100 3

MOTORPOT 5
NULL 6
AN INP 1 1

MLT SPEED 4

ENCODER 7
PROFIDRIVE 8

PROFIDRIVE 8
AN INP 2 2
F.101 3

MOTORPOT 5
NULL 6
AN INP 1 1

MLT SPEED 4

ENCODER 7

Figure 7.5.1: Reference Selection

Motorpotentiometer

F.000 Motorpot ref (Motorpotentiometer reference)

When this parameter is shown, the UP and DOWN keys are activated to increase or decrease the frequency
value.
Pressing the UP and DOWN Keys will increase or decrease the motor speed respectively until the keys are
released.
The maximum value settable is defined by Rif Freq massima (F.020).

Note ! A RUN command is always necessary, in order to START the motor.

The Motorpotentiometer reference can also be changed via digital inputs, programmed as
Motorpot up and Motorpot down (see par. 7.4, I.000).
It is possible to reset the Motorpotentiometer via a digital input programmed as Reset Motorpot.
The Motorpotentiometer is reset if the motor is not in “Run” (see par. 7.4, I.000).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 125

F.010 Mp acc/dec time (Motorpotentiometer Acceleration / Deceleration time)
It sets the acceleration and deceleration ramp time (in seconds), for the Motorpotentiometer function.

F.011 Motorpot offset (Motorpotentiometer offset)

It is the minimum value allowed for the Motorpotentiometer, when configured as unipolar (see F.012). The set-
ting of F.011 will have no effect if the Motorpotentiometer is configured as bipolar.

F.012 Mp output mode (Motorpotentiometer output mode)

Variation range of the frequency reference from Motorpotentiometer (unipolar or bipolar).
In either setting the HW Reverse command is active (when enabled).

F.013 Mp auto save (Motorpotentiometer auto save)

When this function is enabled, the Motorpot reference is continuously saved into non-volatile memory. At
power on, the reference will start from the last saved value.
When this function is disabled, the Motorpot reference is always zero after power-on.

Note ! Saving drive parameters by command C.000 (or S.901) will not save the Motorpot ref value.

If F.014 is set = [1] Follow ramp, Motorpot reference is always reset to zero, after power on, regardless of the
setting of F.013 .

F.014 MpRef at stop (Stop mode of Motorpotentiometer function)

Behavior of the Motorpotentiometer reference after a STOP command.

F.014 = 0 Motorpotentiometer reference remains fixed to its current value.

Normal operation. If the STOP command is sent, the motorpotentiometer reference
stays at its last value.

F.014 = 1 Motorpotentiometer reference ramps down to zero.

When a STOP command is given, Motorpotentiometer reference follows the decel-
eration ramp in use.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.000 Motorpot ref 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.01 300
F.010 Mp acc/dec time 10 0.1 999.9 sec 0.1 301
F.011 Motorpot offset 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 302
F.012 Mp output mode [0] Unipolar 0 0 1 303
[1] Bipolar
F.013 Mp auto save [0] Disable 1 0 1 304
[1] Enable
F.014 MpRef at stop [0] Last value 0 0 1 351
[1] Follow ramp

126 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Reference Limits

F.020 Max ref freq (Maximum reference frequency)

Defines the maximum value (absolute value) allowed for the frequency reference.
This parameter applies to the sum of the two references available on the drive (Reference 1 and Reference 2).

F.021 Min ref freq (Mimimum reference frequency)

It defines the minimum frequency value, under which any regulation with analog or digital references has no
effect.
The START of the motor will be carried out (with the ramp delay) at this frequency value also with null reference.
As described in the following figure, this behaviour is correlated also to the setting of Frequenz min usc (P.081).

F out Max output freq (P.080)

Max ref freq (F.020)

(A)
Min output freq (P.081)
Min ref freq (F.021)
(B)

Set frequency
Figure 7.5.2: Min and Max Reference Frequency

Drive behaviour around minimum values

P.081 settings in A condition

• Giving the RUN command, the motor will reach the frequency set by P.081 (A) without following the set-
ting of acceleration ramp time.
• The reference action on the frequency curve, will have effect starting from the setting value of P.081 pa-
rameter.

P.081 settings in B condition

• Giving the RUN command, the motor will reach the frequency set by P.081 (B) without following the set-
ting of acceleration ramp time.
• References below F.021 will be adjusted to the value of F.021. The variation of P.081 to F.021 is carried
out in the adjusted acceleration time.

The Max output freq (P.080) and the Min output freq (P.081) are expressed as percentage of the values of
Max ref freq (F.020).

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.020 Max ref freq (****) 25 500 Hz 0.1 305
F.021 Min ref freq 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 306
(****) parameter value depending on drive type.

Reference Sources

F.050 Ref 1 Channel (Reference 1 channel)

F.051 Ref 2 Channel (Reference 2 channel)

As shown in figure 7.5.1, the source of each of the two frequency referencies can be independently selected.
Available selections are reported in the table at the end of this paragraph. The effective frequency reference
for the drive will always be the algebric sum of the two channels.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 127

F.060 Mlt Frq Channel 1 (Multi frequency channel 1)

F.061 Mlt Frq Channel 2 (Multi frequency channel 2)

These parameters allow selection of the source of the First and Second frequency reference of the Multi-
speed function (See figure 7.5.1).
Available selections are reported in the table at the end of this paragraph.

In the example reported below, it is shown how to switch the source of the frequency reference, between Ana-
log Input 1 and Motorpotentiometer.

1) set: F.050 - Ref 1 channel = [4] Multispeed

2) set: F.060 - MltFrq channel 1 = [1] Analog input 1
3) set: F.061 - MltFrq channel 2 = [5] Motorpotentiometer
4) configure one of the digital input (eg. Dig Inp 3) as follows:

I.002 - Dig input 3 cfg = [7] Freq sel 1 (Binary selection Multispeed function)

The result of the above settings is:

a) when Dig input 3 is OFF, the Analog Input 1 is used as main reference
b) when Dig input 3 is ON, the Motorpotentiometer is used as main reference

Note ! When Dig input 3 is ON, in order to use Motorpot on the keypad, it is necessary to enter the editing mode of F.000
parameter.

F.080 FreqRef fac src (Frequency reference multiplier source)

Select the multiplier source of the frequency reference. If set to 1, 2 or 3, the frequency reference resulting by
the sum of the two channels, is multiplied by the analog input value (positive only), according to the following
formula:
An Inp [%]
FREF,OUT = FREF,IN x ___________
50 [%]

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.050 Ref 1 channel [0] Null 3 0 8 307
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)
[3] Freq ref x (setting through S.203 or F.100)
[4] Multispeed (setting through F.100…F.116)
[5] Motorpotent (setting through F.000…F013)
[6] Null
[7] Encoder (setting through I.500…I.505)
[8] Profidrive Reference from Profibus
F.051 Ref 2 channel [0] Null 0 0 8 308
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)
[3] Freq ref x (setting through F.101)
[4] Multispeed (setting through F.100…F.116)
[5] Motorpotent (setting through F.000…F013)
[6] Null
[7] Encoder (setting through I.500…I.505)
[8] Profidrive Reference by Profibus
F.060 MltFrq channel 1 As for F.050, Ref 1 channel 3 0 8 309
F.061 MltFrq channel 2 As for F.051, Ref 2 channel 3 0 8 310
F.080 FreqRef fac src [0] Null 0 0 2 142
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)

128 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Multispeed Function

F.100 Frequency Ref 0 (Multi frequency channel 1)

F. ...

F.115 Frequency Ref 15 (Multi frequency channel 15)

It is possible to select up to 16 frequencies, whose value can be set by these parameters.
The selection of these frequencies is performed through the binary setting of digital inputs programmed as Freq sel.
The following table describes the basis sequence of the Multispeed selection:

Active Dig ref frequency Freq Sel 1 Freq Sel 2 Freq Sel 3 Freq Sel 4
F.100 (Freq Ref 0) 0 0 0 0
F.101 (Freq Ref 1) 1 0 0 0
F.102 (Freq Ref 2) 0 1 0 0
F.103 (Freq Ref 3) 1 1 0 0
F.104 (Freq Ref 4) 0 0 1 0
F.105 (Freq Ref 5) 1 0 1 0
F.106 (Freq Ref 6) 0 1 1 0
F.107 (Freq Ref 7) 1 1 1 0
F.108 (Freq Ref 8) 0 0 0 1
F.109 (Freq Ref 9) 1 0 0 1
F.110 (Freq Ref 10) 0 1 0 1
F.111 (Freq Ref 11) 1 1 0 1
F.112 (Freq Ref 12) 0 0 1 1
F.113 (Freq Ref 13) 1 0 1 1
F.114 (Freq Ref 14) 0 1 1 1
F.115 (Freq Ref 15) 1 1 1 1

Note ! “Freq sel 1 ... 4” are functios that can be associated to any of the drive digital inputs.

The following figure shows the setting of a 8 Multispeed control.

Freq

Selectable through
“MltFreq Channel 1” (F.060)
“MltFreq Channel 2“ (F.061) Freq ref 3

Freq ref 4
Freq ref 2
Freq ref 5
Freq ref 1
Freq ref 6
Freq ref 0

Freq ref 7
t

Freq sel 1

Freq sel 2

Freq sel 3

CMD_RUN
Figure 7.5.3: Multispeed Frequencies

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 129

 Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.100 Frequency ref 0 (****) -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 311
F.101 Frequency ref 1 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 312
F.102 Frequency ref 2 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 313
F.103 Frequency ref 3 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 314
F.104 Frequency ref 4 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 315
F.105 Frequency ref 5 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 316
F.106 Frequency ref 6 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 317
F.107 Frequency ref 7 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 318
F.108 Frequency ref 8 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 319
F.109 Frequency ref 9 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 320
F.110 Frequency ref 10 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 321
F.111 Frequency ref 11 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 322
F.112 Frequency ref 12 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 323
F.113 Frequency ref 13 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 324
F.114 Frequency ref 14 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 325
F.115 Frequency ref 15 0 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 326

F.116 Jog frequency

It is the frequency reference for the JOG speed.
Jog command is given through a digital input programmed as “Jog”, see par. 7.4. Jog command has lower
priority than Run command. Therefore, if both commands are active, a normal Run will be executed.

The setting of the JOG reference value, can be either positive or negative.
Hardware Reverse command (code 2 of digital input) can be used to reverse the motor rotation even during
Jog.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.116 Jog frequency 1 -F.020 F.020 Hz 0.1 327

Ramp Configuration
During normal drive operation, a ramp generator is used to ramp the drive output frequency up or down to a
programmed setpoint.
It is possible to temporarily freeze the ramp generator output, by using a digital input programmed as “Ramp
enabled” (DI_Ramp Enable = 0), see 7.4 paragraph, I.000.
It is also possible to force to zero the ramp generator input, programming a digital input as “Zero Ref”, see 7.4
paragraph, I.000.
When “DI_ZeroRef=1”, motor will stop following the standard drive ramp time; the drive will remain enabled
until a STOP command is given.

Zero Ref

DI_Ramp Enable

Ramp Output
(Motor speed)
Figure 7.5.4: Ramp sequences

130 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 DI Zero Ref DI Ramp Enable
Ramp Generator
0 1

Frequency Reference 1
(set-point) 0

Z-1

Accel time Decel time

CMD_FastStop

Multi-Ramp

CMD_JOG

DI Ramp Sel 0 DI Ramp Sel 1

Figure 7.5.5: Block diagram of ramp generation

F.200 Ramps resolution

It defines the range and the accuracy of ramp time settings.

F.201 Acc time 1 (Acceleration time 1)

F.202 Dec time 1 (Deceleration time 1)

F.203 Acc time 2 (Acceleration time 2)

F.204 Dec time 2 (Deceleration time 2)

F.205 Acc time 3 (Acceleration time 3)

F.206 Dec time 3 / FS (Deceleration time 3)

F.207 Acc time 4 (Acceleration time 4)

F.208 Dec time 4 (Deceleration time 4)

Ramp acceleration and deceleration times are used to avoid abrupt changes in the inverter output frequency
that may cause mechanical shocks, excessive motor current and excessive DC-bus voltage. Acceleration
times (F.201, F.203, F.205, F.207) are expressed as the time that is needed to ramp up the frequency from 0 to
maximum value specified by Max ref freq (F.020). Conversely, deceleration times (F.202, F.204, F.206, F.208)
are expressed as time needed to ramp down the frequency from the maximum value specified by Max ref
freq (F.020) to zero.
Each of the 4 available ramp sets can be selected by using one or two digital inputs programmed as Ramp
sel (see par. 7.4, I.000) .

The following table describes the ramp selection process:

Active Ramp time Ramp sel 1 Ramp sel 2

F.201 (Acc time 1) 0 0
F.202 (Dec time 1)
F.203 (Acc time 2) 1 0
F.204 (Dec time 2)
F.205 (Acc time 3) 0 1
F.206 (Dec time 3)
F.207 (Acc time 4) 1 1
F.208 (Dec time 4)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 131

 Note ! When the JOG function is activated, Acc time 4 (F.207) and Dec time 4 (F.208) are automatically selected.
When the “FAST STOP” is activated (through digital input command, see par. 7.4, I.000), the function is executed with
the DEC TIME 3.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.200 Ramp resolution [0] 0.01s From 0.01s to 99.99s 1 0 2 328
[1] 0.1s From 0.1s to 999.99s
[2] 1s From 1s to 9999s
F.201 Acc time 1 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 329
F.202 Dec time 1 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 330
F.203 Acc time 2 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 331
F.204 Dec time 2 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 332
F.205 Acc time 3 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 333
F.206 Dec time 3 / FS 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 334
F.207 Acc time 4 / Jog 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 335
F.208 Dec time 4 / Jog 5 0.1(***) 999.9(***) sec 0.1 (***) 336
(***) value depends on the setting of F.200 parameter.

F.250 Ramp S-shape

The S-shaped ramp can be used to obtain a smooth behaviour of the system at the beginning and at the end
of the acceleration and deceleration.
The ramp time, intended as the time needed for accelerating from zero to the maximum frequency F.020, is
given by the sum of the linear ramp time in use and the S-shape time F.250.

F.250 F.250 F.250 F.250

t
ACC TIME DEC TIME

Figure 7.5.6: Ramp S-shape

Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.250 Ramp S-shape 0 0 10 sec 0.1 337

F.260 Estens Rampe src (Ramp extension source)

Any of the Analog Inputs can be used to extend the programmed ramp time
This extension will change linearly according to the value applied on the Analog Input.
The programmed ramp times are multiplied by a factor ranging from 1.0, when the Analog Input is less than
equal to 10%, to 10.0, when the Analog Input is 100%.

The parameter select the source from where this function is provided and controlled.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.260 Ramp extens src [0] Null 0 0 2 338
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)

132 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Jump Frequencies

F.270 Jump amplitude

F.271 Jump frequency1

F.272 Jump frequency2

In a system composed by motor and drive, at certain frequencies values, it is possible to meet the generation
of noisy vibrations, caused by mechanical resonances.
Through the parameters F.271 and F.272, it is possible to specify two frequencies that are forbidden for in-
verter operation.
The parameter F.270 defines the band of the forbidden zone.

Freq Reference Out

F.270 F.270
F.272

F.270
F.271, F272
F.270 F.270
F.271

Freq Reference In
Figure 7.5.7: Jump Frequencies

When the frequency reference is set to a value within the forbidden band, the frequency output assumes the
following behavior.

Example:

A) Increasing the reference from values lower than F.271

F.271 = 30Hz (first forbidden frequency threshold)
F.270 = 1Hz (forbidden band: 29Hz….31Hz)
Setting of frequency reference = 29,5Hz
Frequency output = 29Hz
Setting of frequency reference = 30,5Hz
Frequency output = 29Hz

B) Decreasing the reference from values higher than F.271

F.271 = 30Hz (first forbidden frequency threshold)
F.270 = 1Hz (tolerance band: 29Hz….31Hz)
Setting of frequency reference = 30,5Hz
Frequency output = 31Hz
Setting of frequency reference = 29,5Hz
Frequency output = 31Hz

The user can set any frequency reference, but if its value is within the forbidden range, the inverter will main-
tain automatically the speed out of the limit of the tolerance band.

During the ramp execution the forbidden frequencies have no influence, so the output frequency will be lin-
early generated.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
F.270 Jump amplitude 0 0 100 Hz 0.1 339
F.271 Jump frequency 1 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 340
F.272 Jump frequency 2 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 341

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 133

134
Commands

D101
Dig Inp Term

Terminals
7.6 Menu P - PARAMETERS

Dig Inp Exp Term P000

Command Source

d121
d100
0 KEYPAD

1 TERMINAL
To internal decodification
TERMINAL of the regulation
2

I400
OR VIRTUAL

Mask
3 SERIAL

I410
4 CONTROL WORD

d120

d102
Dig Inp Virtual

H000

Figure 7.6.1: Basic Commands Logic Selection

Dig Inp Exp Virtual

H001

From Serial Link

d122

ADV80 • Instruction Manual

ADV80 • Instruction Manual
0 : Not active
P003
P000 1 : Active (Default)
CMD
RUN KEYPAD
SOURCE
RUN Safe Start
R
0 KEYPAD Logic
0 = RUN/REV Cmd mode STOP
S 1 TERM.
P001
2 TERMINAL
OR VIRTUAL
3 SERIAL CMD_RUN

d101
4 RESERVED CMD_REV
DI RUN/FWD RUN
Dig Inp Term CMD_JOG
DI REV
COMMAND LOGIC REV CMD_MOTOR DCB
DT_STOP
0 KEYPAD CMD_PICKUP

Terminals
P000 DI JOG JOG
Dig Inp Exp Term Decodification 1 TERM. CMD_RESET
Command Source MOTOR DCB MOTOR DCB 2 TERMINAL
OR VIRTUAL
PICKUP PICKUP

d121
Dig Inp 3 SERIAL

d100
0 KEYPAD
ALARM RESET ALARM RESET
4 RESERVED
1 TERMINAL ENABLE_NC
ENABLE
2 TERMINAL ENABLE_NO

I400
OR VIRTUAL Dig Inp Exp

Mask
3 SERIAL RUN

I410
4 (RESERVED) REV
FRQ SEL1

d120

d102
JOG

MOTORDCB
Dig Inp Virtual To drive

H000
regulation PICKUP
FRQ SEL..
ALARM RESET
(See Digital

Figure 7.6.2: Main Commands Logic Selection

Serial link commands

Dig Inp Exp Virtual Input List)

H001
ENABLE

From Serial Link

d122

135
P.000 Cmd source sel (Command source selection)
It defines the source of the main commands (START and STOP) and auxiliary commands (REVERSE, EN-
ABLE, DC-BRAKE, etc.).

P.000 = 0 START & STOP via keypad, auxliliary commands via digital input terminals.
In this configuration, START and STOP commands are given through the keypad buttons.
START botton STOP botton

In order to start the motor, the Digital Input 1 (terminal 8), factory programmed as RUN, must be asserted.
If the Digital input programmed as RUN is not active, the motor will STOP with the deceleration ramp time in use.
All auxliliary commands are given via digital input terminals.

P.000 = 1
START & STOP and auxliliary commands via digital input terminals.
In this configuration, all drive commands are given through the digital input terminals.
By default, The START command i given by asserting the Digital Input 1 (terminal 8), factory
set as RUN, while the STOP command is given by de-asserting the same Digital Input.
It is possible to use several other configurations for giving START, STOP and REV commands
from digital input terminals. See chapter PARAMETERS, section Commads, for details.

Note ! At power on, the motor will not start until a positive transition is seen on the Digital Input programmed as RUN (edge
sensitive). See description of parameter P.003 for further details.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

P.000 = 2 START & STOP and auxliliary commands via terminals or virtual digital inputs.
In this configuration, any drive command may come either from digital input terminals or from
virtual digital inputs. Virtual digital inputs are used to give commands from serial line or field-
bus. Refer to chapter INTERFACE, section Enabling Virtual I/O, for explanation about the
use of virtual commands.

Note ! At power on, the motor will not start until a positive transition is seen on the Digital Input programmed as RUN (edge
sensitive). See description of parameter P.003 for further details.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

P.000 = 3 START & STOP and auxiliary commands via serial line.
All drive commands are given through via serial line or filedbus, by using dedicated com-
mands. Refer to chapter HIDDEN, section Commands, for a complete description of the
available commands.

Note ! No interlock from digital input terminals is provided, when using commands from serial line.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details.

P.000 = 4 START & STOP and auxiliary commands via Profidrive control word.
In this configuration, all commands are given through the Profidrive standard control word.
The optional ProfiBus SBI card is needed.

Note ! No interlock from digital input terminals is provided, when using commands from Profidrive.

Note ! Depressing the STOP key on the keypad will cause an emergency stop of the motor. See description of parameter
P.005 for details..

136 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Local/Remote command through digital input
It is possible to change the source of the main commands via digital input. In order to do so, one of the digital
inpiuts has to be programmed with the code “[29]Local/Remote”.

The following figure shows the selection logic for the source of START and STOP commands:

Command source
[0] Keypad selector P000 [1] Local

[0] Remote To drive command logic

[1] Terminal
---- Local/Remote selector
[3] Serial (digital input)

When the selector (dedicated digital input) is 0 (Remote), START and STOP commands come from the source
specified by parameter P.000.
When the selector (dedicated digital input) is 1 (Local), START and STOP commands come from the keypad,
regardless of what is set into parameter P.000.
The status of the digital selector is read by the drive only when the output of the inverter bridge is disabled. As
a result, it is not possible to switch between local and remote source for main commands while the motor is
running.

P.001 RUN/REV cmd mode (RUN input configuration)

Definition of the RUN and Reverse logic control:

P.001 = 0 Run command and Reverse command.

DI RUN/FWD

DI REV
(CMD_REV)

CMD_RUN

Motor Speed

Figure 7.6.3: P.000=0 start sequences

P.001 = 1 Run forward command and Run reverse command.

DI RUN/FWD

DI REV
(CMD_REV)

CMD_RUN

Motor Speed

Figure 7.6.4: P.000=1 start sequences

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 137

 P.001 = 2 Three-wires controll. Run command, Stop command and Reverse command.

DI RUN/FWD

DI STOP

DI REV
(CMD_REV)

CMD_RUN

Motor Speed

Figure 7.6.5: P.000=2 start sequences

P.002 Reversal enable

P.002 = 0
Motor reverse rotation not enabled.

P.002 = 1
Motor reverse rotation enabled.

The function, associated to P.002, will be applied to any kind of REV logical command (digital input, negative
reference and serial line).

P.003 Safety
The parameter defines the RUN (or REVERSE) command behavior at the drive power on:

P.003 = 0 Interlock safety disabled.

At the drive power on, the starting of the motor is allowed when the RUN command is already present on
terminal strip.

P.003 = 1 Interlock safety enabled.

At the drive power on, the starting of the motor is not allowed when the RUN command is already present on
terminal strip (Interlock state).
The motor can be started by de-asserting and then re-asserting the RUN command.

By monitoring a digital output programmed as “Ready”, it is possible to know whether the drive is ready to
start or is in the interlocked condition defined above.

P.004 Stop mode

Motor stop control function.

P.004 = 0
Giving a Stop command, the motor will decelerate down to 0 Hz, following the ramp in use. As soon as the
inverter output frequency reaches 0 Hz, the drive is disabled.

P.004 = 1
Giving a Stop command, the drive output will be immediately disabled, and the motor will coast to stop.

Note ! Regardless of the setting of P.004, the drive output can be disabled at any time by de-asserting a digital input pro-
grammed with code “[13] Enable NO” or by asserting a digital input programmed as “[14] Enable NC”.

138 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

P.005 Stop Key Mode
Stop key configuration.

RUN/STOP
from programmed
source

STOP KEY

Motor Speed

Alarm Reset

Alarm Signal
Figure 7.6.6: Stop Key Mode sequences

P.000=0 (default configuration) main commands are coming from keypad. Therefore, the Stop key will cause
a normal stop of the motor.

P.000≠0 and P.005 = 0, pressing the Stop key will have no effect.

P.000>0 and P.005 = 1

Pressing the Stop key, the motor will execute an emergency stop, following the ramp programmed by F.206.
After the speed reaches the value zero, the drive will trip with the dedicated alarm “EMS“. An alarm reset will
be needed to restore drive operations (see paragraph 9.2).
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.000 Cmd source sel [0] Keypad 0 0 4 400
[1] Terminals
[2] Virtual
[3] Serial
[4] Control word
P.001 RUN input config [0] Run / Rev 0 0 2 401
[1] Fwd / Rev
[2] 3-Wires
P.002 Reversal enable [0] Disable 1 0 1 402
[1] Enable
P.003 Safety [0] OFF 1 0 1 403
[1] ON
P.004 Stop mode [0] Ramp to stop 0 0 1 493
[1] Coast to stop
P.005 Stop Key Mode [0] Inactive 1 0 1 496
[1] EmcStop&Al

Control Mode

P.010 Control mode (Drive control mode)

ADV80 can operate either in open loop or closed loop speed control mode.
Open loop speed control is set as default, and does not require speed feedback. The natural variation in
speed of the induction machine caused by the load, known as slip, can be compensated for by enabling the
slip compensation function (see description of P.100).
Closed loop speed control requires speed measurement from a digital encoder coupled to the motor shaft. The
optional card EXP-ENC-AGY is needed in order to read the encoder signals. The speed detected by the encoder is
fed back to a PI speed controller that regulates the inverter output frequency in order to keep the actual motor speed
under control. See Chapter 7, section “Closed loop speed control”, for a complete description of the speed regulator.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.010 Control Mode [0] V/f open loop 0 0 1 498
[1] V/f clsd loop

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 139

Power Supply

P.020 Mains voltage

Rated value of the AC input mains line to line voltage [Vrms].
The undervoltage trip function is based on this value (see also chapter PARAMETERS, function Undervolt-
age configuration).

P.021 Mains frequency

Rated value of the AC input mains frequency [Hz].
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.020 Mains voltage 380, 400, 420, 440, 460, 480 (****) 380 480 V 404
P.021 Mains frequency 50 (****) 50 60 Hz 405
60
(****) parameter value depending on drive type.

Motor Data

P.040 Motor rated curr (Motor rated current)

Rated current [Arms] of the motor at rated kilowatt/horsepower and voltage (given on the nameplate, see figure
7.6.7).
In case of control with multiple motors, enter a value equal to the sum of the rated currents of all the motors.
Do not perform any self tune.

P.041 Motor pole pairs

Pole pairs of the motor.
Starting from nameplate data, the number of pole pairs is calculated as follows:
60 [s] x f [Hz]
P= ____________
nN [rpm]

where: p = motor pole pairs

f = rated frequency of the motor (P.062)
nN = rated speed of the motor (see figure 7.6.7)
S.101 (P.062) S.100 (P.061) S.150 (P.040) S.101 (P.062) S.100 (P.061) S.150 (P.040)

Motor & Co. Motor & Co.

Type: ABCDE IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530 Type: ABCDE IEC 34-1 / VDE 0530
Motor: 3 phase 50 Hz Nr
. 12345-91 Motor: 3 phase 60 Hz Nr
. 12345-91
Rated voltage 400 V I nom 6.7 A Rated voltage 460 V I nom 2A
Rated power 3 kW Power factor 0.8 Rated power 2 Hp Power factor 0.83
Rated speed (nN) 1420 rpm Rated speed (nN) 1750 rpm Efficiency 86.5

IP54 Iso Kl F S1 IP54 Iso Kl F S1

Made in .............. Made in ..............

S.152 (P.042) S.152 (P.042)

Figure 7.6.7: Motor Nameplate (Example: kW rating for 400V motor and Hp rating for 460V motor)

Example: calculation of the pole pairs of a motor having data shown in the above 400V label.

60 [s] x f [Hz] 60 [s] x 50 [Hz]

p [polepairs] = ___________ = ______________ = 2.1
nN [rpm] 1420 [rpm]

the value to be set in the parameter P.041 is “2”.

140 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

P.042 Motor power fact (Motor power factor)
Motor power factor in rated conditions (given on the nameplate, see figure 7.6.7).

P.043 Motor stator R (Motor stator Resistance)

Ohmic value of the stator resistance of the motor.
This value will be automatically updated, after performing the self tune procedure.

P.044 Motor cooling

Setting of the type of cooling of the motor connected.

P.045 Motor thermal K (Motor thermal costant)

Thermal characteristic of the motor connected.
The data is normally provided by the motor manufacturer, as the time needed to reach the maximum tempera-
ture at rated current.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.040 Motor rated curr (*) (*) (*) A 0.1 406
P.041 Motor pole pairs (*) 1 60 407
P.042 Motor power fact (*) 0.01 1 0.01 408
P.043 Motor stator R (*) 0 99.99 ohm 0.01 409
P.044 Motor cooling [0] Natural 0 0 1 410
[1] Forced
P.045 Motor thermal K 30 1 120 min 411

V/F Curve

P.060 V/f shape

Selection of the curve for the V/f characteristic.

P.060 = 0 (Custom)
The intermediate values of voltage and frequency, are defined by the parameters P.063 and P.064 as well as
the link of the manual Boost on the characteristic.

P.061

P.063
P.120
F
P.064 P.062 F.020
Figure 7.6.8: Custom V/f shape

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 141

 P.060 = 1 (Linear )
The factory setting provides a Linear V/f characteristic, having the middle points fixed to half the values of
P.062 and P.061.
The Boost action on the V/f curve will be executed automatically.

P.061

P.061
2

P.120

F
P.062 P.062 F.020 (n)
2
Figure 7.6.9: Linear V/f shape

P.060 = 2 (Quadratic )
The Quadratic characteristic is useful when a pump or fan has to be controlled (load where the torque is pro-
portional to the speed squared).
When this ratio is selected, the middle voltage point is fixed to 0,25% of the Max output voltage, and the mid-
dle frequency point is fixed to 50% of P.062.

P.061

(P.061 x 0.25)
P.120
F
P.062 P.062 F.020
2
Figure 7.6.10: Quadratic V/f shape

P.061 Max out voltage (Maximum output voltage)

Maximum value of the voltage to be applied to the motor (normally set as the nameplate, see figure 7.6.7).

P.062 Base frequency

Rated frequency of the motor (given on the nameplate, see figure 7.6.7).
It is the frequency at which the inverter output voltage reaches the Max out voltage (P.061).

P.063 V/f interm volt (V/f intermediate voltage)

Intermediate “voltage” value of the V/f characteristic selected.

P.064 V/f interm freq (V/f intermediate frequency)

Intermediate “frequency “ value of the V/f characteristic selected.

Note ! When custom V/f shape is selected (P.060 = 0):

P.064 parameter represents the return point of the output voltage, on the linear V/f characteristic (see figure 7.6.8).

142 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.060 V/f shape [0] Custom 1 0 2 412
[1] Linear
[2] Quadratic
P.061 Max out voltage (**) 50 (**) V 1 413
P.062 Base frequency (**) 25 500 Hz 0.1 414
P.063 V/f interm volt (**) 0 P.061 V 1 415
P.064 V/f interm freq (**) 1 P.062 Hz 0.1 416

Ouput Frequency Limit

P.080 Max output freq (Maximum output frequency)

It is the maximum allowed of the output frequency of the drive, expressed as percentage of Max ref freq
(F.020).

Note ! When using slip compensation or PID speed regulation, P.080 should be set to a value higher than 100%, in order to
allow for frequency regulation also when the frequency reference approaches its maximum value, defined by Max ref
freq (F.020).

P.081 Min output freq (Minimun output frequency)

Minimum value of output frequency, under which no frequency regulation has effect.
It is expressed as percentage of Max ref freq (F.020).

The parameter is correlated to the Min ref freq (F.021). See description of parameter F.021 for further details.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.080 Max output freq 110 0 110 % of F.020 1 417
P.081 Min output freq 0.0 0.0 25.0 % of F.020 0.1 418

Slip Compensation

P.100 Slip compensat (Slip compensation)

When an induction motor is loaded, the mechanical speed of the shaft varies due to the electrical slip between sta-
tor and rotor quantities which is responsible for the generation of torque.
In order to keep the shaft speed constant, the slip compensation function of the drive can be used.
The compensation is performed by varying the inverter output frequency of an amount that is calculated from
inverter output current and motor parameters. therefore, in oder to obtain best results, motor nameplate data has to
be properly set, and the correct value of the stator resistance (P.043) has to be either edited or measured by self-
tuning (S.901). Tuning of the slip compensation function is performed by editing the parameter P.100. If P.100 = 0.0
(default), the slip compensation assumes the nominal value, calculated from nameplate data.
P.100 = 0.0 (value by default), the slip compensation has been deactivated.
P.100 =100.0, the slip compensation assumes the nominal value calculated from the motor characteristics card.

Note ! The Slip compensation must be disabled when a multiple motor connection is being used.

Note ! In order to use the automatic boost, a correct value of the motor stator resistance is necessary. This value can be
entered manually in par. S.153, or can be automatically measured by executing the selftunung procedure (S.901).

P.101 Slip comp filter (Slip compensation filter)

It is the response time (in seconds) of the slip compensation function.
The lower the setting of this parameter, the quicker will be the response od slip compensation. However, set-
ting too low may give rise to undesired oscillations of the speed after sudden load variations.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.100 Slip compensat 0 0 250 % 1 419
P.101 Slip comp filter 0.1 0 10 sec 0.1 420

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 143

Boost

P.120 Manual boost [%]

The resistive impedance of the stator windings causes a voltage drop within the motor, which result in a reduc-
tion of torque in the lower speed range.
Compensation for this effect can be made by boosting the output voltage.

P.061

P.120

F
P.064 P.062 F.020 (n)
Figure 7.6.11: Manual Boost Voltage

The setting is in percentage of the Max out voltage (P.061).

P.121 Boost factor src (Factor extension source of manual Boost)

The manual Boost level can be linearly regulated by any of the Analog input of the drive.
The regulation of the Boost level will be between 0% (An Inp = 0%) and 100% of the value set in P.120 (An Inp
= 100%).

This parameter selects the Analog input to be used for boost modulation.

P.122 Auto boost en (Automatic boost enabling)

By enabling the automatic boost calculation, the drive will optimize the V/f profile in order to obtain constant
flux level inside the motor over the whole operating speed range. This will improve torque availability at low
speed, increasing the starting torque of the drive. The drive uses the stator resistance of the motor in use (ei-
ther set in parameter P.043 or measured by the autotuning procedure C.100) and the current measured at the
inverter output terminals to calculate the necessary voltage boost for the V/f profile.

Note ! Performance achievable with the automatic voltage boost depends on motor parameters. Therefore, in order to obtain
best performance, motor nameplate data should be set correctly and the stator resistance value should be measured
by running the autotuning procedure.

Note ! Automatic boost calculation must be disabled when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter.

In some applications, it can be necessary to overflux the machine in order to obtain even more starting torque.
In those cases, the manual boost (set by P.120) can be used in conjunction to the automatic boost. The result-
ing voltage boost will be the sum of the two contributions.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.120 Manual boost [%] 1 0 25 % of P.061 1 421
P.121 Boost factor src [0] Null 0 0 2 422
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)
P.122 Auto boost en [0] Disable 0 0 1 423
[1] Enable

144 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Automatic Flux Regulation

P.140 Magn curr gain (Magnetizing current gain)

The magnetizing current of an induction motor is approximately equal to the no-load current value at rated
voltage and rated frequency.
By properly setting the parameter P.140, the magnetizing current of the motor and, as a consequence, the mo-
tor flux, is controlled to its nominal value, calculated from nameplate data.
The main benefit is a higher torque availability at low speed.
An excessive value for the gain P.140 may cause undesired oscillation.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.140 Magn curr gain 0 0 100 % 0.1 424

Anti Oscillation Function

P.160 Osc damping gain (Anti Oscillation damping gain)

The parameter (current symmetry) is used to eliminate any oscillation or beat in the motor current resulting
from tolerances or configurations capable of generating oscillations within the Inverter/cable/ motor system.
If oscillations arise, it is advised to progressively increase the value of P.160, until the oscillation is damped.
Excessive values of P.160 may cause instability.
The frequency operation range is around 10Hz…30Hz .
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.160 Osc damping gain 0 0 100 1 425

Closed Loop Speed Control

Tight control of the speed of the motor is possible, if a digital encoder is coupled to the shaft. The speed devia-
tion is fed to a PI controller, which outputs the necessary correction for the inverter frequency command, in
order to compensate for the slip caused by the load.
Closed loop speed control must be enabled by setting the parameter:
P.010 Control Mode = [1] V/f Clsd Loop

Note ! Closed loop speed control is only possible if the drive terminals are programmed as described in chapter 5.3. Param-
eter related to the encoder configuration (I.501 through I.505) must be properly set, prior to enable closed loop speed
control.

Note ! In order to obtain good dynamics, it is strongly recommended to use a two-channels digital encoder with at least
512ppr.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 145

 fref + fout
+

PI Regulator
+ e
- kp. e + kl  e  dt

fenc kp kl

Gain Profile
P.170 kp
P.171 kl
P.172
P.173

+
P.174 P.175
fenc
+ +
+
Slip limits
HLim HLim
P.176
-P.177

-1Hz 1Hz
fenc
LLim
P.177
-P.176 LLim

Figure 7.6.12: Speed control structure

Proportional and integral gains can be scheduled as a function of the speed, as described in Fig.7.6.12.

The maximum amount of correction of the PI regulator is defined by the user through parameters P.176 and
P.177. If the motor is transferring power to the load (motoring), the inverter frequency cannot exceed the fol-
lowing value:
F.020 [Hz]
|fout[Hz] < |fenc[Hz]| + P.176 x _________
100.0
If the motor is draining power from the load (braking), the inverter frequency must satisfy the following:
F.020 [Hz]
|fout[Hz] > |fenc[Hz]| + P.177 x _________
100.0
If the encoder frequency is within ±1.0Hz, linear interpolation is performed between motoring and braking
limits, as described in Fig. 7.6.12.

P.170 SpdPgainL (Speed regulator proportional gain at low speed)

Proportional gain of the PI speed regulator, applied when the speed is below the threshold defined by P.174
(see Fig.7.6.12).

P.171 SpdIgainL (Speed regulator integral gain at low speed)

Integral gain of the PI speed regulator, applied when the speed is below the threshold defined by P.174 (see
Fig.7.6.12).

P.172 SpdPgainH (Speed regulator proportional gain at high speed)

Proportional gain of the PI speed regulator, applied when the speed is above the threshold defined by P.175
(see Fig.7.6.12).

P.173 SpdIgainH (Speed regulator integral gain at high speed)

Integral gain of the PI speed regulator, applied when the speed is above the threshold defined by P.175 (see
Fig.7.6.12).

146 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

P.174 SpdGainThrL (Speed regulator gain scheduling low threshold)

P.175 SpdGainThrH (Speed regulator gain scheduling high threshold)

The proportional and integral gains of the PI speed regulator equal P.170 and P.171 respectively, when the
speed is below the threshold P.174. The gains equal P.172 and P.173 respectively, when the speed is above
the threshold P.175. If the speed is within the two thresholds, the PI gains are calculated by means of linear
interpolation (see Fig. 7.6.12).

P.176 MaxSlipMotor (Maximum amount of allowed slip during motoring)

The parameter defines the maximum amount of compensation allowed while motoring (see Fig. 7.6.12). It is
expressed in percentage of parameter F.020.

P.177 MaxSlipRegen (Maximum amount of allowed slip during regeneration)

The parameter defines the maximum amount of compensation (negative) allowed while braking (see Fig.
7.6.12). It is expressed in percentage of parameter F.020.

P.178 SpdPI lim FacSrc (Speed PI limits factor source)

Each of the analog inputs can be used to modify the output limits of the speed regulator. The resulting limits
will be zero when the analog input is 0% and will increase with the analog input, assuming the values deter-
mined by P.176 and P.177 when the analog input is 100%.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.170 SpdPgainL 20.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 501
P.171 SpdIgainL 10.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 502
P.172 SpdPgainH 20.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 503
P.173 SpdIgainH 10.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 504
P.174 SpdGainThrL 0.0 0.0 F.020 Hz 0.1 507
P.175 SpdGainThrH 0.0 0.0 F.020 Hz 0.1 508
P.176 SpdRegHLim 10.0 0.0 100.0 % of F.020 0.1 509
P.177 SpdRegLLim -10.0 -100.0 0.0 % of F.020 0.1 510
P.178 SRegLimFkSrc [0] Null 0 0 3 511
[1] Analog inp 1
[2] Analog inp 2

SW Current Clamp

P.180 SW clamp enable (Software current clamp enabling)

To optimize the performance of the inverter, it is necessary to be able to accelerate and decelerate the motor
with the maximum current that the inverter can supply.
The setting of very short ramp times, that would cause the output current to exceed the limits of the drive,
activates the “Current Clamp”circuit, preventing the drive from tripping for overcurrent (OC).

It is possible to disable the clamp function by setting this parameter to zero.

P.181 Clamp alm HldOff (Hold off time for the current clamp alarmp)
f the drive stays at “Active Clamp” status during the time established for this parameter the “LF Fault Limit”
alarm is activated.
If the value 25.5 [s] is selected for this parameter the alarms are not activated.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.180 SW clamp enable [0] Disable (not active) 1 0 1 426
[1] Enable (active)
P.181 Clamp alm HldOff 25.5 0.0 25.5 sec 0.1 512

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 147

Current Limit
The drive is provided with a function for an active limitation of the current.
It is possible to select different current limits, during the ramps or at steady state.
Current limitation is achieved by a regulating the inverter output frequency (see P.206 parameter).

P.200 Ramp Currlim Mode (Current limitation mode)

P.200 = 0 Function disabled.

P.200 = 1 Enabling of the current limit control during the ramps. Current is limited using an active PI regula-
tion of the inverter output frequency.

P.200 = 2 Enabling of current control by ramp freezing.

Current is limited by temporarily freezing the acceleration ramp.
During speed acceleration or deceleration, if the current value exceeds the setting of P.201 (Cur-
rent limit during the ramp), the ramp stage will be momentary blocked.
As soon as the current returns below the limit, the ramp is restarted with.
As a result, the actual ramp time is lengthened by the execution of this control.

P.201 Accel curr lim (Current limit in acceleration ramp)

Value of the current limit during acceleration ramp.
It is expressed as percentage of the nominal current of the drive (see also parameter d.950, chapter DIS-
PLAY).

P.202 En lim in steady (Enabling limit in steady)

P.202 = 0 Function disabled.
P.201 = 1 Enabling of the current limit control in steady state.
The digital entry programmed with the value “[30] En Lim Steady” conditions the state of the current limit when
in stationary mode. Digital entry= 0 (deactivated limit), digital input = 1 (activated limit).
If the function is not programmed in the digital input, it will be controlled through the P.202 parameter only.

P.202 Digital input = [30] Stationary limit status

0 0 Disabled
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Disabled
1 1 Enabled

P.203 Curr lim steady (Current limit in steady)

Value of the current limit in steady state.
It is expressed as percentage of the nominal current of the drive (see also parameter d.950, chapter DIS-
PLAY).

P.204 Curr ctrl P-gain (Current control proportional gain)

Proportional gain of the current regulator.
• a setting too low could cause a slow regulation response.
• a setting too high could cause oscillations of the system.

P.205 Curr ctrl I-gain (Current control integral gain)

Integral gain of the current regulation.
• a setting too low could cause a slow reaction on the regulation response.
• a setting too high could can cause oscillations of the system.

148 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

P.206 Curr ctr feedfwd (Current control feed forward)
As described in the figure below, the setting of the feed-forward, will prevent tripping of the drive for overcur-
rent (OC) during fast acceleration of the load.
When the current exceeds the value of Lim Curr in acc, a quick frequency step (percentage of the motor
rated slip), is automatically subtracted from the reference.
This function operates only during the ramp time (not in steady state)..

n
Ramp Profile
Set

P.206

t
I

P.201

t
Figure 7.6.13: Current Limit Control in Ramp

A signalling of the “current limit” condition is available on the digital output as “Current limit”.
A signalling of the “overcurrent” condition is available on the digital output as “Alarm state”.

P.207 Decel curr lim (Current limit in deceleration ramp)

Value of the current limit during the deceleration ramp.
It is expressed as percentage of the nominal current of the drive (see also parameter d.950, chapter DIS-
PLAY).
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.200 Ramp Currlim Mode [0] None 0 0 2 427
[1] PI Limit regulator
[2] On/Off Ramp
P.201 Accel curr lim (*) 20 (*) % of I nom 1 428
P.202 En lim in steady [0] Disable 0 0 1 429
[1] Enable
P.203 Curr lim steady (*) 20 (*) % of I nom 1 430
P.204 Curr ctrl P-gain 10.0 0.1 100.0 % 0.1 431
P.205 Curr ctrl I-gain 30.0 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 432
P.206 Curr ctr feedfwd 0 0 250 % 1 433
P.207 Decel curr lim (*) 20 (*) % of Inom 1 494

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 149

DC Link Limit
The function controls the voltage level of the DC link bus capacitor.
During fast deceleration, if the load has a big inertia, the DC link value can suddenly increase close to the alarm
threshold. In this case, the output frequency is controlled keeping the voltage level within safe values.
Consequently, the deceleration ramp time is automatically extended, in order to achieve the deceleration of the load,
avoiding an eventual block for “overvoltage” (OV alarm).
As for the current limiter, the DC-Link controller is PI-based, with the addition of a programmable feed forward term.

P.220 En DC link ctrl (Enabling DC link control)

P.220 = 0 Function disabled.
P.220 = 1 Enabling of the DC link control by means of PI regulation of the inverter output frequency.
P.220 = 2 Enabling of the DC link control by ramp freezing.
During fast deceleration, if the DC link level increases close to the alarm threshold, the ramp stage
is momentarily blocked.
As soon as the DC link level returns within the internal safety values, the ramp is restarted.
As a result, the ramp time is lengthened by the execution of this control.

P.221 DC-lnk ctr Pgain (DC link control proportional gain)

Proportional gain of the DC link control regulation.
- a setting too low could cause a slow regulation response.
- a setting too high could cause oscillations of the system.

P.222 DC-lnk ctr Igain (DC link control integral gain)

Integral gain of the DC link control regulation.
- a setting too low can cause a slow regulation response.
- a setting too high can cause oscillations of the DC link.

P.223 DC-link ctr FF (DC link control feed forward)

This is the setting of the feed-forward for the DC bus voltage control function.
As the DC link level increases above a safety threshold, a quick frequency step (percentage of the motor slip)
is automatically added to the reference. The voltage level decreases toward its rated value. The system will
be ready to have effect, when the load generates a DC-link voltage variations to low values near the alarm
threshold..

Ramp Profile
P.223
Set

t
V Dclink

0V Thr
Safety
RATED
Dclink

t
Figure 7.6.14: DC Link Voltage Control

150 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 A signaling of the “DC link” status is available on the digital output I.000 ... I.103 as “DC bus limit”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.220 En DC link ctrl [0] None 0 0 2 434
[1] PI Limit regulator
[2] On/Off Ramp
PP.221 DC-lnk ctr Pgain 3.0 0.1 100.0 % 0.1 435
P.222 DC-lnk ctr Igain 100 0.0 100.0 % 0.1 436
P.223 DC-link ctr FF 0 0 250 % 1 437

Over Torque Alarm Configuration

The torque of the motor is calculated by the drive, as a function of onverter output current and motor param-
eters.
The behaviour of the drive in case of detection of an excessive torque can be configured by the following
parameters.

P.240 OverTorque mode

It defines the behaviour of the drive in case of overtorque detection.

P.240 = 0 Overtorque signalling during ramps and at steady state. No alarm will be generated.
P.240 = 1 Overtorque signalling only at steady state. No alarm will be generated.
P.240 = 2 Overtorque alarm and signalling during ramps and at steady state.
P.240 = 3 Overtorque alarm and signalling only at steady state.

P.241 OT curr lim thr (Overtorque current limit threshold)

Overtorque signalling threshold.
It is expressed as percentage of the Motor rated curr (P.040).

P.242 OT level fac src (Overtorque level factor source)

The overtorque level can be linearly regulated through an analog reference signal.
The regulation of this level will be performed between 0% (Analog input = 0%) and 100% of the percentage
value set by P.241 (Analog input = 100%).

This parameter selects the Analog input that has to be used for overtorque threshold modulation.

P.242 = 0 Null
P.242 = 1 Analog Inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
P.242 = 2 Analog Inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)

P.243 OT signal delay (Overtorque signalling delay)

Delay time for the alarm signalling.

The overtorque alarm will be displayed with the message “Ot”

A signalling of the “overtorque” condition is available on the digital output as “Out trq>thr”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.240 OverTorque mode [0] No Alm,Chk on 0 0 0 3 438
[1] No Alm,Chk ss
[2] Alm always
[3] Alm steady st
P.241 OT curr lim thr 110 20 200 % 1 439
P.242 OT level fac src [0] Null 0 0 3 440
[1] Analog inp 1
[2] Analog inp 2
[3] Reserved
P.243 OT signal delay 0.1 0.1 25 sec 0.1 441

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 151

Motor Overload Configuration

P.260 Motor OL prot en (Motor overload protection enabling)

Enabling of the motor thermal protection.
The control is performed as an I2t, calculated on the basis of the setting of
Motor rated curr (P.040) and Motor thermal K (P.045).
An overload of the motor, will cause the intervention of the alarm “Motor overload”.

The parameter d.052 (menu DISPLAY), is the motor overload level.

A value of 100% represent the threshold for the alarm.

The alarm will be displayed with the message “OLM”

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.260 Motor OL prot en [0] Disable 1 0 1 444
[1] Enable

BU Configuration

P.280 BU Config (Braking unit configuration)

The internal brake unit can be disabled by setting this parameter to zero. This is useful when an external BU is
used for controlling the DC-link voltage or when several drives share the same DC-link and only one of them is in
charge for DC-link voltage control.
Also, thermal protection of the braking resistance can be enabled by proper setting of this parameter. Such a pro-
tection requires proper setting of the parameters related to the braking resistor in use (P.281, P.282, P.283). When
thermal protection is enabled, an overheating of the braking resistor will trip the drive for “Braking resistor overload”.
P.280 = 0 Internal BU is disabled.
P.280 = 1 Internal BU is enabled; Thermal protection of braking resistor is disabled.
P.280 = 2 Internal BU is enabled; Thermal protection of braking resistor is enabled.

Note ! The internal brake unit, when enabled, will operate even if the drive is disabled. Internal brake unit will not operate if
any of the drive alarms are active..

P.281 Brake res value (Braking resistor value)

Rated Ohmic value of the braking resistance connected in use.

P.282 Brake res power (Braking resistor power)

Rated power of the braking resistance connected in use.

P.283 Br res thermal K (Braking resistor thermal costant)

Thermal constant of the braking resistance connected in use.
This data is expressed in seconds, and it is normally provided by the manufacturer of the device, as the time
that the resistor takes to reach its nominal working temperature while dissipating its rated power.

For further information about the use of braking resistors and braking devices, refer to chapter 5.8.

The parameter d.053 (menu DISPLAY), is the braking resistor overload level.
A value of 100% represent the threshold for the alarm.
The alarm will be displayed with the message “OLr”
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.280 BU config [0] BU disabled 1 0 2 445
[1] BU en OL dis
[2] BU en OL en
P.281 Brake res value (*) 1 250 ohm 1 446
P.282 Brake res power (*) 0.01 25 kW 0.01 447
P.283 Br res thermal K (*) 1 250 sec 1 448

152 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

DC Brake Configuration
The drive provides as a standard a set of parameters for the DC braking management.
With this function the drive injects a DC current into the motor windings, producing a braking torque.
DC braking can be useful to brake the motor around the zero speed, either at START or at STOP, or to main-
tain the motor shaft locked for a short time.
It should not be used to obtain an intermediate braking.

The parameters described below, allow to fully configure the DC-brake function.

At every DC braking command, the message “DCB” will appear on the display.

P.300 DC braking level

Setting of the DC current level to be injected on the motor phases.
It is a percentage of the Motor rated current (P.040).

P.301 DCB lev fac src (DC Braking level factor source)
Each of the Analog inputs can be used to modify the current level used for DC braking.
The regulation of the DC braking level will be between 0% (Analog input = 0%) and 100% of the value set by
P.300 (Analog input = 100%).

This parameter specifies which Analog input has to be used for DC braking current level modulation.

P.302 DC braking freq (DC Braking frequency)

It defines the frequency threshold, at which the DC braking will be activated at STOP.

P.303 DC braking start

Defines the DC braking duration in seconds, at START (RUN or Reverse).
The motor will be locked until this time is elapsed.

P.304 DC braking stop

Defines the DC braking duration, in seconds, at STOP (RUN or Reverse commands released and frequency
below the threshold defined by P.302).

Note ! • a DC brake command can be carried out also via digital inputs (see chapter INTERFACE, section Digital inputs). In
this case a DC brake will be possible at any speed, no matter if the drive is in STOP or START condition (digital input
as DC brake).
• the injection of direct current remains active until the DC Brake command is removed.
• a momentary disabling of the DC braking function is possible via digital input set as DC brake en, (see par. 7.4,
I.000).

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.300 DC braking level 0 0 100 % of I nom 1 449
P.301 DCB lev fac src [0] Null 0 0 3 450
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)
[3] Reserved
P.302 DC braking freq 0 0 500 Hz 0.1 451
P.303 DC braking start 0 0 60 sec 0.1 452
P.304 DC braking stop 0 0 60 sec 0.1 453

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 153

Autocapture function
The Autocapture function, allows to engage a motor already running.
Without using this function, the connection of an inverter to a rotating motor could cause, the trip of the in-
verter for overvoltage or overcurrent, soon after the enable.
When the function is enabled, the inverter frequency output will be forced to match the motor speed, avoiding
trips.
Main uses are:
• Restart after an inverter alarm
• Pumps and fans rotated by fluids
• Engage of a motor running directly under the mains

P.320 Autocapture mode

P.320 = 0 Function disabled

P.320 = 1 1st RUN Only

The engaging of the motor is carried out only once, when the first valid RUN command is given after drive
power on.

P.320 = 2 Always
The engaging of the motor is carried out at every valid RUN command.

Note ! The function can be enabled also through the digital inputs (see chapter INTERFACE, section Digital inputs).
In this case it will be possible to activate Autocapture at any time the command is applied (regarless of the setting of
P.320).

P.321 Autocapture Ilim (Autocapture current limit)

During the Autocapture procedure, the inverter adjust progressively the voltage and the output frequency so
that the absorbed current does not overcomes the value set in P.321.
For a proper setting, the value of this parameter must be higher than the no-load current of the motor in use
(d.950, % of inverter nominal current).

P.322 Demagnetiz time (Autocapture demagnetization time)

Delay for the beginning of the Autocapture function.
It is the time necessary for the demagnetization of the motor. Setting too short, can cause the tripping of
“Overcurrent” alarm.

P.323 Autocap f scan t (Autocapture frequency scanning time)

Ramp time for the frequency scanning.
The initial frequency is determined by the setting of parameter P.325.

P.324 Autocap V scan t (Autocapture voltage scanning time)

Ramp time for the voltage recovering.
The output voltage will be gradually increased, in oder not to exceed the current limit set in P.321.

P.325 Autocap spd src (Signal source for the frequency scanning)
Source of the starting frequency value for the search of the motor speed.

P.325 = 0 Frequency Ref

The starting frequency is set to the actual value of the frequency reference. d.001 = Frequency Ref.

P.325 = 1 Max frequency ref

The starting frequency is set to the value defined in the parameter F.020 = Max ref freq.
Such setting is recommended when the motor to be engaged has been previously connected to the AC mains
(F.020 = 50 or 60Hz).

154 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 P.325 = 2 Last frequency ref
The starting frequency is set to the value assumed by Frequency Ref at the moment of the last inverter dis-
able.

P.325 = 3 Encoder
The starting frequency is set to a value corresponding to the speed measured by the encoder fit on the motor.
Such setting is recommendedwhen the motor is equipped with an encoder.

Mains contactor
opening

Mains supply and

drive start

Motor speed

P.324

Drive output voltage

P.323

Drive output frequency

Waiting for demagnetiz. Acceleration
P.322
Speed search

Figure 7.6.15: Autocapture function

Example for the use of the Autocapture function to engage a motor which has been previously mains-connect-
ed. P.325 = 1.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.320 Autocapture mode [0] Disable 0 0 2 454
[1] 1st run only
[2] Always
P.321 Autocapture Ilim 120 20 (*) % of I nom 1 456
P.322 Demagnetiz time (*) 0.01 10 sec 0.01 457
P.323 Autocap f scan t 1 0.1 25 sec 0.1 458
P.324 Autocap V scan t 0.2 0.1 25 V 0.1 459
P.325 Autocap spd src [0] Frequency ref 0 0 3 460
[1] Max freq ref
[2] Last freq ref
[3] Encoder

A signalling of the “Autocapture” status is available on the digital output as “Autocapture run” .

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 155

Undervoltage Configuration
A temporary mains voltage drop is detected by the inverter intermediate circuit (DC link) as a variation of its level
below a safety threshold. Such a condition causes the inverter to stop due to an undervoltage alarm (UV).
The safety threshold is set via the Undervoltage thr (P.340) parameter.

Procedures for the Undervoltage control

It is possible to configure the behaviour of the inverter in case of momentary drop of the AC mains voltage,
thus avoiding unnecessary trips and improving system availability.

When the undervoltage threshold has been overcome, the inverter can initiate one of the following procedures:
• Autorestart (P.341)
• Coast Through (P.343)
• Emg Stop (P.343)

P.340 Undervoltage thr (Undervoltage alarm threshold)

Safety threshold for the detection of the undervoltage alarm (UV).
It is possible to move the UV threshold between a minimum value defined by the hardware (P.340 = 0) and a
maximum value corresponding to the rated DC-link voltage (P.340 = 100%). In order to increase system avail-
ability, it is recommended to leave P.340 = 0 (factory setting)..

AC main supply Minimum UV threshold Nominal DC-Bus

380Vac 380Vdc 537Vdc
400Vac 380Vdc 565Vdc
420Vac 400Vdc 594Vdc
440Vac 400Vdc 622Vdc
460Vac 415Vdc 650Vdc
480Vac 415Vdc 678Vdc

Example:

Parameter S.000 (P.020) Mains voltage = 400Vac

UV minimum threshold = 380Vdc
DC bus rated value = 565Vdc

P.340 = 0% UV threshold = 380Vdc

(565 - 380) x 50
P340 = 50% UV = 380 + _______________ = 472,5Vdc
100

Or, if the UV threshold has to be = 400Vdc, it is possible to calculate the value to be set in P.340:

(565 - 380)
P.340 = __________ x 100 @ 11%
(100 - 380)

Autorestart
When the DC bus voltage value is lower than the value set in P.340, the inverter output bridge is disabled and
motor coasts to stop.
DC-bus voltage is restoredbefore the time set in Max pwrloss time (P.341) elapses and if the drive regulation
card remains active, the “Autorestart” function is started.
The inverter behaves as described in the “Autocapture” function, regardless of what is set in P.320, therefore
the following parameters have to be programmed:

P.321 Autocapture Ilim

P.322 Demagnetiz time
P.323 Autocap f scan
P.324 Autocap V scan

156 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 The following figure shows the “Autorestart” sequence after a short power dip.

Mains supply

Regulation
supply

Motor speed

Output
frequency

Output
voltage
Waiting for Acceleration
demagnetization
P.322

Speed search
P.323, P324
DC Link precharge

Figure 7.6.16: Autorestart after a power dip

P.341 Max pwrloss time (Maximum time for a power supply loss)
The Autorestart procedure is performed within this time if the mains voltage is restored. A longer power supply
loss causes the inverter stop and a following “undervoltage” alarm.
In case the regulation card is no longer supplied because of a power dip, the restart with the Autorestart pro-
cedure is not possible.
P.341 = 0 (default), Autorestart function disabled.

P.342 UV alarm storage (Storage of the undervoltage alarm)

This parameter specifies whether an UV alarm occured while the drive is disabled, has to be stored into the
“Alarm list”.

P.343 UV Trip mode (Controlled stop due to a power dip)

Such function can work properly only if the load has sufficient kinetic energy (loads with high inertia-low fric-
tions).

P.343 = 0 Disable
In case of a power supply loss, the drive stops with an “undervoltage” alarm (UV)

P.343 = 1 Coast Through

In case of loss of the mains power supply, the drive will decrease the output frequency, recovering the kinetic
energy of the load , trying to maintain the regulation card active as long as possible. If the mains voltage is
restored, the drive will resume its normal operation.

P.343 = 2 Emg Stop

In case of a power supply loss, the drive decreases the output frequency trying to stop the motor within a
previously fixed period (F.206).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 157

 COAST THROUGH

The function is enabled programming P.343 = 1.

Main loss Main restoring

Ref A

V setpoint

VTH threshold

Ref B
P223

1> 2> 1) Ref A: 100V 1s

2) Ref B: 1V 1s

Figure 7.6.17: Coast through function

Ref A = DC Link voltage
Ref B = motor power supply frequency

Phase description:

a) The procedure for the controlled stop is automatically enabled when the DC link voltage decreases below
the VTH: threshold:

VTH=(√2 x Vmains) x 0,8

(Vmains depends on the value set in the S.000 parameter)

b) The motor power supply frequency is decreased with a step corresponding to P.223 in order to operate in
the generating mode and to avoid further decrease of the DC bus voltage.
c) A PI regulator controls the drive output frequency and regulates it in order to bring and keep the DC link
voltage at the Vsetpoint value:

(√2 x Vmains x 0,9) + VTH

VSETPOINT = ____________________
2

The regulator setpoint is changed linearly from VTH to Vsetpoint

The response of the PI regulator can be tuned setting the parameters:

P.221 DC-link ctr Pgain = P gain.
P.222 DC-link ctr Igain = I gain.

In case the mains voltage is restored during the Coast through procedure, the drive recognizes the situation
and the motor rotation speed is brought back to its starting value.
On the contrary, if the mains voltage is not restored, the PI regulator further decreases the drive output fre-
quency till the motor stops (in this way the DC bus can be kept at the Vsetpoint level). At this point the drive
Undervoltage alarm is enabled.
The motor restart can be obtained performing the safe-restart procedure with the P.003 parameter.

158 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 EMG STOP (Emergency stop)

The function is enabled programming P.343 = 2

Main loss

Ref B
P223
V setpoint
Ref A

VTH threshold

2> 1) Ref A: 100V 1s

2) Ref B: 1V 1s
1>

Figure 7.6.18: Emergency stop

Ref A = DC Link voltage

Ref B = motor power supply frequency

Phase description:
a) The procedure for the controlled stop is automatically enabled when the DC link voltage decreases below
the VTH threshold:

VTH= (√2 x Vmains) x 0,8

(Vmains depends on the value set in the S.000 parameter)

b) The motor power supply frequency is decreased with a step corresponding to P.223 in order to operate in
the generating mode and to avoid further decrease of the DC bus voltage.
c) A PI voltage regulator controls the drive output frequency and regulates it in order to bring and keep the
DC link voltage at the Vsetpoint value::

√2 x Vmains + OVTH
VSETPOINT = _______________ (OVTH = 800 VDC )
2

The regulator setpoint is changed linearly from VTH to Vsetpoint

The response of the PI regulator can be tuned setting the parameters:
P.221 DC-link ctr Pgain = P gain.
P.222 DC-link ctr Igain = I gain

d) When the voltage setpoint reaches Vsetpoint, the regulator is disabled and the drive performs the Fast
Stop ramp set with the F.206 parameter.
e) During the Fast Stop ramp, the DC bus voltage can reach values suitable to enable the braking resist-
ance P.220 = 0.
In case the resistance is not connected, it is recommended to set P.220 = 1 in order to avoid a possible
Overvoltage alarm during the stop phase.
The P.207 parameter allows the setting of the current limit during the controlled stop phase. In case the
motor current tries to overcome the current limit, the Fast Stop ramp speed is decreased in order to keep
the current at the programmed level.
If, on the contrary, the programmed braking ramp is too slow, the DC bus voltage could decrease below
the VTH value. In this condition the PI voltage regulator regains the control of the output frequency till the
motor stops. At this point the drive Undervoltage alarm is enabled.

In case the mains voltage is restored during the Emg Stop procedure, the drive continues its procedure till the

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 159

 motor is completely stopped. The motor restart can be obtained performing the safe-restart procedure with the
P.003 parameter.
In case of high-inertia loads, it could be convenient to enable the DC braking function at stop. Such function
could reduce or eliminate a small residual slip rotation of the motor.

Master - Slave function

In a configuration with multiple drive/motor, where several motors can be set with different speeds but where
the ratio between the different speeds has to be constant during the machine stopping phases (for example on
a carding textile line), it is possible to use the Master-Slave function.
To this purpose, it is required to enable the Emg Stop or Coast Through function only on the Master drive and
to program an analog output with code 22 Freq ref factor. On the other Slave drives forming the line, no UV
Trip Mode function has to be enabled but an analog input F.080 FreqRef fac src has to be programmed, for
example F.80 = 2, the output frequency reference is multiplied by the analog input value (only positive).

The analog output of the drive configured as master supplies a reference corresponding to the ratio between
the output frequency of the Fout drive (controlled by the UV Trip Mode function) and the Fout0 frequency ref-
erence before enabling the function:
Vout = (Fout / Fout0) x 10V

If the UV Trip Mode function is enabled (P.343 = 1 or P.343 = 2) but not active, the analog output correspond-
ing to 10V tends to 0V when the UV Trip Mode function is active.
By multiplying the frequency set on the slaves by Vout, it is possible to obtain a coordinated stop.
Considering that 10V on the analog input used as FreqRef fac src corresponds to a multiplication by 2 of the
base frequency, the input scale has to be set to 0.5:
ex. I.222 = An In 3 gain = 0,5
The use of the Master-Slave function can be advantageous when all the drives forming the line are connected
to a single DC bus.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.340 Undervoltage thr 0 0 80 % of P.020 1 462
P.341 Max pwrloss time 0 0 25 sec 0.1 463
P.342 UV alarm storage [0] Disable 1 0 1 464
[1] Enable
P.343 UV Trip mode [0] Disabled 0 0 2 491
[1] CoastThrough
[2] Emg Stop

Overvoltage Configuration

P.360 OV prevention (Overvoltage prevention)

During fast deceleration or in case of deceleration with high inertia load, it is possible to prevent the drive trip
from overvoltage alarm, by enabling this function.

Performing this control, the drive will act as follows:

• detection of the overvoltage level, without storing and displaying the alarm.
• disabling the inverter output bridge; the motor will coast to stop and DC-link will decrease toward safe
values.
• automatic enabling of the Autocapture function, and engaging of the motor at the last frequency value,
detected before the alarm.

For correct operations it is necessary to enter the proper settings of the Autocapture parameters:

P.321 Autocapture Ilim

P.322 Demagnetiz time
P.323 Autocap f scan t
P.324 Autocap V scan t

• normal operation is resumed and the motor will be stopped following the programmed ramp.
• if during the stop, the load inertia leads again the DC bus at the limit level, the procedure described above
will be iterated.

160 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 n
Coast to Stop
Pickup
P.223

Ramp Profile Set

t
VDClink

0V Thr

Rated
DClink

t
Figure 7.6.19: Overvoltage Prevention

The “overvoltage “ alarm will be displayed with the message “OV”.

A signalling of the “overvoltage” condition is available on the digital output as “Alarm state”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.360 OV prevention [0] Disable 0 0 1 465
[1] Enable

Autoreset Configuration
The Autoreset function allows the automatic restoring of the driveoperation, after the detection of some
alarms.
It will be active only with an appropriate setting of the parameters described below and after the drive has
tripped from one of the following alarms:

• undervoltage (UV)
• overvoltage (OV)
• overcurrent (OC)
• overcurrent desat (OCH)
• external fault (programmable) (EF)
• serial time out (St)

P.380 Autoreset attmps (Autoreset attempts)

Setting of the maximum number of autoreset, after the detection of an alarm. If P.380 is set to 0 the function is
disabled.

P.381 Autoreset clear

If enabled, it sets to zero the counter of the already-performed autoreset attempts, if no alarm condition is
detected within a period of time set in the P.381 Autoreset clear parameter. After the counter zero setting, the
number of the available restart attempts is set in the P.380 Autoreset attmps parameter. If P.381 Autoreset
clear is set with 0, the counter zero setting is not performed.

P.382 Autoreset delay

Delay that elapses between the failure detection and the beginning of the autoreset sequence.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 161

P.383 Autores flt rly (Autoreset fault relay)
Defines the status of the relays and digital outputs, during the autoreset function, according the following table:
Parameters “Relay & Dig Out” programming
P.383 Drive OK Alarm state No alarm state
0 ON OFF ON
1 OFF ON OFF

Note ! a normal “Alarm Reset” can be enabled also through the digital inputs (see chapter INTERFACE, section Digital inputs).
The reset command will be executed only if the drive is blocked (no RUN or Reverse commands) and the cause of the
alarm has been eliminated.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.380 Autoreset attmps 0 0 255 466
P.381 Autoreset clear 10 0 250 min 1 467
P.382 Autoreset delay 5 0.1 50 sec 0.1 468
P.383 Autores flt rly [0] OFF 1 0 1 469
[1] ON

External Fault Configuration

P.400 Ext fault mode (External fault mode)

Configuration of the behaviour of the drive after an “External fault alarm”.

P.400 = 0 Always signalled - Autoreset not possible

P.400 = 1 Signalling only when applied the RUN command - Autoreset not possible
P.400 = 2 Always signalled - Autoreset possible
P.400 = 3 Signalling only when applied the RUN command - Autoreset possible

The alarm will be displayed with the massage “EF”.

A signalling of the “external fault” condition is available on the digital output as “EF Ext fault”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.400 Ext fault mode 0 0 3 470

Phase Loss Detection

P.410 Ph Loss detec en (Phase Loss detection enabling)

The enabling of this function allows detection of the missing of any phase of the AC input mains.

P.410 = 0 Disabled Phase loss detection disabled.

P.410 = 1 Enabled Phase loss detection enabled.

The alarm will be displayed with the message “PH”.

A signalling of the “phase loss “ condition is available on the digital output as “Alarm state”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.410 Ph Loss detec en [0] Disable 1 0 1 492
[1] Enable

162 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Voltage Reduction Configuration
It is possible to minimize the energy consumption af a motor that is running with light load by properly config-
uring the voltage reduction function.

P.420 Volt reduc mode (Voltage reduction mode)

Defines of the mode of the output voltage reduction.
P.420 = 0
The output voltage reduction is always applied.
P.420 = 1
The output voltage reduction is not applied during the ramp, providing full torque availability during accelera-
tion and deceleration.
The voltage reduction will be activated only at constant speed (end of ramp).

P.421 V reduction fact (Voltage reduction factor)

Level of the output voltage that will be applied on the motor terminals.
It is a percentage of the voltage, resulting from the V/F characteristic (see figure 7.6.20).

P.422 V fact mult src (Voltage reduction factor multiply source)

The output voltage level reduction, can be linearly regulated through an analog reference signal.
Its regulation will be performed in a range between 10% (An Inp = 10%) and 100% of the value set in param-
eter P.421 (An Inp = 100%).
The figure below describes this regulation.

Note ! The level of voltage reduction, will be applied in accordance to the output voltage value, based on the characteristic of
the V/F characteristic.

Example:
P.421 = 30%
V/f motor characteristic = 380V / 50Hz
Motor supply voltage = 380V / 50Hz

The inverter output voltage at 50 Hz will be:

380 x 30
380 = __________ = 266V
100

VFact

P.421

P.421
10
100% An input
(10V, 20mA)
Figure 7.6.20: Voltage reduction factor multiply

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 163

 V

100%
P.421

t
F

Ramp Profile

t
Figure 7.6.21: Output Voltage Reduction with P.420 = 1

Note ! the function can be enabled also through the digital inputs (see chapter INTERFACE, section Digital inputs). In this case
it will be possible to enable the Output Voltage reduction at any time the command is applied.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.420 Volt reduc mode [0] Always 0 0 1 471
[1] Steady state
P.421 V reduction fact 100 10 100 % of P.061 1 472
P.422 V fact mult src [0] Null 0 0 2 473
[1] Analog inp 1 (setting through I.200…I.204)
[2] Analog inp 2 (setting through I.210…I.214)

Frequency Threshold

P.440 Frequency prog 1 (Frequency programmed 1)

Set point for the detection of the first frequency threshold.
The signalling of the frequency level detection can be programmed on the digital outputs.

P.441 Freq prog 1 hyst (Frequency programmed 1 hysteresis)

Defines a tolerance band around the Frequency prog 1 (P.440).

P.442 Frequency prog 2 (Frequency programmed 2)

Set point for the detection of the second frequency threshold.
The signalling of the frequency level detection can be programmed on the digital outputs.

P.443 Freq prog 2 hyst (Frequency programmed 2 hysteresis)

Defines a tolerance band around the Frequency prog 2 (P.442).

164 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Output Frequency

Output Frequency
Absolute Value
P.441
P.441 Tol. Band +
2
P.440 Thr Set

P.441
2 Tol. Band -
P.441

Freq=Thr Set
FreqThr Set

Freq>Thr Set

Freq<Thr Set

Figure 7.6.22: Program Frequency Tresholds (example of P.440 and P.441)

A signalling of the “frequency threshold” status is available on the digital output as “Freq thr 1” and
“Freq<thr2”.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.440 Frequency prog 1 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 474
P.441 Freq prog 1 hyst 0.5 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 475
P.442 Frequency prog 2 0 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 476
P.443 Freq prog 2 hyst 0.5 0 F.020 Hz 0.1 477

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 165

Steady State Signalling
The signalling of the steady state condition can be configured by the following parameters.

P.460 Const speed tol (Constant speed tollerance)

It defines the tolerance band of the speed variation.

P.461 Const speed dly (Constant signalling delay)

Delay time for the signalling.

P.460 Speed ref

Steady
state
signal

P.461 P.461
Figure 7.6.23: Constant Speed Control

A signalling of the “steady state” condition is available on the digital output as “Steady state”.
Code LCD display Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.460 Const speed tol 0 0 25 Hz 0.1 478
P.461 Const speed dly 0,1 0 25 sec 0.1 479

Heatsink Temperature Threshold

Control and monitoring of the drive heatsink temperature.

P.480 Heatsnk temp lev (Heatsink temperature level)

Setting of the temperature threshold in °C.

P.481 Heatsnk temp hys (Heatsink temperature hysteresis)

Tolerance band for the signalling of the temperature threshold.
The parameter d.050 (menu DISPLAY), is the heatsink temperature level .

A signalling of the “heatsink temperature” status is available on the digital output as “Hs temp thr”.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.480 Heatsnk temp lev 70 10 110 °C 1 480
P.481 Heatsnk temp hys 5 0 10 °C 1 481

166 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

PWM Setting

P.500 Switching freq (Switching frequency)

Setting of the modulation frequency of the drive.

P.501 Sw freq reduc en (Switching frequency reduction enabling)

When enabled, the PWM carrier frequency is automatically changed, according to the inverter output fre-
quency.
This can avoid the inverter overheating at low frequencies. Furthermore, it improves the sinewave output,
providing a smoother rotation.

P.502 Min switch freq (Minimum switching frequency)

Setting of the minimum switching frequency value.

P.520 Overmod max lev (Overmodulation maximum level)

Setting of the overmodulation maximum level.
This function increases the output voltage, providing as consequence a higher torque availability.
Setting the parameter too high the parameter could increase the distortion of the output voltage and give rise
to undesired vibrations of the system.

P.540 Out Vlt auto adj (Output voltage automatic adjustement)

The voltage applied to the motor terminal is defined by the parameter Max output voltage (P.061), and it is
strictly correlated to the value of the mains voltage.

This function can make the motor output voltage independent of eventual fluctuation of the mains, through an
automatic adjustment of the first.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.500 Switching freq [0] 1kHz (*) 0 (*) 482
[1] 2kHz
[2] 3kHz
[3] 4kHz
[4] 6kHz
[5] 8kHz
[6] 10kHz
[7] 12kHz
[8] 14kHz
[9] 16kHz
[10] 18kHz
P.501 Sw freq reduc en [0] Disable 0 0 1 483
[1] Enable
P.502 Min switch freq As P.500 (*) 0 P.500 495
P.520 Overmod max lev 0 0 100 % 1 484
P.540 Out Vlt auto adj [0] Disable 1 0 1 485
[1] Enable

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 167

Dead Time Compensation
The “dead time compensation” function allows for compensation of the output voltage distorsion due to IGBT
voltage drop and its switching characteristics.
Distorsion of output voltage may cause non uniform, non smooth shaft rotation in open loop control.
It is possible to set a voltage value and the compensation variation, called Gradient, through the following
parameters.

P.560 Deadtime cmp lev (Dead time compensation level)

Dead time compensation level.

P.561 Deadtime cmp slp (Dead time compensation slope)

Compensation gradient value.

v
Dead time slope

Dead time level

Output voltage + Voltage cmd to pwr

+
Figure 7.6.18: Dead Time Compensation

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.560 Deadtime cmp lev (*) 0 255 486
P.561 Deadtime cmp slp (*) 0 255 487

Display Setting

P.580 Startup display

It is possible to define the first parameter that will be displayed at every power-on of the drive.
The choice can be carried out by setting the corresponding “IPA”, reported in the parameters list table, into
this parameter.

P.600 Speed dsply fact (Speed display factor)

Costant used to convert frequencies to speeds.
The parameters is applied to the variable reported in the chapter DISPLAY, sections Basic and Encoder.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.580 Startup display 1 1 1999 488
P.600 Speed dsply fact 1 0.01 99.99 0.01 489

168 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Protection

P.999 Param prot code (Parameters protection code)

Protection against undesired modification of the parameters.

P.999 = 0 Protection disabled

- Stopped motor: possibility to write all parameters.
- Running motor: some parameters are write-protected (see IPA in bold on main tables)

P.999 = 1 All parameters are write-protected except:

- F.000 Motorpot ref, F.100 … F.116, multispeed function parameters
- P.999 Param prot code
- C.000 Save parameter (only with motor stopped)
- C.020 Alarm clear
- H.500...H511, serial line commands.

P.999 = 2 All parameters are write-protected except:

- P.999 Param prot code
- C.000 Save parameter (only with motor stopped)
- C.020 Alarm clear
- H.500...H511, serial line commands.

P.999 = 3 Protection disabled

- Stopped motor: possibility to write all parameters.
- Running motor: some parameters are write-protected (see IPA in bold on main tables)
Possibility to execute Save parameter also with running motor.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
P.999 Param prot code 0 0 3 490

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 169

170
PID Setting

Pid gain sel

PID Freeze
A.004 A.050(Kp)
1
PID freeze
Steady State
0
A.051(Ti) Set gain1
A.001 A.052(Td)
D.400
PID refence selector
Pid reference A.007
7.7 Menu A - APPLICATION

A.053(Kp)
A.001 Enable A.054(Ti)
Null = 0 Set gain2
Analog input 1 = 1 Disable A.055(Td)
Reference Config.
Analog input 2 = 2 Pid integ.init D.403
Null= 3 PID integral component
Frequency ref = 4. D.402 D.404
Ramp output = 5 Td( deriv.)
PID error PID output
Digital ref = 6
Encoder frequency = 7 A.006 A.056/A.057
+ A.000
Sign Kp prop.
- + PID output
PID High/low limit +
A.002 1 Kp
PID feedback S Feed-forward
Ti
Null = 0 A.002

Figure 7.7.1: PID Function Block

Analog input = 1 >A.58&<=A.59 Pid error><thr
Feedback Config
Analog input = 2
Null= 3
Encoder freq. = 4 >A.58 Pid error>thr
Output curr = 5 D.401
Output torque = 6 Pid reference
Output power = 7 A.000 <=A.59 Pid error<thr
Enable
PID Enable

Digital input/output
Display variables

ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 All the parameters concerning the setting of the PID function, are contained in the Application menu.
The ADV80 drive provides a PID function, engineered on purpose for the following controls:
• nip rolls with dancer or load cell
• pressure regulation for pumps and extruders
• speed loop control with encoder

The use of the PID block as stand-alone is also possible, correlated (or not) to the RUN status of the drive.

A.001
PID refence selector
Null = 0
Analog input 1 = 1
Analog input 2 = 2 A.000 = 2
Null = 3 (Without feed-forward) +

Frequency ref = 4 V/F

Ramp output = 5 A.001 -

Digital ref = 6 Reference

Encoder frequency = 7
PID
A.000
A.002 A.002 PID mode
PID feedback Feed-back Disable = 0
Null = 0 Freq. sum = 1
Analog input 1 = 1 Freq. direct = 2
Analog input 2 = 2 Volt sum = 3
Null = 3 Volt direct = 4
Encoder freq. = 4 Stand alone = 5
Output curr = 5 St-Al always = 6
Output torque = 6
Output power = 7

Figure 7.7.2: PID Mode as Frequency Sum or Direct (A.000=1, 2)

A.000 PID Mode

This parameter defines the regulation mode of the PID function.

A.000 = 0 Disable The function is disabled.

A.000 = 1 Freq.sum The output of the PID regulator is added to the ramp output reference value (with
feed-forward).
A.000 = 2 Freq.direct The PID regulator output is directly input to the V/f profile generator. Frequency
ramp output is not used.
A.000 = 3 Volt sum The PID regulator output is added to the voltage reference, calculated in accordance
with the setting of the V/F characteristic (with feed-forward).
A.000 = 4 Volt direct The PID regulator output is the voltage to be applied to the motor. V/f curve is not
used.
A.000 = 5 Stand alone The PID function can be used as generic control. The regulator will be active only
when the drive will be in RUN.
A.000 = 6 St-Al always The PID function can be used as generic control. The regulator is not correlated to
the drive status.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 171

 A.001
PID refence selector
Null = 0
Analog input 1 = 1
Analog input 2 = 2 V/F
A.000 = 4
Null = 3 ( whitout feed-forward) +

Frequency ref = 4
Ramp output = 5 A.001 -

Digital ref = 6 Reference

Encoder frequency = 7
PID
A.000
A.002 A.002 PID mode
PID feedback Feed-back Disable = 0
Null = 0 Freq. sum = 1
Analog input 1 = 1 Freq. direct = 2
Analog input 2 = 2 Volt sum = 3
Null = 3 Volt direct = 4
Encoder freq. = 4 Stand alone = 5
Output curr = 5 St-Al always = 6
Output torque = 6
Output power = 7

Figure 7.7.3: PID Mode as Voltage Sum or Direct (A.000=3, 4)

A.001 PID reference selector

It defines the source, from where the PID reference signal is provided and controlled.
A.001 = 0 Null Null
A.001 = 1 Analog inp 1 PID Reference connected to Analog input 1
A.001 = 2 Analog inp 2 PID Reference connected to Analog input 2
A.001 = 3 No reference selected
A.001 = 4 Frequency ref PID Reference connected to Frequency reference
A.001 = 5 Ramp output PID Reference connected to Ramp output signal
A.001 = 6 Digital ref PID Reference connected to “PID digital ref”parameter
A.001 = 7 Encoder freq PID Reference connected to Encoder frequency

A.002 PID Fbk sel (PID feedback selector)

It defines the source, from where the PID feed-back signal is provided and controlled.
A.002 = 0 Null Null
A.002 = 1 Analog inp 1 PID Feed-back connected to Analog input 1
A.002 = 2 Analog inp 2 PID Feed-back connected to Analog input 2
A.002 = 3 No reference selected
A.002 = 4 Encoder freq PID Feed-back connected to Encoder frequency
A.002 = 5 Output curr PID Feed-back connected to Output current signal
A.002 = 6 Output torque PID Feed-back connected to Output torque signal
A.002 = 7 Output power PID Feed-back connected to Output power signal

A.003 PID digital ref (PID digital reference)

Setting of the reference for the PID function.
It will be active only if PID Ref sel (A.001) is set as “6”

A.004 PID activate mode

It defines if the PID function has to be always enabled or if it has to be active in steady state only.
A.004 = 0 Always The PID function is always enabled.
A.004 = 1 Steady state The PID function is enabled only in steady state.

172 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

A.005 PID-Encoder Sync (PID encoder syncronism)
The function syncronizes the updating time of the PID regulator, with the encoder updating time defined by
I.504.
A.005 = 0 Disable The function is not enabled. The parameter PID update time (A.008) is active.
A.005 =1 Enable The function is enabled. Setting of parameter A.008 has no effect on PID regulation.
PID updating time is defined by I.504.

A.006 PID err sign rev (PID error signal reverse)

It allows to invert the polarity of the error signal between the reference and the feed-back (as consequence
also the regulation effect is modified).

A.007 PID Integ Init en (PID integral initialization enabling)

The function allows to initialize the “integral parts” at the RUN command or during the passage from “gains set
1” to “gains set 2”. This avoids sudden variations of the regulator output.
When the function is active, the value of the integral component, is initialized to:
Iinit = Pid output - ( (Kp x err) + (Kd x Derr) ).

A.008 PID update time

It defines the updating time of the PID regulator. The value 0.00 means minimum updating time (5ms). This
parameter has no effect if A.005 =1.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
A.000 PID mode [0] Disable 0 0 6 1200
[1] Freq sum
[2] Freq direct
[3] Volt sum
[4] Volt direct
[5] Stand alone
[6] St-Al always
A.001 PID ref sel [0] Null 0 0 7 1201
[1] Analog inp 1
[2] Analog inp 2
[3] Null
[4] Frequency ref
[5] Ramp output Ramp output
[6] Digital ref
[7] Encoder freq
A.002 PID fbk sel [0] Null 0 0 7 1202
[1] Analog inp 1
[2] Analog inp 2
[3] Null
[4] Encoder freq
[5] Output curr
[6] Output torque
[7] Output power
A.003 PID digital ref 0 -100 100 % 0,1 1203
A.004 PID activat mode [0] Always 0 0 1 1204
[1] Steady state
A.005 PID-Encoder sync [0] Disable 0 0 1 1205
[1] Enable
A.006 PID err sign rev [0] Disable 0 0 1 1206
[1] Enable
A.007 PIDInteg init en [0] Disable 0 0 1 1207
[1] Enable
A.008 PID update time 0 0 2.5 sec 0,01 1208

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 173

PID Gains

A.050 PID Prop gain 1 (PID proportional gain 1)

Proportional gain (set 1).

A.051 PID Int t const1 (PID integral constant 1)

Integral action time (set 1).

A.052 PID Deriv gain 1 (PID derivative gain 1)

Derivative action time (set 1).

A.053 PID Prop gain 2 (PID proportional gain 2)

Proportional gain ( set 2).

A.054 PID Int t const2 (PID derivative gain 2)

Integral action time (set 2).

A.055 PID Deriv gain 2 (PID integral constant 2)

Derivative action time (set 2).

The enabling of the PID regulator and the selection of two different set of gains, can be carried out via pro-
grammable digital inputs, as described below.

Digital input configuration to select gain 1 or gain 2.

I.100=21 PID gain sel

Discontinuity of the PID output caused by changing the set of gains, can be avoided by enabling the function:
PID Integ. Init en ( A.007)

The PID function enabling, is possible by programming the digital inputs as PID Enable (code 20).
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
A.050 PID Prop gain 1 0 0 99.99 0.01 1209
A.051 PID Int tconst 1 99.99 0 99.99 0.01 1210
A.052 PID Deriv gain 1 0 0 99.99 0.01 1211
A.053 PID Prop gain 2 0 0 99.99 0.01 1212
A.054 PID Int tconst 2 99.99 0 99.99 0.01 1213
A.055 PID Deriv gain 2 0 0 99.99 0.01 1214

PID Limits

A.056 PID high limit

Setting of the maximum allowed PID output.

A.057 PID low limit

Setting of the minimum allowed PID output.

A.058 PID max pos err (PID maximun positive error)

Setting of the maximum positive limit of the regulator error. It is expressed as percentage of the full scale
value.
It defines the threshold for the digital output signalling.

174 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

A.059 PID min pos err (PID minimun positive error)
Setting of the maximum negative limit of the regulator error. It is expressed as percentage of the full scale
value.
It defines the threshold for the digital output signalling.
Digital output signalling:

18 PID err>< PIP error is >A.058 &<=A.059

19 PID err>thr PID error is >A.058
20 PID err<thr PID error is <=A.059
21 PID er ><(inh) PID error>A.058 &<=A.059 (*)
22 PID er >(inh) PID error is >A.058 (*)
23 PID er <(inh) PID error is <=A.059 (*)

(*) The control through the digital output, can become active only when the error returns the first time in the
preset interval.

Variable monitoring in the DISPLAY MENU

The PID variables can be monitored in the following parameters:

d.400 PID reference Reference signal

d.401 PID feedback Feedback signal
d.402 PID error Signalling of the error between reference and feedback
d.403 PID integral comp Actual value of the integral component
d.404 PID output Actual value of the PID regulator output
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
A.056 PID high limit 100 -100 100 % 0.1 1215
A.057 PID low limit -100 -100 100 % 0.1 1216
A.058 PID max pos err 5 0.1 100 % 0.1 1217
A.059 PID min neg err 5 0.1 100 % 0.1 1218

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 175

 APPLICATION SAMPLE: PRESSURE CONTROL

Use of the PID function for pressure control of pumps and extruder.
The analog signals relative to the set-point and to the pressure-transducer must be sent to the inverter that
controls the extruder speed. If needed, also the digital command for the PID enabling has to be configured.

Extruder

E M

Pressure
Feed-back transducer

0-20mA / 4-20mA
-10V

Set Pressure
setting

Feed-fwd

DRIVE

+10V
Speed reference

Figure 7.7.4: PID Pressure Control for Pumps and Extruders

Configuration of the Digital input 1 for the PID regulator enabling.

I.000 = 20 (PID enable)

Configuration of the Ref 1 channel for the the main frequency reference.
F.050 = 1 (Analog input 1 as main SPEEDreference)

Configuration of the PID mode parameter.

A.000 = 1 (PID enabled as “Frequency sum”)

Configuration of the PID reference selector parameter for the reference of the PID function.
A.001 = 6 Output torque, PID Feed-back connected to Output torque signal

Configuration of the PID fbk selector parameter for the feedback of the PID function.
A.002 = 2 (Analog input 2 as pressure transducer)

• In the DISPLAY menu, verify the correct reading of the PID reference (parameter d.400) and of the PID
feedback (parameter d.401).
• Set the PID regulators gain as follow:
A.050 = 2 Proportional part
A.051 = 1 Integral part
A.052 = 0 Derivative part

When it is deemed necessary to limit the correction of PID regulator, use the parameters A.056 and A.057.

Enable the PID function using the digital input 1 and execute a drive save parameters.

176 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 ENCODER SETTINGS SAMPLE

Use of the PID function for the speed control via encoder (closed loop).
For the closed loop control, the PID function has to be enabled.
Check the encoder power supply voltage and change, if necessary, the configuration of the micro-switches
available on the option card.
For further information on the drive configuration, please see the chapter INTERFACE, section Encoder con-
figuration.

U2/T1
V2/T2 M
W2/T3

PE2
Channel A +24V
Digital Input 4 14 E External
024V power supply
Channel B
Digital Input 5 16

COM 18

Figure 7.7.5: PID Function as Speed Feed-back

Example:
motor 1500rpm, 2 pole pairs, 400V, 50Hz.
encoder 1024 ppr, supply +24V, 2 channel ( A+, A-, B+, B-)

Before to carry on with the setting of the closed loop configuration, it is necessary to execute the initial start-up
of the motor.
• “Drive parameter setting” and “Parameters setting for enabling the encoder reading”.

Menu I (INTERFACE):
I.500 = 1 Encoder enabling
I.501 = 1024 Encoder pulses per revolution
I.502 = 1 Encoder channels configuration (0) 1channel, (1) 2 channels.

PID parameter settings in the APPLICATION menu.

Menu A (APPLICATION):

A.001 - PID ref sel = [5] Ramp output

A.002 - PID Fbk sel = [4] Encoder freq

• Verify in the DISPLAY parameters, the correct monitoring of the frequency detected y the encoder (pa-
rameter d.301).
• Set the speed reference (analog or digital), for example 25Hz.
• Verify the Reference frequency (parameter d.001) and compare it with the encoder frequency detection
(parameter d.301)
• The two values must be equal or differ by a small amount given by the motor slip. In case of relevant dif-
ference, control the encoder wiring or the pulses number setting.

PID regulator gains setting:

A.050 = 2 Proportional part
A.051 = 1 Integral part
A.052 = 0 Derivative part

Note ! Initially start with low values and then increase them in accordance with the response needed by the system.

PID regulator enabling

A.000 = 1 PID Mode as Freq.sum (PID output added to the ramp output)
Verify the correct operation by checking the parameter D.402 (PID error) in the menu DISPLAY.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 177

Programmable Logic Inputs
The programmable area is formed by:

- Three AND logical gates with two inputs:

A.300 A.302 A.304

AND 1 I.070 AND 2 I.071 AND 3 I.072

A.301 A.303 A.305

- Three OR logical gates with two inputs:

A.306 A.308 A.310

I.073 I.074 I.075

OR 1 OR 2 OR 3

A.307 A.309 A.311

- Four logical NOT gates:

I.076 I.077 I.078 I.079

A.312 A.313 A.314 A.315
NOT 1 NOT 2 NOT 3 NOT 4

The inputs of each logical gate may be connected to any digital drive input, or to the output of another logical
gate, and even to other digital variables of the drive, by programming the parameter of the output in question.
Parameter I.100 (chapter 7.1 – List of Parameters), contains the complete list of the signals which may be
assigned to any logical gate input.
The output of each one of the gates may be used to give an order, programming the output parameter relative
to the order from the appropriate mode.

Example:
The Run command is converted into AND in digital input 7 and digital input 4 .
This result can be obtained by carrying out the following set up procedure:

I.006 Dig input 7 cfg = [0] None

I.003 Dig input 4 cfg = [0] None
I.070 AND 1 out cfg = [1] Run
A.300 AND1 In 1 src = [62] DI 7
A.301 AND1 In 2 src = [59] DI 4

A.300 AND1 In 1 src

A.301 AND1 In 2 src

Set up input block AND1. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

A.302 AND2 In 1 src

A.303 AND2 In 2 src

Set up input block AND2. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

A.304 AND3 In 1 src

A.305 AND3 In 2 src

Set up input block AND3. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

178 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

A.306 OR1 In 1 src

A.307 OR1 In 2 src

Set up input block OR1. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

A.308 OR2 In 1 src

A.309 OR2 In 2 src

Set up input block OR2. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

A.310 OR3 In 1 src

A.311 OR3 In 2 src

Set up input block OR3. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

A.312 NOT1 In src

A.313 NOT2 In src

A.314 NOT3 In src

A.315 NOT4 In src

Set up input block NOT x. See the list of parameter selections I.100.

Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
A.300 AND1 In 1 src 49 0 77 1355
A.301 AND1 In 2 src 49 0 77 1356
A.302 AND2 In 1 src 49 0 77 1357
A.303 AND2 In 2 src 49 0 77 1358
A.304 AND3 In 1 src 49 0 77 1359
A.305 AND3 In 2 src 49 0 77 1360
A.306 OR1 In 1 src 49 0 77 1361
A.307 OR1 In 2 src 49 0 77 1362
A.308 OR2 In 1 src 49 0 77 1363
A.309 OR2 In 2 src 49 0 77 1364
A.310 OR3 In 1 src 49 0 77 1365
A.311 OR3 In 2 src 49 0 77 1366
A.312 NOT1 In src 49 0 77 1367
A.313 NOT2 In src 49 0 77 1368
A.314 NOT3 In src 49 0 77 1369
A.315 NOT4 In src 49 0 77 1370

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 179

7.8 Menu C - COMMANDS
All the parameters of the COMMAND menu need to be executed according to the procedure listed below.
Save parameters command is used as example.

c.000
E
Enter
ff
Enter

c.000

Basic

C.000 Save parameters

Every modification of parameter value has immediate effect on drive operation, but is not automatically stored
in permanent memory
The Save parameter command is used to store the set of parameters currently in use in permanent memory.
The drive signals the presence of unsaved parameters by blinking the dedicated yellow LED (Prg) on the
keypad.
When the drive is turned off, all unsaved modifications are lost.

C.001 Recall param

The function recalls the parameters that were previously stored, replacing the ones currently in use.

C.002 Load Deafult

Recall of the factory parameters..
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
C.000 Save parameters (1) (1) (1) (2) 800
(2)
C.001 Recall param (1) (1) (1) (2) 801
(2)
C.002 Load default (1) (1) (1) (2) 802
(2)

Alarm Register Reset

C.020 Alarm clear

The function resets completely the Alarm List register (D.800…D.803).
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
C.020 Alarm clear (1) (1) (1) (2) 803
(2)

180 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

External Key

C.040 Reserved

C.041 Reserved

Tuning

C.100 Autotune R stat (Autotaratura resistenza statorica)

It measures the stator resistance of the motor connected.
A correct value of the motor parameters will optimize drive performance in terms of torque availability and
speed control, when using Automatic boost (P.401) and Slip compensation (P.450).

Do not perform any tune when a multiple motor connection is being used.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
C.100 Measure stator R oFF oFF oFF do 806
do

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 181

7.9 Menu H - HIDDEN
This menu is not available on the keypad. The setting and the reading of the parameters here contained, can
be performed exclusively via serial line or through SBI card.

Virtual I/O Commands

H.000 Virtual digital command

Bitwise setting of virtual digital inputs.

For further information in relation to the use of virtual digital inputs, see chapter INTERFACE section Enabling
Virtual I/O.

H.001 Exp virtual digital command

Bitwise setting of expansion virtual digital inputs.

For further information in relation to the use of virtual digital inputs, see chapter INTERFACE section Enabling
Virtual I/O.

H.010 Virtual digital state

Bitwise setting of virtual digital outputs.

For further information in relation to the use of virtual digital outputs, see chapter INTERFACE section Ena-
bling Virtual I/O.

H.011 Exp Virtual digital state

Bitwise setting of expansion virtual digital outputs.

For further information in relation to the use of virtual digital outputs, see chapter INTERFACE section Ena-
bling Virtual I/O.

H.020 Virtual An Output 1

H.021 Virtual An Output 2

Setting of the value of virtual analog outputs.

H.020 and H.021 = 0 analog outputs value = 0V

H.020 and H.021 = +32767 analog outputs value = +10V
H.020 and H.021 = -32767 analog outputs value = -10V

For further information in relation to the use of virtual analog outputs, see chapter INTERFACE section Ena-
bling Virtual I/O.

H.022 Exp Virtual An Output 1

Setting of virtual analog output on the expansion card. See description of parameter H.021.

H.025 Virtual analog input 1

H.026 Virtual analog input 2

182 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

H.027 Virtual analog input 3
Value adjustment for virtual analog inputs.

For further information in relation to the use of virtual analogical inputs, see chapterof virtual analog inputs,
see chapter INTERFACE, section Enabling Virtual I/O.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.000 0 0 255 1000
H.001 0 0 255 1001
H.010 0 0 255 1002
H.011 0 0 255 1003
H.020 0 -32768 32767 1004
H.021 0 -32768 32767 1005
H.022 0 -32768 32767 1006
H.025 0 -32768 32767 1082
H.026 0 -32768 32767 1083
H.027 0 -32768 32767 1084

Profidrive Parameters

H.030 Profidrive Control word

Drive control word in accordance with the Profidrive profile.

For further information please refer to the instruction manual of the SBI card (Profibus).

H.031 Profidrive Status word

Drive status word in accordance with the Profidrive profile.

For further information, refer to the instruction manual of the SBI card (Profibus).

H.032 Profidrive Reference

Using a Profibus SBI card, the speed reference of the drive has to be set through this parameter, in accord-
ance with the Profidrive profile.

H.032 = 0 Reference = 0Hz

H.032 = +4000 hex Reference = Max ref freq (F.020)
H.032 = -4000 hex Reference = - Max ref freq (F.020)

In order to activate the speed reference from profdrive, it is necessay to program the reference selector F.050
= [8]Prof drive. See chapter FREQ & REF, section Reference sources, for details.

H.033 Profidrive Actual Frequency

Reading of the drive output frequency, in accordance with the Profidrive profile.

In order to activate the speed reference from profdrive, it is necessay to program the reference selector F.050
= [8] Profdrive. See chapter FREQ & REF, section Reference sources, for details.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.030 0 0 65535 1007
H.031 0 0 65535 1008
H.032 0 -16384 16383 1040
H.033 1 -16384 16383 1041

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 183

Drive Status

H.034 Drive Status

This structure, consisting of 4 bits, allows to monitor the drive status.
The meaning of each bit is the following:

Bit 0 Drive ready

Bit 1 Alarm state
Bit 2 Motor running
Bit 3 Steady state

H.040 Progress
It is the indication, in percentage, of the progress status of the “Save parameters” and “Measur stator R” com-
mands.
A displaying of 100% means that the function has been completed.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.034 0 0 65535 1042
H.040 0 0 100 1009

Parameters Reading Extension

When using high value for the conversion factor (P.600), the resulting speed parameters reading may exceed
the values irepresentable with a 16 bit word (+32767, –32767).
In this case, it is still possible to monitor the variables through the following parameters:

H.050 Drive output frequency, 32 bit

H.052 Drive reference frequency, 32 bit

H.054 Output speed (d.000)*(P.600), 32 bit

H.056 Speed Ref (d.001)*(P.600), 32 bit

H.058 Encoder freq, 32 bit

H.060 Encoder speed (d.000)*(P.600), 32 bit

H.062 Act alarm

Bitwise reading of active alarms (32 bits). Each bit is associated to a specific alarm, according to table 9.3.1.
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.050 0 -2 31
2
31 -1
1010
H.052 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1012
H.054 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1014
H.056 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1016
H.058 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1018
H.060 0 - 2 31 2 31 -1 1044
H.062 0 0 2 31 -1 1060

184 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Remote I/Os Control

H.100 Remote Digital Inputs (0..15)

H.101 Remote Digital Inputs (16..31)

H.110 Remote Digital Outputs (0..15)

H.111 Remote Digital Outputs (16..31)

H.120 Remote Analog input 1

H.121 Remote Analog input 2

H.130 Remote Analog output 1

H.131 Remote Analog output 2

All the parameters are reserved
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.100 0 0 65535 1021
H.101 0 0 65535 1022
H.110 0 0 65535 1023
H.111 0 0 65535 1024
H.120 0 -32768 32767 1025
H.121 0 -32768 32767 1026
H.130 0 -32768 32767 1027
H.131 0 -32768 32767 1028

Serial Link Commands

As reported in the chapter PARAMETERS section Commands, when setting the P.000 =3 (SERIAL), the
main commands are given exclusively via serial line or fieldbus.
A command is activate by writing “1” to the related parameter. Below, a complete list of available commands is
reported.

H.500 Hardware Reset

H.501 Alarm Reset

H.502 Coast to stop

H.503 Stop with ramp

H.504 Clockwise Start

H.505 Anti-clockwise Start

H.506 Clockwise Jog

H.507 Anti-clockwise Jog

H.508 Clockwise Flying restart

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 185

H.509 Anti-clockwise Flying restart

H.510 DC Brake

H.511 Reserved
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
H.500 0 0 1 1029
H.501 0 0 1 1030
H.502 0 0 1 1031
H.503 0 0 1 1032
H.504 0 0 1 1033
H.505 0 0 1 1034
H.506 0 0 1 1035
H.507 0 0 1 1036
H.508 0 0 1 1037
H.509 0 0 1 1038
H.510 0 0 1 1039
H.511 0 0 1 1043

7.10 Other functions

7.10.1 Hour of life of the drive

1 - From menu C, select parameter C.40

2 – Press the E and PRG keys five times in sequence
3 – At this point, the Sr-service (r.000) menu can be accessed:
r.000 = drive power-on cycles (hexadecimal format)
r.001 = time lower part in ( hex), multiply x 5 (minutes) and divide by 60 (seconds) to obtain the hours.
r.002 = time top part in ( hex) , multiply x 5 (minutes) and divide by 60 (seconds) to obtain the hours.

Prg X7
1
C.000
X5

C.040
2 Enter + Prg X5

C.000
Prg

Example

3 r.000 0082

Example
r.001 1856

Example
r.002 0000

186 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

Chapter 8 - Serial Protocol

8.1 Modbus RTU Protocol for ADV80 drives

8.1.1 Introduction

n the chapter the Drive parameters are referred to as 16-bit Modbus registers; a 32-bit Drive parameter
covers therefore two Modbus registers.
See chapter 7 for the following correspondences: parameter index and Modbus register.

8.1.2 The MODBUS Protocol

The MODBUS protocol defines the format and the communication modes between a system controlling
“master” and one or more “slaves” aimed at answering to the master requests. The protocol states how the
master and the slaves start and stop their communication, how the messages can be exchanged and how
the errors can be detected. A common line can host one master and 99 slaves; this is a protocol logic limit,
the device number can be further limited by the physical interface; the present implementation foresees a
maximum number of 32 slaves to be line-connected.
A transaction can be started exclusively by the master. A transaction can have a direct demand/response
format or a broadcast format. The former is addressed to a single slave, the latter to all the line slaves,
which, on their turn, give no response. A transaction can have a single demand/single response frame or a
single broadcast message/no response frame.
Some protocol features have not been defined. They are: interface standard, baud rate, parity, stop bit
number. The protocol allows also to choose between two communication “modes”: ASCII and RTU (Re-
mote Terminal Unit). The RTU mode, which is the most efficient, is implemented in the Drives.
The JBUS protocol is similar to the MODBUS protocol; the only difference is given by the address
numbering system: in MODBUS the numbering system starts from zero (0000 = 1st address) while
in JBUS it starts from one (0001 = 1st address); this variance is maintained throughout the whole
system. The following descriptions, if not otherwise stated, refer to both protocols.

8.1.3 Message format

In order to communicate between the two devices, the message has to be contained into a “casing”. The
casing leaves the transmitter via a “port” and it is “brought” along the line to a similar “port” on the receiver.
MODBUS states the format of the casing, which, both for the master and for the slave, contains:
• The slave address for the master stated transaction (the address 0 corresponds to a broadcast mes-
sage sent to all the slaves).
• The code of the function (already performed or to be performed).
• The data to be exchanged.
• The error control according to the CRC16 algorithm.
If a slave detects an error in the received message (a format, parity or CRC16 error), the message is invalid
and therefore rejected; when a slave detects an error in the message, it does not perform the required ac-
tion and does not answer to the demand as if the address does not correspond to an on-line slave.

8.1.3.1 The address

As stated above, the MODBUS transactions always involve the master (which controls the line) and one
slave at the time (with the exception of broadcast messages). In order to detect the message receiver, the
first sent character is a byte containing the numeric address of the selected slave. Each slave owns there-
fore a different address number for its identification. The legal addresses go from 1 to 99, while a master
message starting with the address 0 means that this is a “broadcast” message simultaneously addressed
to all the slaves (the address 0 can not be allocated to a slave). Broadcast messages are those messages
which do not need a response to perform their function, i.e. the allocations.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 187

 8.1.3.2 The function code

The second character of the message states the function to be performed by the master message; the
slave response contains the same code, thus stating that the function has been performed.
An implemented subset of the MODBUS functions contains:
• 01 Read Coil Status (Not used)
• 02 Read Input Status (Not used)
• 03 Read Holding Registers
• 04 Read Input registers
• 05 Force Single Coil (Not used)
• 06 Preset Single register
• 07 Read Status
• 15 Force multiple Coils (Not used)
• 16 Preset Multiple Registers
The 01 and 02 functions, so as the 03 and 04 functions, are similar and interchangeable. See chapter 3 for
a complete and detailed description of the functions..

8.1.3.3 CRC16

The last two characters of the message contain the cyclic redundancy code (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
calculated according to the CRC16 algorithm. As for the calculation of these two characters, the message
(address, function code and data thus rejecting the parity and the start and stop bits) is considered as a
single and continuous binary number whose most significative bit (MSB) is transmitted as first. The mes-
sage is multiplied by x16 (it undergoes a 16-bit shift on the left) and then it is divided by x16+x15+x2+1; it is
stated as a binary number (1100000000000101). The integer quotient is rejected and the 16-bit remainder
(it is initialized with FFFFh in order to avoid a zero made message) is added to the sent message. The
obtained message, when the receiver slave has divided it by the same polynomial (x16+x15+x2+1), must
have a zero remainder if no error occurred (if not the slave calculates the CRC again).
Considering that the data serializing device (UART) transmits first the less significative bit (LSB) instead
of the MSB as required by the CRC calculation, such calculation is performed by inverting the polynomial.
Furthermore, as the MSB polynomial influences only the quotient and not the remainder, the remainder is
deleted by making it equal to 1010000000000001.
The step by step procedure for the CRC16 calculation is the following:
1) Load a 16-bit register with FFFFh (the bit value is 1).
2) Perform the exclusive OR of the first character with the highest byte in the register; place the result in the
register.
3) Perform a one-bit shift of the register on the right.
4) If the bit outcoming the register right side (flag) is 1, perform the exclusive OR between the
1010000000000001 generating polynomial and the register.
5) Repeat the steps 3 and 4 for eight times.
6) Perform the exclusive OR of the following character with the highest byte in the register; place the result
in the register.
7) Repeat the steps from 3 to 6 for all the message characters.
8) The content of the 16-bit register is the CRC redundancy code to be added to the message.

8.1.3.4 Message synchronization

The message synchronization between the transmitter and the receiver is obtained by interposing a pause
between the messages, such pause being equal to 3.5 times the character period. If the receiver does not
receive for a period equal to 4 characters, the message is considered to be over; as a consequence the
following received byte is treated as the first byte of a new message: an address.

188 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 8.1.3.5 Serial line setting

The communication foresees the following settings:

• 1 start bit
• 8 data bits (RTU protocol)
• 1 stop bit
• no parity
The baud rate can be selected among the following values:
Baudrate Timeout
byte-byte
1200 33 ms
2400 16 ms
4800 8 ms
9600 4 ms
19200 2 ms
38400 1 ms

8.1.4 Modbus functions for the drive

Here following is a detailed description of the MODBUS functions implemented for the Drive. All the values
listed in the tables are hexadecimal.

8.1.4.1 Read Output Registers (03)

This function allows to read the value of 16-bit (word) registers containing Drive parameters. The broadcast
mode is not allowed.

Request
Together with the Drive address and the function code (03), the message contains the register start-
ing address (starting Address) and the number of the registers to be read; they are both stated on two
bytes. The maximum number of registers which can be read is 125. The register numbering system
starts from zero (word1 = 0) for the MODBUS and from one (word1 = 1) for the JBUS.
Modbus example:
• Drive address 25 (19hex)
• 3 Registers from 0069 (0045hex) to 0071 (0047hex).

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC

start start bit# bit#
Addr HI Addr LO HI LO HI LO
19 03 00 44 00 03 46 06

Response
Together with the Drive address and the function code (03), the message includes a character con-
taining the data byte number and some other characters containing the data. The registers require
two bytes where the first one contains the most significative section.
Example: Response to the above mentioned request.

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC
Byte word word word word word word
Count 69 HI 69 LO 70 HI 70 LO 71 HI 71 LO HI LO
19 03 06 02 2B 00 00 00 64 AF 7A

Note ! in case the register selected range includes some reserved or missing registers, the value of these registers is set to 0.

The drive parameters must be 16 bits (1 Modbus register), unless explicitly stated (for example, H.050 to 32
bits). In the case of parameters to 32 bits the reading is carried out using 2 Modbus registers.
The first register will be the lower part, the second, the higher part.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 189

 8.1.4.2 Read Input Registers (04)

This function is similar to the previous one.

8.1.4.3 Preset Single Register (06)

This function allows to set the value of a single 16-bit register. The broadcast mode is allowed.
Request
Together with the Drive address and the function code (06), the message contains the register ad-
dress (parameter) on two bytes and the value to be allocated. The numbering system of the register
addresses starts from zero (word1 = 0) for the MODBUS and from one (word1 = 1) for the JBUS.
Modbus example:
• Drive address 38 (26hex)
• Register 26 (001Ahex)
• Value 926 (039Ehex)

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC

bit# bit# WORD WORD
HI LO HI LO HI LO
26 06 00 19 03 9E DF 82

Response
The response is given by transmitting again the received message after the register has been modi-
fied.
Example: Response to the above mentioned request.

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC

bit# bit# WORD WORD
HI LO HI LO HI LO
26 06 00 19 03 9E DF 82

8.1.4.4 Read Status (07)

This function allows to read the status of eight predefined bits with a compact message. The broadcast
mode is not allowed.
Request
The message contains only the Drive address and the function code (07).
Modbus example
• Drive address 25 (19hex)

ADDR FUNC CRC CRC

HI LO
19 07 4B E2

Response
Together with the Drive address and the function code (07), the message includes a character con-
taining the status bits.
Example: Response to the above mentioned request.

ADDR FUNC DATA CRC CRC

status
byte HI LO
19 07 6D 63 DA

The bit meaning is the following:

190 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Bit number Bit meaning
0 Digital Output 1
1 Digital Output 2
2 Digital Output 3
3 Digital Output 4
4 Run
5 Steady state
6 Drive limit state
7 Not used

8.1.4.5 Preset Multiple Registers (16)

This function allows to set the value of a consecutive block made of 16-bit registers. The broadcast mode
is allowed.
Request
Together with the Drive address and the function code (16), the message contains the starting ad-
dress of the registers to be written (starting Address), the number of registers to be written, the
number of bytes containing the data and the data characters. The register numbering system starts
from zero (word1 = 0) for the MODBUS and from one (word1 = 1) for the JBUS.
Modbus example:
• Drive address 17 (11hex)
• Starting Register 35 (0023hex)
• Number of registers to be written 1 (0001hex)
• Value 268 (010Chex)

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC
start start word# word# Byte word word 35 LO
Addr HI Addr LO HI LO Count 35 HI HI LO
11 10 00 22 00 01 02 01 0C 6C 87

Response
Together with the Drive address and the function code (16), the message contains the starting ad-
dress (starting Address) and the number of written registers.
Example: Response to the above mentioned request.

ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC

start start word# word#
Addr HI Addr LO HI LO HI LO
11 10 00 22 00 01 A3 53

8.1.5 Error management

In MODBUS there are two kinds of errors which are managed in different ways: transmission errors and
operating errors. The transmission errors change the format, the parity (if used) or the CRC16 of the mes-
sage. When the Drive detects such errors, it considers the message invalid and gives no response. If the
message format is the right one but its function can not be performed, the error is an operating one. The
Drive answers to this error with a particular message. This message contains the Drive address, the code of
the required function, an error code and the CRC. In order to underline that the response is aimed at stating
the presence of an error, the function code is returned with the most significative bit set with “1”.
Modbus example
• Drive address 10 (0Ahex)
• Coil 1186 (04A2hex)

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 191

 ADDR FUNC DATA DATA DATA DATA CRC CRC
start start bit# bit#
Addr HI Addr LO HI LO HI LO
0A 01 04 A1 00 01 AC 63

Response
The request refers to the content of the Coil 1185 which does not exist in the Drive slave. The slave
answers with the error code “02” (ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS) and goes back to the function code
81h (129).
Example: Exception to the above mentioned request.

ADDR FUNC DATA CRC CRC

Except.
Code HI LO
0A 81 02 B0 53

8.1.5.1 Exception codes

This protocol implementation foresees only four exception codes:

Code Name Meaning

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The received function code does not correspond to a function allowed on the addressed
slave.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The address number, which the data field refers to, is not a register allowed on the ad-
dressed slave.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value to be allocated, which the data field refers to, is not allowed for this register.
07 NAK - NEGATIVE The function can not be performed with the present operating ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
conditions or attempt to write a read-only parameter.

8.1.6 System configuration

The configuration of the serial line can be performed by programming the parameters in the menu INTER-
FACE, submenu Serial Config. Some parameters are common to all the implemented protocols (Fox Link,
Modbus, etc); the menu contains the following parameters:
Code Name Code select. Default MIN MAX Unit Variation IPA
I.600 Serial link cfg [0] FoxLink 7E1 4 0 5 155
[1] FoxLink 701
[2] FoxLink 7N2
[3] FoxLink 8N1
[4] ModBus 8N1
[5] JBus 8N1
I.601 Serial link bps [0] 600 baud 4 0 6 156
[1] 1200 baud
[2] 2400 baud
[3] 4800 baud
[4] 9600 baud
[5] 19200 baud
[6] 38400 baud
I.602 Device address 1 0 99 1 157
I.603 Ser answer delay 1 0 250 msec 1 158
I.604 Serial timeout 0 0 25 sec 0,1 159
I.605 En timeout alm [0] Disable 160
[1] Enable

192 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 8.2 Proprietary protocol

8.2.1 Introduction

The Fox Link protocol defines the format and the communication mode between a system controlling mas-
ter and one or more slaves responding to the master requests. It defines how the master and the slaves
start and end the communication, how the messages are exchanged and how the errors are detected.
It is possible to have one master and 32 slave devices connected to the line.
The slave address has to be a number included between 0 and 99.
Only the master can start a transition. A transition can have a request/response format addressed to a sin-
gle slave or it can have a Broadcast format, where the message is sent to all the slaves on the line.
With the I.600 “Serial link cfg” and I.601 “Serial link bps” parameters it is possible to specify the number of
data bits, parity, number of stop bits, baudrate.

Parameter Code Protocol type Data bits Parity Stop bits

Serial link cfg 0 Foxlink 7E1 7 Even 1
Serial link cfg 1 Foxlink 7O1 7 Odd 1
Serial link cfg 2 Foxlink 7N2 7 None 2
Serial link cfg 3 Foxlink 8N1 8 None 1
Serial link cfg 4 Modbus 8N1 8 None 1
Serial link cfg 5 Jbus 8N1 8 None 1

Parameter Code Baudrate

Serial link bps 0 600
Serial link bps 1 1200
Serial link bps 2 2400
Serial link bps 3 4800
Serial link bps 4 9600
Serial link bps 5 19200
Serial link bps 6 38400

8.2.2 Message format

All transmitted characters are 7-bit ASCII format.

The parameter values are specified with integer decimal numbers and with units of measure equal to the
highest foreseen resolution (if not otherwise stated).
The transmission string has the following format:

<EOT>, <HAD>,<HAD>,<LAD>,<LAD>, <STX>, X,y,y,y,=,n,…,n, <ETX>, <CKS>, <CR>

Start code Slave address Data start Data Data end Control code

<EOT> = 04H
<STX> = 02H
<ETX> = 03H
<ACK> = 06H
<NAK> = 15H
<HAD> = most significant digit of inverter address
<LAD> = least significant digit of inverter address.
<CKS> = XOR of characters between <STX> and <ETX> eventually added to 20H if XOR is less than
20H.
<CR> = 0DH end character for each string
X = letter stating the menu containing the transmitted parameter

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 193

 y,y,y = numeric code representing the transmitted parameter
The numeric code has to be turned into a 3-character string filling the non-significant charac-
ters with ‘0’. Example: the transmitted parameter has a numeric code equal to 1, therefore the
3-character string to be transmitted is “001”.
n,…,n = value of the parameter to be read or written.

8.2.3 Address

As mentioned above, the Foxlink transitions always include the master, which controls the line, and one
slave at the time (with the exception of the Broadcast messages). In order to identify the message receiver,
the bytes 1,2,3,4,5 contain the address of the selected slave. Each slave is therefore identified by a single
address. The legal addresses are included between 0 and 99. A message sent with a 99 address means
that the message is a “broadcast” one, i.e. it is addressed to all slaves simultaneously. The message recep-
tion is granted by all mains-connected slaves while the response for the performed reception is sent only
by the drive with address 99, if it is available on the mains. With the I602 “Device address” parameter it is
possible to specify the slave address.

8.2.4 Control code

The checksum is calculated performing the XOR of the characters included between <STX> and <ETX>. If
the obtained value is lower than 20H, the 20H value is then added.

8.2.5 Functions

The following table lists the menus and the letter representing the menu which can be reached using the
Foxlink protocol.
Display “D” Read
Interface “I” Read/Write
Freq & Ramp “F” Read/Write
Parameter “P” Read/Write
Application “A” Read/Write
Command “C” Write
Hidden “H” Read/Write

Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning

<STX>,D,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Display Reading ...,<STX>,D,y,y,y,<ETX> , … <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception


Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<STX>,I,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Interface reading …,<STX>,F,y,y,y,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
Interface writing …,<STX>,F,y,y,y,=,n,…,n,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception

194 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<STX>,F,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Freq & Ramp
…,<STX>,F,y,y,y,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
reading
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
Freq & Ramp
…,<STX>,F,y,y,y,=,n,…,n,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
writing
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception


Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<STX>,P,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Parameter read-
…,<STX>,P,y,y,y,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
ing
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
Parameter writ-
…,<STX>,P,y,y,y,=,n,…,n,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
ing
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception


Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<STX>,A,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Application read-
…,<STX>,A,y,y,y,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
ing
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
Application writ-
…,<STX>,A,y,y,y,=,n,…,n,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
ing
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception


Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
“…,<STX>,C,y,y,y,=,n,<ETX>,…
Command writing <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
dove n = 1”
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception


Function Msg Master Msg Slave Meaning
<STX>,H,y,y,y,=n,…,n,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Accepted Function
Hidden reading …,<STX>,H,y,y,y,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception
<ACK>,<CR> Accepted Function
Hidden writing …,<STX>,H,y,y,y,=,n,…,n,<ETX>,… <STX>,E,<ETX>,<CKS>,<CR> Non-Accepted Function
<NAK>,<CR> Wrong Reception

8.2.6 Msg Slave meaning

The Wrong Reception Message is returned when a communication error occurs (wrong checksum).
The Non-Accepted Message is returned if:
- a read-only parameter is written,
- a non existing parameter is read or written,
- the written value is outside the allowed range,
- a parameter which can be written only with a stopped motor is written when the motor is rotating.

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 195

Chapter 9 - Troubleshooting

9.1 Drive Alarm Condition

The drive keypad will show a blinking message with the code and name of the alarm occurred.
The figure below shows an example of OV Overvoltage alarm condition.

Prg Rev Fwd Limit Alarm

0U
AI Op

Alarm code blinkng

Figure 9.1.1: Alarm Displaying

Alarm acknowledge
The active alarm can be acknowledged by pressing the Prg button on the keypad. This operation will allow
menu navigation and parameter editing while the drive is in alarm state (the red LED stays on). In order to
resume drive operation, an Alarm reset command is necessary.

9.2 Alarm Reset

Alarm reset can be performed in three different ways:

- Alarm reset by keypad: pressing simultaneously Up and Down keys; the

reset action will take effect when the buttons are
released.

- Alarm reset by digital input: it can be performed through a programmable
digital input programmed as “[5] Alarm reset”,
factory set to Digital Input 5 (terminal 16).

- Alarm reset by Autoreset function: it allows an automatic reset of some drive alarms
(see table 8.3.1), by the settings of P.380, P.381,
P.382 and P.383 parameters.

The figure below shows how to reset an alarm by keypad.

Blinking
0U
Alarm condition
0.0o
Alarm resetted

Figure 9.2.1: Alarm Reset

196 ADV80 • Instruction Manual

 9.3 List of Drive Alarm Events

Table 9.3.1 provides a description of the causes for all the possible alarms.

ALARM

Numerical code

Bit H.062 H.063

AUTORESET
from serial
DESCRIPTION
Code Name

EF EF Ext Fault It trips when External fault input is active 1 YES 0

OC OC OverCurrent It trips when an Overcurrent value is detected by output current sensor 2 YES 1
It trips when the drive DC Bus voltage is higher than the maximun threshold for
OU OV OverVoltage 3 YES 2
the given main voltage setting (see par. 5.8.1)
It trips when the drive DC Bus voltage is lower than the maximun threshold for
UU UV UnderVoltage 4 YES 3
the given main voltage setting
OH OverTem- It trips when the drive heatsink temperature detected by the switch sensor
OH 5 NO 4
perat exceeds its threshold (*)
OLi OLi Drive OL It trips when the drive overload accumulator exceeded the trip threshold 6 NO 5

OLM OLM Motor OL It trips when the drive overload accumulator exceeded the trip threshold 7 NO 6

OLr OLr Brake res OL It trips when the motor overload accumulator exceeded the trip threshold 8 NO 7
It trips when the torque delivered by the motor exceeds the programmed level
Ot Ot Inst OverTrq 9 NO 8
for the preset time
It trips when the supply phase lack: enabled 30 seconds after one of the supply
PH PH Phase loss 10 NO 9
phases has been disconnected
FU FU Fuse Blown It trips when the drive input fuses are blown 11 NO 10

OCH OCH Desat Alarm IGBT desaturation or instantaneous overcurrent have been detected 12 YES 11

St St Serial TO It trips when the serial link time out exceeds the programmed level 13 YES 12
Communication failure between drive regulation card and option 1 expansion
OP1 OP1 Opt 1 Alm 14 NO 13
card
Communication failure between drive regulation card and option 2 expansion
OP2 OP2 Opt 2 Alm 15 NO 14
card
bF bF Bus Fault Drive comunication Bus failure 16 NO 15
OHS OverTem-
OHS It trips when the drive heatsink temperature exceeds a safety level. (*) 17 NO 16
perat
SHC SHC Short Circ Short Circuit between output phases or Ground fault 18 NO 17

Ohr Reserved 19 18
"It trips when the output current limiter or the DC-Link voltage limiter fail.
The failure can be caused by wrong settings of regulator gains or by the motor
Lf LF Limiter fault load. 20 NO 19
This alarm may be activated although the drive is in “Current Clamp” status for a
time which exceeds the duration programmed with P181."
PLC PLC Plc fault Reserved 21 NO 20
The Stop key has been depressed, while main commands source was any but
EMS Key Em Stp fault 22 NO 21
the keypad and P.005 "Stop key mode" = [1] EmgStop & Al
UHS Under Tem- It trips when the temperature of the drive heatsink is below a safety level (typi-
UHS 23 NO 22
perat cally –5°C).

Table 9.3.1 List of Drive Alarm Events

(*) OH switch sensor threshold and OHS analog sensor threshold depend on the drive size (75 °C ... 85 °C).

ADV80 • Instruction Manual 197

INDEX PARAMETERS

Menu A - APPLICATION d.100 Dig inp status ................................ 85 F.115 Frequency Ref 15 . ..................... 126
d.101 Term inp status . ............................ 85 F.116 Jog frequency . ............................ 127
A.000 PID Mode ................................... 168
d.102 Vir dig inp stat ............................... 85 F.200 Ramps resolution ........................ 128
A.001 PID reference selector ............... 169
d.120 Exp dig inp stat ............................. 86 F.201 Acc time 1 . .................................. 128
A.002 PID Fbk sel ................................. 169
d.121 Exp term inp . ................................ 86 F.202 Dec time 1 ................................... 128
A.003 PID digital ref .............................. 169
d.122 Vir exp dig inp ............................... 86 F.203 Acc time 2 . .................................. 128
A.004 PID activate mode ...................... 169
d.150 Dig out status ................................ 86 F.204 Dec time 2 ................................... 128
A.005 PID-Encoder Sync . .................... 170
d.151 Drv dig out sta . ............................. 86 F.205 Acc time 3 . .................................. 128
A.006 PID err sign rev .......................... 170
d.152 Vir dig out sta ................................ 86 F.206 Dec time 3 / FS ........................... 128
A.007 PID Integ Init en . ........................ 170
d.170 Exp dig out sta .............................. 87 F.207 Acc time 4 . .................................. 128
A.008 PID update time . ........................ 170
d.171 Exp DrvDigOutSta ........................ 87 F.208 Dec time 4 ................................... 128
A.050 PID Prop gain 1 .......................... 171
d.172 Exp VirDigOutSta . ........................ 87 F.250 Ramp S-shape ............................ 129
A.051 PID Int t const1 ........................... 171
d.200 An in 1 cnf mon ............................. 87 F.260 Estens Rampe src . ..................... 129
A.052 PID Deriv gain 1 ......................... 171
d.201 An in 1 monitor .............................. 87 F.270 Jump amplitude . ......................... 130
A.053 PID Prop gain 2 .......................... 171
d.202 An in 1 term mon . ......................... 87 F.271 Jump frequency1 ........................ 130
A.054 PID Int t const2 ........................... 171
d.210 An in 2 cnf mon ............................. 87 F.272 Jump frequency2 ........................ 130
A.055 PID Deriv gain 2 ......................... 171
d.211 An in 2 monitor .............................. 88
A.056 PID high limit .............................. 171
d.212 An in 2 term mon . ......................... 88
A.057 PID low limit ................................ 171
d.220 Reserved . ..................................... 88 Menu H - HIDDEN
A.058 PID max pos err ......................... 171 H.000 Virtual digital command . ............ 179
d.221 Reserved . ..................................... 88
A.059 PID min pos err .......................... 172 H.001 Exp virtual digital command ....... 179
d.300 EncPulses/Sample ....................... 88
A.300 AND1 In 1 src ............................. 175 H.010 Virtual digital state ...................... 179
d.301 Encoder freq ................................. 88
A.301 AND1 In 2 src ............................. 175 H.011 Exp Virtual digital state ............... 179
d.302 Encoder speed . ............................ 88
A.302 AND2 In 1 src ............................. 175 H.020 Virtual An Output 1 ..................... 179
d.350 Option 1 state ............................... 89
A.303 AND2 In 2 src ............................. 175 H.021 Virtual An Output 2 ..................... 179
d.351 Option 2 state ............................... 89
A.304 AND3 In 1 src ............................. 175 H.022 Exp Virtual An Output 1 . ............ 179
d.353 SBI State ....................................... 89
A.305 AND3 In 2 src ............................. 175 H.025 Virtual analog input 1 ................. 179
d.354 SBI Baudrate ................................ 89
A.306 OR1 In 1 src ............................... 176 H.026 Virtual analog input 2 ................. 179
d.400 PID reference . .............................. 89
A.307 OR1 In 2 src ............................... 176 H.027 Virtual analog input 3 ................. 180
d.401 PID feedback ................................ 89
A.308 OR2 In 1 src ............................... 176 H.030 Profidrive Control word .............. 180
d.402 PID error ....................................... 89
A.309 OR2 In 2 src ............................... 176 H.031 Profidrive Status word ................ 180
d.403 PID integr comp ............................ 89
A.310 OR3 In 1 src ............................... 176 H.032 Profidrive Reference .................. 180
d.404 PID output ..................................... 90
A.311 OR3 In 2 src . .............................. 176 H.033 Profidrive Actual Frequency ....... 180
d.800 1st alarm-latest ............................. 90
A.312 NOT1 In src ................................ 176 H.034 Drive Status . .............................. 181
d.801 2nd alarm ...................................... 90
A.313 NOT2 In src ................................ 176 H.040 Progress ..................................... 181
d.802 3rd alarm ....................................... 90
A.314 NOT3 In src ................................ 176 H.050 Drive output frequency ............... 181
d.803 4th alarm ....................................... 90
A.315 NOT4 In src ................................ 176 H.052 Drive reference frequency . ........ 181
d.950 Drive rated curr ............................. 90
d.951 SW version (1/2) ........................... 90 H.054 Output speed (d.000)*(P.600) .... 181
Menu C - COMMANDS d.952 SW version (2/2) ........................... 90 H.056 Speed Ref (d.001)*(P.600) ......... 181
d.953 Reserved . ..................................... 90 H.058 Encoder freq . ............................. 181
C.000 Save parameters . ...................... 177
d.954 Reserved . ..................................... 90 H.060 Encoder speed (d.000)*(P.600) . 181
C.001 Recall param .............................. 177
d.955 Reserved . ..................................... 90 H.062 Act alarm .................................... 181
C.002 Load Deafult ............................... 177
d.956 Reserved . ..................................... 91 H.100 Remote Digital Inputs (0..15) ..... 182
C.020 Alarm clear ................................. 177
d.957 Drive size ...................................... 91 H.101 Remote Digital Inputs (16..31) ... 182
C.040 Reserved .................................... 178
d.958 Drive cfg type ................................ 91 H.110 Remote Digital Outputs (0..15) . . 182
C.041 Reserved .................................... 178
d.999 Display Test . ................................. 91 H.111 Remote Digital Outputs (16..31) .182
C.100 Autotune R stat . ......................... 178
H.120 Remote Analog input 1 . ............. 182
H.121 Remote Analog input 2 . ............. 182
Menu d - DISPLAY Menu F - FREQUENCIES & RAMPS H.130 Remote Analog output 1 ............ 182
F.000 Motorpot ref . .............................. 122 H.131 Remote Analog output 2 ............ 182
d.000 Output frequency .......................... 83
F.010 Mp acc/dec time .......................... 123 H.500 Hardware Reset ......................... 182
d.001 Frequency ref . .............................. 83
F.011 Motorpot offset ............................ 123 H.501 Alarm Reset . .............................. 182
d.002 Output current ............................... 83
F.012 Mp output mode .......................... 123 H.502 Coast to stop .............................. 182
d.003 Output voltage .............................. 83
F.013 Mp auto save .............................. 123 H.503 Stop with ramp ........................... 182
d.004 DC link voltage . ............................ 83
F.014 MpRef at stop . ............................ 123 H.504 Clockwise Start .......................... 182
d.005 Power factor . ................................ 83
F.020 Max ref freq ................................. 124 H.505 Anti-clockwise Start .................... 182
d.006 Power [kW] ................................... 83
F.021 Min ref freq .................................. 124 H.506 Clockwise Jog ............................ 182
d.007 Output speed ................................ 83
F.050 Ref 1 Channel ............................. 124 H.507 Anti-clockwise Jog ...................... 182
d.008 Speed ref ...................................... 83
F.051 Ref 2 Channel ............................. 124 H.508 Clockwise Flying restart ............. 182
d.050 Heatsink temp ............................... 84
F.060 Mlt Frq Channel 1 ....................... 125 H.509 Anti-clockwise Flying restart . ..... 183
d.051 Drive OL ........................................ 84
F.061 Mlt Frq Channel 2 ....................... 125 H.510 DC Brake . .................................. 183
d.052 Motor OL ....................................... 85
F.080 FreqRef fac src ........................... 125 H.511 Reserved .................................... 183
d.053 Brake res OL ................................. 85
F.100 Frequency Ref 0 ........................ 126
d.054 Reserved . ..................................... 85

198 ADV80 • Index Parameters

Menu I - INTERFACE I.430 Exp OutBySer en ..........................115 P.122 Auto boost en .............................. 141
I.440 An inp by ser en ............................115 P.140 Magn curr gain ............................ 142
I.000 Dig input 1 cfg ................................ 98
I.450 An out by ser en ............................115 P.160 Osc damping gain ....................... 142
I.001 Dig input 2 cfg ................................ 98
I.500 Encoder enable . ...........................116 P.170 SpdPgainL .................................. 143
I.002 Dig input 3 cfg ................................ 98
I.501 Encoder ppr ..................................116 P.171 SpdIgainL .................................... 143
I.003 Dig input 4 cfg ................................ 98
I.502 Enc channels cfg ..........................116 P.172 SpdPgainH . ................................ 143
I.004 Dig input 5 cfg ................................ 98
I.503 Enc spd mul fact ...........................116 P.173 SpdIgainH ................................... 143
I.005 Reserved . ...................................... 98
I.504 Enc update time ............................117 P.174 SpdGainThrL . ............................. 144
I.006 Reserved . ...................................... 98
I.505 Reserved . .....................................117 P.175 SpdGainThrH .............................. 144
I.007 Reserved . ...................................... 98
I.600 Serial link cfg . ...............................118 P.176 MaxSlipMotor .............................. 144
I.050 Exp dig in 1 cfg .............................. 99
I.601 Serial link bps . ..............................118 P.177 MaxSlipRegen ............................ 144
I.051 Exp dig in 2 cfg .............................. 99
I.602 Device address .............................118 P.178 SpdPI lim FacSrc ........................ 144
I.052 Exp dig in 3 cfg .............................. 99
I.603 Ser answer delay ..........................118 P.180 SW clamp enable . ...................... 144
I.053 Exp dig in 4 cfg .............................. 99
I.604 Serial timeout ................................118 P.181 Clamp alm HldOff ....................... 144
I.070 AND 1 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.605 En timeout alm ..............................118 P.200 Ramp Currlim Mode ................... 145
I.071 AND 2 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.700 Option 1 type . ...............................119 P.201 Accel curr lim . ............................. 145
I.072 AND 3 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.701 Option 2 type . ...............................119 P.202 En lim in steady . ......................... 145
I.073 OR 1 out cfg . ............................... 100
I.750 SBI Address ................................. 120 P.203 Curr lim steady . .......................... 145
I.074 OR 2 out cfg . ............................... 100
I.751 CAN baudrate .............................. 120 P.204 Curr ctrl P-gain ............................ 145
I.075 OR 3 out cfg . ............................... 100
I.752 SBI Profibus Mode . ..................... 120 P.205 Curr ctrl I-gain ............................. 145
I.076 NOT 1 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.753 SBI CAN Mode ............................ 120 P.206 Curr ctr feedfwd .......................... 146
I.077 NOT 2 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.754 Bus Flt Holdoff ............................. 120 P.207 Decel curr lim .............................. 146
I.078 NOT 3 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.760 SBI to Drv W 0 ............................. 120 P.220 En DC link ctrl ............................. 147
I.079 NOT 4 out cfg . ............................. 100
I.761 SBI to Drv W 1 ............................. 120 P.221 DC-lnk ctr Pgain . ........................ 147
I.100 Dig output 1 cfg . .......................... 100
I.762 SBI to Drv W 2 ............................. 120 P.222 DC-lnk ctr Igain ........................... 147
I.101 Dig output 2 cfg . .......................... 100
I.763 SBI to Drv W 3 ............................. 120 P.223 DC-link ctr FF .............................. 147
I.102 Reserved . .................................... 100
I.764 SBI to Drv W 4 ............................. 120 P.240 OverTorque mode ....................... 148
I.103 Reserved . .................................... 100
I.765 SBI to Drv W 5 ............................. 120 P.241 OT curr lim thr ............................. 148
I.150 Exp DigOut 1 cfg . ........................ 102
I.770 Drv to SBI W 0 ............................. 120 P.242 OT level fac src ........................... 148
I.151 Exp DigOut 2 cfg . ........................ 102
I.771 Drv to SBI W 1 ............................. 121 P.243 OT signal delay ........................... 148
I.152 Exp DigOut 3 cfg . ........................ 102
I.772 Drv to SBI W 2 ............................. 121 P.260 Motor OL prot en ......................... 149
I.200 An In 1 type .................................. 104
I.773 Drv to SBI W 3 ............................. 121 P.280 BU Config . .................................. 149
I.201 An In 1 offset ................................ 104
I.774 Drv to SBI W 4 ............................. 121 P.281 Brake res value ........................... 149
I.202 An In 1 gain .................................. 104
I.775 Drv to SBI W 5 ............................. 121 P.282 Brake res power . ........................ 149
I.203 An In 1 minimum .......................... 104
P.283 Br res thermal K .......................... 149
I.204 An In 1 filter .................................. 105
P.300 DC braking level ......................... 150
I.205 An In 1 DeadBand . ...................... 105 Menu P - PARAMETERS P.301 DCB lev fac src ........................... 150
I.210 An In 2 type .................................. 104 P.000 Cmd source sel ........................... 133 P.302 DC braking freq . ......................... 150
I.211 An In 2 offset ................................ 104 P.001 RUN/REV cmd mode . ................ 134 P.303 DC braking start .......................... 150
I.212 An In 2 gain .................................. 104 P.002 Reversal enable .......................... 135 P.304 DC braking stop .......................... 150
I.213 An In 2 minimum .......................... 104 P.003 Safety .......................................... 135 P.320 Autocapture mode........................ 151
I.214 An In 2 filter .................................. 105 P.004 Stop mode . ................................. 135 P.321 Autocapture Ilim .......................... 151
I.215 An In 2 DeadBand . ...................... 105 P.005 Stop Key Mode ........................... 136 P.322 Demagnetiz time ......................... 151
I.220 Reserved . .................................... 104 P.010 Control mode .............................. 136 P.323 Autocap f scan t .......................... 151
I.221 Reserved . .................................... 104 P.020 Mains voltage . ............................ 137 P.324 Autocap V scan t ......................... 151
I.222 Reserved . .................................... 104 P.021 Mains frequency ......................... 137 P.325 Autocap spd src .......................... 151
I.223 Reserved . .................................... 105 P.040 Motor rated curr .......................... 137 P.340 Undervoltage thr ......................... 153
I.224 Reserved . .................................... 105 P.041 Motor pole pairs .......................... 137 P.341 Max pwrloss time ........................ 154
I.225 Reserved . .................................... 105 P.042 Motor power fact ......................... 138 P.342 UV alarm storage ........................ 154
I.300 Analog out 1 cfg ........................... 108 P.043 Motor stator R ............................. 138 P.343 UV Trip mode .............................. 154
I.301 An out 1 offset .............................. 108 P.044 Motor cooling .............................. 138 P.360 OV prevention ............................. 157
I.302 An out 1 gain ................................ 108 P.045 Motor thermal K .......................... 138 P.380 Autoreset attmps ......................... 158
I.303 An out 1 filter ................................ 109 P.060 V/f shape ..................................... 138 P.381 Autoreset clear ............................ 158
I.310 Analog out 2 cfg ........................... 108 P.061 Max out voltage .......................... 139 P.382 Autoreset delay ........................... 158
I.311 An out 2 offset .............................. 108 P.062 Base frequency ........................... 139 P.383 Autores flt rly ............................... 159
I.312 An out 2 gain ................................ 108 P.063 V/f interm volt .............................. 139 P.400 Ext fault mode ............................. 159
I.313 An out 2 filter ................................ 109 P.064 V/f interm freq ............................. 139 P.410 Ph Loss detec en ........................ 159
I.350 Exp An out 1 cfg . ..........................110 P.080 Max output freq ........................... 140 P.420 Volt reduc mode .......................... 160
I.351 Exp AnOut 1 offs ...........................110 P.081 Min output freq ............................ 140 P.421 V reduction fact ........................... 160
I.352 Exp AnOut 1 gain ..........................110 P.100 Slip compensat ........................... 140 P.422 V fact mult src ............................. 160
I.353 Exp AnOut 1 filt .............................110 P.101 Slip comp filter ............................ 140 P.440 Frequency prog 1 . ...................... 161
I.400 Inp by serial en . ............................114 P.120 Manual boost [%] ........................ 141 P.441 Freq prog 1 hyst . ........................ 161
I.410 Exp in by ser en ............................115 P.121 Boost factor src ........................... 141 P.442 Frequency prog 2 . ...................... 161
I.420 Out by serial en . ...........................115

ADV80 • Index Parameters 199

P.443 Freq prog 2 hyst . ........................ 161
P.460 Const speed tol ........................... 163
P.461 Const speed dly .......................... 163
P.480 Heatsnk temp lev ........................ 163
P.481 Heatsnk temp hys ....................... 163
P.500 Switching freq ............................. 164
P.501 Sw freq reduc en . ....................... 164
P.502 Min switch freq ............................ 164
P.520 Overmod max lev . ...................... 164
P.540 Out Vlt auto adj ........................... 164
P.560 Deadtime cmp lev ....................... 165
P.561 Deadtime cmp slp ....................... 165
P.580 Startup display ............................ 165
P.600 Speed dsply fact ......................... 165

Menu S - START-UP
S.000 Mains voltage ............................... 92
S.001 Mains frequency ........................... 92
S.100 Max out voltage ............................ 92
S.101 Base frequency ............................ 92
S.150 Motor rated curr ............................ 93
S.151 Motor pole pairs . .......................... 93
S.152 Motor power factor ....................... 93
S.153 Motor stator R . ............................. 93
S.200 Cmd source sel ............................ 94
S.201 Max ref freq .................................. 95
S.202 Ref 1 Channel .............................. 95
S.203 Frequency ref 0 ............................ 95
S.300 Acc time 1 ..................................... 95
S.301 Dec time 1 .................................... 95
S.400 Manual boost [%] . ........................ 96
S.401 Auto boost en ............................... 96
S.450 Slip compensat ............................. 96
S.451 Slip comp filter .............................. 97
S.900 Measure stator R .......................... 97
S.901 Save parameters .......................... 97

200 ADV80 • Index Parameters

 Gefran worldwide
GEFRAN BENELUX GEFRAN FRANCE GEFRAN SIEI Drives Technology
Lammerdries-Zuid, 14A 4, rue Jean Desparmet - BP 8237 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
B-2250 OLEN 69355 LYON Cedex 08 No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading District,
Ph. +33 (0) 478770300 Shanghai, China 201807
Ph. +32 (0) 14248181
Fax +33 (0) 478770320 Ph. +86 21 69169898
Fax. +32 (0) 14248180
commercial@gefran.fr Fax +86 21 69169333
info@gefran.be
info@gefransiei.com.cn
GEFRAN SUISSE SA
GEFRAN BRASIL GEFRAN SIEI Electric (Shanghai) Pte. Ltd.
Rue Fritz Courvoisier 40
ELETROELETRÔNICA No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading District,
2302 La Chaux-de-Fonds
Avenida Dr. Altino Arantes, Ph. +41 (0) 329684955 Shanghai, China 201807
377/379 Vila Clementino Fax +41 (0) 329683574 Ph. +86 21 69169898
04042-032 SÂO PAULO - SP office@gefran.ch Fax +86 21 69169333
Ph. +55 (0) 1155851133 info@gefransiei.com.cn
Fax +55 (0) 1132974012 GEFRAN - UK Ltd.
gefran@gefran.com.br Capital House, Hadley Park East GEFRAN INDIA Pvt. Ltd
TELFORD, TF1 6QJ Head office (Pune office)
GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND Ph. +44 (0) 845 2604555 Survey No: 182/1 KH, Bhukum,
Philipp-Reis-Straße 9a Fax +44 (0) 845 2604556 Paud road, Taluka – Mulshi,
sales@gefran.co.uk Pune - 411 042. MH, INDIA
63500 SELIGENSTADT
Ph:+91-20-3939 4400
Ph. +49 (0) 61828090
GEFRAN Inc. Fax: +91-20-3939 4401
Fax +49 (0) 6182809222
8 Lowell Avenue gefran.india@gefran.in
vertrieb@gefran.de
WINCHESTER - MA 01890
Toll Free 1-888-888-4474 Branch office (Thane office)
SIEI AREG - GERMANY Fax +1 (781) 7291468 403, Damodar Nivas,
Gottlieb-Daimler-Strasse 17/3 info@gefraninc.com ‘B’ Cabin Road, Near Railway quarters,
D-74385 Pleidelsheim Naupada, Thane (W)
Ph. +49 7144 89 736 0 GEFRAN SIEI - ASIA 400 602 , MH, India
Fax +49 7144 89 736 97 Blk. 30 Loyang way Ph. +91-22-2533 8797
info@sieiareg.de 03-19 Loyang Industrial Estate Fax +91-22-2541 8797
508769 SINGAPORE gefran.india@gefran.in
Gefran España Ph. +65 6 8418300
C/ de Vic, 109-111 Fax. +65 6 7428300 Branch office (Ahmedabad Office)
info@gefransiei.com.sg 20-A, Second Floor,
08160 Montmeló (BARCELONA)
Kala Purnam Building,
Ph. +34 934982643
GEFRAN TAIWAN Near Municipal Market,
Fax +34 935721571 C. G. Road, Ahmedabad
Rm. 3, 9F., No.8, Ln. 157,
comercial.espana@gefran.es Cihui 3rd St., Zhongli City, 380 019, Gujarat, India
Taoyuan County 320, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Phone: +91-79-2640 3591
Tel/Fax +886-3-4273697 Phone/Fax: +91-79-2640 3592
dino.yeh@gefransiei.com.sg gefran.india@gefran.in
Manuale ADV80 -EN

1S9AGVEN
0.2 - 16-7-2012

GEFRAN S.p.A.
Via Sebina 74 Drive & Motion Control Unit
25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (BS) ITALY Via Carducci 24 Technical Assistance :
technohelp@gefran.com
Ph. +39 030 98881 21040 Gerenzano [VA] ITALY
Fax +39 030 9839063 Ph. +39 02 967601 Customer Service :
motioncustomer@gefran.com
info@gefran.com Fax +39 02 9682653 Ph. +39 02 96760500
www.gefran.com infomotion@gefran.com Fax +39 02 96760278